Lucent Technologies FiberReach DDM-2000 User & Service Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Lucent Technologies Manuals
  4. Multiplexer
  5. FiberReach DDM-2000
  6. User & service manual
Lucent Technologies FiberReach DDM-2000 User & Service Manual

Lucent Technologies FiberReach DDM-2000 User & Service Manual

Multiplexer wideband / narrowband shelf tarp release 3.0 and later
Hide thumbs
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual
DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer
Wideband/Narrowband Shelf
TARP Release 3.0 and Later
User/Service Manual
Volume I
363-206-305
Issue 3
June 2000

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading
Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the FiberReach DDM-2000 and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Related Manuals for Lucent Technologies FiberReach DDM-2000

Summary of Contents for Lucent Technologies FiberReach DDM-2000

  • Page 1 DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer Wideband/Narrowband Shelf TARP Release 3.0 and Later User/Service Manual Volume I 363-206-305 Issue 3 June 2000...
  • Page 2 In such event, applicable tariffs require that the customer pay all network charges for traffic. Lucent Technologies cannot be responsible for such charges and will not make any allowance or give any credit for charges that result from unauthorized access.
  • Page 3 5ESS, DACScan, LGX, Safari, SLC, ST, SPQ, and Western Electric are registered trademarks of Lucent Technologies. LineReach is a trademark of Lucent Technologies. ANSI is a registered trademark of American National Standards Institute, Inc. Common Language is a registered trademark and CLEI, CLLI, CLCI, and CLFI are trademarks of Bell Communications Research, Inc.
  • Page 4 1-800-225-RTAC. Documentation Support Telephone Number Lucent Technologies provides a telephone number for customers to report errors or to ask questions about the information in this document. The support telephone number is 1-800-645-6759 or 1-910-727-6681. To order documents, see “Document Ordering Information Products.
  • Page 5 Date: 363-206-305 June 2000 Lucent Technologies welcomes your feedback on this Customer Information Product (CIP). Your comments can be of great value in helping us improve our CIPs. 1. Please rate the effectiveness of this CIP in the following areas:...
  • Page 6 ----------------------------------------------------------- Do Not Cut — Fold Here And Tape ---------------------------------------------------------------------- NO POSTAGE NECESSARY IF MAILED IN THE UNITED STATES BUSINESS REPLY MAIL FIRST CLASS PERMIT NO. 1999 GREENSBORO, NC POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE DOCUMENTATION SERVICES 2400 Reynolda Road Winston-Salem, NC 27199-2029...
  • Page 7 Date: 363-206-305 June 2000 Lucent Technologies welcomes your feedback on this Customer Information Product (CIP). Your comments can be of great value in helping us improve our CIPs. 1. Please rate the effectiveness of this CIP in the following areas:...
  • Page 8 ----------------------------------------------------------- Do Not Cut — Fold Here And Tape ---------------------------------------------------------------------- NO POSTAGE NECESSARY IF MAILED IN THE UNITED STATES BUSINESS REPLY MAIL FIRST CLASS PERMIT NO. 1999 GREENSBORO, NC POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE DOCUMENTATION SERVICES 2400 Reynolda Road Winston-Salem, NC 27199-2029...
  • Page 9 Contents About This Document Purpose Intended Audiences Reason For Issue xlii xlii Multi-Vendor OI xlii xlii How to Use This Manual xliv xliv Safety Instructions xlvi xlvi Product Safety Labels xlvi xlvi Lightwave Safety Guidelines xlvi xlvi General Laser Information xlvi xlvi Lasers and Eye Damage...
  • Page 10 Contents System Introduction Overview Lucent 2000 Product Family Basic Description of the SLC-2000 Access System Basic Description of the DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer DDM-2000 FiberReach Releases Release Descriptions Applications Overview DDM-2000 FiberReach Applications Summary Ring Topologies OC-3 Path Switched Ring OC-12 Path Switched Ring DDM-2000 FiberReach Network Topologies (OC-1) Basic Wideband Shelf Configurations DS1 and T1 Services...
  • Page 11 Contents Circuit Pack Overview 2-25 2-25 29-Type Optical Line Interface (29G-U/29H-U) 2-26 2-26 Circuit Pack Overview 2-26 2-26 DDM-2000 FiberReach Service Applications 2-28 2-28 LAN/WAN Data Networking: DS3 Data Services 2-28 2-28 High Data-rate Subscriber Line (HDSL) Application 2-32 2-32 DDM-2000 FiberReach Service Applications Using the 28G-Type OLIU (Release 2.2 —...
  • Page 12 Contents Shelf Configuration 3-16 3-16 DS1 Services Only 3-17 3-17 T1 Extensions Only 3-19 3-19 T1 Extensions and DS1 Service 3-22 3-22 HDSL Services 3-25 3-25 DS3 and DS1 Services 3-26 3-26 DS3 Interface (BBG4/BBG4B) 3-26 3-26 Data Services Interface 3-28 3-28 STS-3c 0 X1 Application...
  • Page 13 Contents Ringing Generator Units (RGU) 4-11 4-11 AUA421 Channel and Drop Test Unit (CDTU) 4-12 4-12 LEDs 4-12 4-12 Power Minor Alarm 4-13 4-13 Power Distribution 4-14 4-14 Transmission and Synchronization Overview Transmission Interfaces DS1 Transmission Interface OC-1/OC-3/OC-12 Transmission Interface T1 Transmission Interface Transmission and Architecture Wideband Shelf Interfaces and Multiplexing...
  • Page 14 Contents Operations Interfaces Overview Craft Interface Terminals (CIT) CIT Access Using a PC as a CIT Remote Access Using the DCC CPro Graphical User Interface and Provisioning Tool User Panel User Panel LEDs 6-10 6-10 FE SEL Pushbutton 6-10 6-10 ACO/TST Pushbutton 6-11 6-11...
  • Page 15 Contents Detailed Description of Operation BBG8/BBG8B SYSCTL Hardware Setting BBG8/BBG8B SYSCTL Quick Reference Summary ECC2 User Panel Circuit Pack Description 7-11 7-11 Purpose of Circuit 7-11 7-11 Faceplate Controls and Indicators 7-11 7-11 Detailed Description of Operation 7-13 7-13 Wideband Shelf - Transmission Circuit Packs 7-15 7-15 BBF1B DS1 Circuit Pack Description...
  • Page 16 Contents General Description of Operation 7-39 7-39 Detailed Description of Operation 7-39 7-39 T1EXT Hardware Settings 7-43 7-43 T1EXT Quick Reference Summary 7-45 7-45 BBG19 DS3 Data Services Interface Circuit Pack Description 7-46 7-46 Purpose of Circuit 7-46 7-46 BBG19 DS3 Faceplate Indicators 7-46 7-46 General Description of Operation...
  • Page 17 Contents Purpose of Circuit 7-82 7-82 28G-U/28G2-U OLIU Faceplate Indicators 7-82 7-82 General Description of Operation 7-84 7-84 Detailed Description of Operation 7-85 7-85 28G-U/28G2-U OLIU Quick Reference Summary 7-88 7-88 29G-U/29H-U OLIU Circuit Pack Description (Long Reach OC-12 Interface) 7-89 7-89 Narrowband Shelf - Introduction...
  • Page 18 Contents Memory Administration Service Affecting Actions DS-1/T1 Multiplexing and Mapping Wideband Shelf Provisioning Default Provisioning Remote Provisioning 8-10 8-10 Automatic Provisioning on Circuit Pack Replacement 8-10 8-10 Feature Packaging Provisioning 8-10 8-10 Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) Provisioning 8-10 8-10 Port State Provisioning 8-11 8-11 Channel State Provisioning...
  • Page 19 Contents OC-1 Ring Pass-Through Example 8-44 8-44 Example Cross-Connections 8-45 8-45 OC-1 Ring Hairpin Routing, Single-Homed Example 8-46 8-46 Example Cross-Connections 8-47 8-47 OC-1 Ring Hairpin Routing, Dual-Homed Example 8-48 8-48 Example Cross-Connections 8-49 8-49 Hairpin Local Drop Routing Example 8-50 8-50 Example Cross-Connections...
  • Page 20 Contents Multi-Vendor OI Inservice Upgrades 9-10 9-10 Maintenance Signaling 9-10 9-10 Fault Detection, Isolation, and Reporting 9-13 9-13 Detection 9-13 9-13 Isolation 9-13 9-13 Reporting 9-13 9-13 Protection Switching 9-14 9-14 Path Protection Switching (Path Switched Rings) 9-14 9-14 OC-3/OC-1 Ring Interworking 9-17 9-17 OC-3/OC-1 Path Switched Ring (0x1)
  • Page 21 Contents Severely Errored Seconds (SES) 9-30 9-30 Unavailable Seconds (UAS) 9-30 9-30 Line Protection Switch Counts 9-30 9-30 STS Pointer Justification Count (PJC) 9-30 9-30 STS-1 Path Parameters 9-31 9-31 Performance Monitoring Enabling 9-31 9-31 STS-1 Path Coding Violations (B3 Parity) 9-31 9-31 Errored Seconds (ES)
  • Page 22 Contents Alarms and Status Report 9-38 9-38 Provisioning Reports 9-38 9-38 Database Change Transmission to OS 9-39 9-39 Performance Monitoring Reports 9-39 9-39 TCA Summary Report 9-39 9-39 Performance Status Reports 9-39 9-39 Maintenance History Report 9-39 9-39 State Report 9-39 9-39 Path State Report...
  • Page 23 Contents Long Reach OC-3 Interface (28G-U/28G2-U OLIU) 10-27 10-27 Long Reach OC-12 Interface (29G-U OLIU) 10-31 10-31 Long Reach OC-12 Interface (29H-U OLIU) 10-32 10-32 OC-3 Optical Interface Mixing 10-36 10-36 Plug-In Maintenance Sparing Guidelines 10-39 10-39 Universal Optical Connectors 10-42 10-42 SONET Overhead Bytes...
  • Page 24 Contents Temperature and Humidity 10-55 10-55 EMC Requirements 10-55 10-55 Earthquake Requirements 10-55 10-55 Fire Resistance 10-55 10-55 Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 10-56 10-56 Canadian Standards Association 10-56 10-56 Power Requirements 10-56 10-56 Shelf Fuses 10-56 10-56 Power Dissipation 10-56 10-56 DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer Reliability 10-59 10-59...
  • Page 25 Contents Commands 11-17 11-17 RTRV-ALM Reports 11-394 11-394 RTRV-HSTY Reports 11-415 11-415 A SONET Overview Overview History Basic Purpose Technical Overview SONET Signal Hierarchy SONET Layers SONET Frame Structure Section Overhead Line Overhead Path Overhead STS-1 Path Overhead VT Path Overhead SONET Multiplexing Procedure A-10 A-10...
  • Page 26 Contents xxvi Issue 3 June 2000...

  • Page 27: Table Of Contents

    Figures About This Document Safety Label Position on FiberReach Shelf xlix xlix Static Control Wrist Strap Product Support lxvii lxvii System Introduction Example of DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer in the Network Applications Path Switched Ring OC-3 Path Switched Ring Using OC-3 Multiplexer and FiberReach Multiplexer With OC-3 Optics OC-12 Path Switched Ring Using DDM-2000...
  • Page 28 Figures 2-11 DDM-2000 FiberReach Single Homing to a Stand-Alone OC-1 Hub Host 2-18 2-18 2-12 Triple OC-1 Multiplexer Application 2-19 2-19 2-13 OC-1 Ring Pass-Through in a Function Unit 2-21 2-21 2-14 Single-Homed Hairpin Routing 2-22 2-22 2-15 Dual-Homed Hairpin Routing 2-23 2-23 2-16...
  • Page 29 Figures 2-35 FiberReach OC-3c Extension on OC-12 Ring Application (Release 3.1 or Later) 2-46 2-46 2-36 STS-3c Dual 0X1 Application (Release 3.1 or Later) 2-47 2-47 2-37 SLC-2000 System Hosting a FiberReach NBS Through a Collocated WBS 2-49 2-49 2-38 SLC-2000 System Hosting a FiberReach NBS using 26G2-U OLIUs and a J1C265AA-1, L4 ARM Shelf...
  • Page 30 Figures OC-1 Optics with BBG19 DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer Wideband Shelf — with BBG4B DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer Wideband Shelf — with BBG19 DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer Wideband Shelf —with 22-Type DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer Wideband Shelf — with OC-12 Optics DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer Wideband Shelf —...
  • Page 31 Figures 3-22 DDM-2000 FiberReach with Four 1x1 Protected T1 Extensions and Eight 1x1 Protected DS1 Services 3-23 3-23 3-23 DDM-2000 FiberReach with Unprotected T1 Extensions and 1x7 Protected DS1 Services 3-24 3-24 3-24 DDM-2000 FiberReach — 6 Unprotected HDSL Circuits (Unprotected) 3-25 3-25 3-25...
  • Page 32 Figures DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer — Other Power Options Wall DT Powering (Power Supply for WB and Power Supply for NB) AUA413 and AUA423 Ringing Generator Units 4-11 4-11 Circuit Pack Power and LED Control 4-13 4-13 4-10 Typical -48 Volt Power Supply for DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer Single Shelf 4-14 4-14...
  • Page 33 Figures Circuit Pack Descriptions BBG8 SYSCTL Circuit Pack BBG8 SYSCTL Circuit Pack Block Diagram BBG8/BBG8B SYSCTL Option Switches DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer ECC2 User Panel 7-12 7-12 ECC2 User Panel Block Diagram 7-14 7-14 BBF1B DS1 Circuit Pack 7-15 7-15 BBF1B DS1 Circuit Pack Block Diagram 7-17 7-17 BBF1B DS1 Option Switches...
  • Page 34 Figures 7-32 28G-U/28G2-U OLIU Circuit Pack — 28-Type Pair with Interconnect Cable Assembly 7-83 7-83 7-33 28G-U/28G2-U OLIU Circuit Pack Block Diagram 7-85 7-85 7-34 Optical System Interfaces (Points S and R) 7-90 7-90 7-35 Narrowband Shelf 7-91 7-91 7-36 AUA413 RGU Circuit Pack 7-92 7-92...
  • Page 35 Figures 8-15 Virtual Slot Concept (Octet Mode) 8-67 8-67 Maintenance Description DDM-2000 FiberReach Wideband Shelf Single-Ended Operations Philosophy Three-Tiered Operations Example of Maintenance Signals as a Result of Unprotected Incoming OC-1 Failure for VT1.5 Ring Applications 9-11 9-11 Maintenance Signaling — VT Ring Application 9-12 9-12 Two-Fiber Unidirectional Ring...
  • Page 36 Figures 11-4 Automated Transmission Test of DS1 Signal in MUX Direction 11-377 11-5 Automated Transmission Test of DS1 Signal in DEMUX Direction 11-378 11-6 Automated Transmission Test of DS3 Signal in MUX Direction 11-383 11-7 Automated Transmission Test of DS3 Signal in DEMUX Direction 11-383 A SONET Overview...
  • Page 37 Tables Shelf Descriptions and Configurations DDM-2000 FiberReach Wideband Shelf Plug-Ins 3-14 3-14 DDM-2000 FiberReach Narrowband Shelf Channel Unit 3-34 3-34 Transmission and Synchronization Synchronization Messages Using K2 Byte 5-16 5-16 Synchronization Messages using S1 Byte 5-17 5-17 Operations Interfaces DDM-2000 FiberReach Pushbutton Combinations 6-12 6-12 Circuit Pack Descriptions DS1 Cable LBO Settings...
  • Page 38 Tables Software Compatibility 8-14 8-14 Software and Circuit Pack Compatibility Matrix 8-15 8-15 Parameters Provisionable via Hardware Switches 8-17 8-17 DDM-2000 FiberReach Parameters Provisionable via the CIT 8-18 8-18 DDM-2000 FiberReach Manual VT1.5 Cross Connections (Termination/Drop) in a 1 x 1 Configuration 8-23 8-23...
  • Page 39 Tables 10-2 DS3 Interface Modes 10-5 10-5 10-3 Enhanced DS3 Performance Monitoring Modes 10-6 10-6 10-4 22D-U OLIU Specifications 10-14 10-14 10-5 22D-U OLIU Link Budgets (Note 1) 10-15 10-15 10-6 22F-Type and 22G-Type OLIU Specifications 10-19 10-19 10-7 22F-Type and 22G-Type OLIU Link Budgets 10-20 10-20 10-8...
  • Page 40 Tables 10-30 Transmission Specifications — Multiparty and FSR Channel Units 10-68 10-68 10-31 Transmission Specifications — AUA45 Dual Ringing Repeater Channel Unit 10-70 10-70 10-32 Transmission Specifications — VF Channel Units with Adjustable Settings 10-72 10-72 ® 10-33 400 Electrical and Transmission Specifications 10-74 10-74...
  • Page 41 About This Document Purpose This DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer Wideband/Narrowband Shelf TARP Release 3.0 and Later User/Service Manual covers Releases 3.0 and later and provides the following: Information concerning SLC Release 4.4 and later Detailed descriptive information to circuit pack level Description of application arrangements possible using the DDM-2000 FiberReach multiplexer with other members of the 2000 Product Family Technical specifications...
  • Page 42 363-206-305 About This Document Reason For Issue This document replaces the DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer Wideband/ Narrowband Shelf TARP Release 3.0 User/Service Manual, Volume I and Volume II, Issue 2 . Description, application, and engineering information has been updated/added to include FiberReach Multiplexer Release 4.0. Release descriptions are listed in Chapter 1, “System Introduction”.
  • Page 43 363-206-305 About This Document DDM-2000 FiberReach Release 3.0 and later is developed to be compatible with any other-vendor NEs that also support TARP , OSI, and TL1/X.25 as specified in Telcordia Technologies GR-253. In addition, DDM-2000’s TARP Manual Adjacency feature enables DDM-2000 to operate in networks that include CMISE- based NEs which may not support TARP propagation.
  • Page 44 363-206-305 About This Document How to Use This Manual This user/service manual is organized as follows: About This Document This chapter defines the purpose, scope, and intended audience for this document, provides introductory and support information on this document, lists related documentation and training courses, and tells how to obtain technical support on the system.
  • Page 45 363-206-305 About This Document Chapter 10, Technical Specifications This chapter contains the technical specifications for the DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer. Chapter 11, Commands and Reports This chapter provides a detailed description of the commands and reports that can be entered and received, respectively, at the ASCII terminal interface of the DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer.
  • Page 46 363-206-305 About This Document Safety Instructions Product Safety Labels Important safety instructions are included in various sections of this manual. In addition to these instructions, there are other general safety instructions you must follow. These instructions involve lasers, lightwave optical cable and connectors, and precautions when handling circuit packs to prevent damage from electrostatic discharge.
  • Page 47 363-206-305 About This Document Conventional lasers can produce an intense beam of monochromatic light. The term monochromaticity means a single wavelength output of pure color that may be visible or invisible to the eye. A conventional laser produces a small-size beam of light, and because the beam size is small the power density (also called irradiance) is very high.
  • Page 48 363-206-305 About This Document Lightwave Safety Precautions In its normal operating mode, a lightwave system is totally enclosed and presents no risk of eye injury. It is a Class I system under the FDA/CDRH scheme. The lightguide cables that interconnect various components of a lightwave system can disconnect or break, and may expose people to lightwave emission.
  • Page 49 363-206-305 About This Document SIDE MOUNTING BRACKET POSITIONS (LEFT SIDE OF SHELF) NOTICE UNTERMINATED OPTICAL CONNECTORS MAY EMIT LASER RADIATION, DO NOT VIEW BEAM WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS DANGER INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN, AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM. - NOTICE- UNTERMINATED OPTICAL CONNECTORS MAY EMIT LASER RADIATION, DO NOT VIEW BEAM...
  • Page 50 363-206-305 About This Document Safety Precautions for Unenclosed Systems During service, maintenance, or restoration, a lightwave transmission system is considered unenclosed. Under these conditions, follow these practices: Only authorized, trained personnel shall be permitted to do service, maintenance, and restoration. Avoid exposing the eye to emissions from unterminated, energized optical connectors at close distances.
  • Page 51 363-206-305 About This Document When using your telecommunications equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to people, including the following: Read and understand all instructions. Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product. This product must be installed and serviced only by qualified service technicians.
  • Page 52 363-206-305 About This Document Handle all circuit packs by the faceplate or latch and by the top and bottom outermost edges. Never touch the components, conductors, or connector pins. Observe warning labels on bags and cartons. Whenever possible, do not remove circuit packs from antistatic packaging until ready to insert them into slots.
  • Page 53 363-206-305 About This Document IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Read and understand all instructions. Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product. Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, or table. The product may fall, causing serious damage to the product. Slots and openings in this product's back or bottom are provided for ventilation.
  • Page 54 363-206-305 About This Document IMPORTANT INSTALLATION SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Read and understand all instructions. Installation and maintenance procedures must be followed and performed by trained personnel only. All DS1 and T1 extension interfaces should not leave the building premises unless connected to telecommunication devices providing primary or secondary protection, as applicable.
  • Page 55 363-206-305 About This Document Related Documentation The following documents provide additional information about the DDM-2000 Multiplexers: Number: 363-206-200 Title: DDM-2000 Multiplexer Applications, Planning, and Ordering Guide Audience: Network planners, equipment engineers, and sales teams Content: Features, applications, high-level description, operations, administration, maintenance, planning, ordering, product support, reliability information, technical specifications, and a synchronous optical network (SONET) overview.
  • Page 56 363-206-305 About This Document Number: 363-206-208 Title: DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer Installation Manual Audience: Customers planning to install the equipment Content: Customer installation instructions Number: 363-206-220 Title: DDM-2000 OC-3/OC-12 Multiplexer Circuit Pack Options Job Aid Audience: Maintenance personnel Content: List of circuit pack options Number: 363-206-222 Title: DDM-2000 OC-3/OC-12 Multiplexer Acceptance Task List Job Aid Audience: Maintenance personnel...
  • Page 57 363-206-305 About This Document Number: 363-206-300 Title: DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer Applications, Planning, and Ordering Guide Audience: Network planners, equipment engineers, and sales teams Content: Features, applications, high-level description, operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning (OAM&P), system planning, ordering, product support, reliability information, technical specifications, and a synchronous optical network (SONET) overview Number: 363-206-310 Title: DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer Installation Manual...
  • Page 58 Content: Integrated Transport Management Subnetwork Controller information (Release 8.0 and later) The following documents provide information about Operations Interworking: Number: 824-102-144 Title: Lucent Technologies 2000 Product Family Multi-Vendor Operations Interworking Guide Audience: System Planners and Engineers Content: Operations interworking information for the Lucent Technologies...
  • Page 59 363-206-305 About This Document Number: 824-102-147 Title: Lucent Technologies 2000 Product Family Operations Interworking Guide Audience: System Planners and Engineers Content: Operations interworking information for the Lucent Technologies Product Family 2000 systems, including DDM-2000 Multiplexers and FT-2000 OC-48 Lightwave Systems ®...
  • Page 60 363-206-305 About This Document Number: 363-208-003 Title: SLC-2000 Access System, Command and Message/Service Manual Audience: Installers, technicians, engineers, and troubleshooters Content: A tutorial on system commands and messages, as well as detailed information about system commands in manual-page format. The document pages are organized by user interface panel (UIP) commands and craft interface terminal (CIT) commands.
  • Page 61 363-206-305 About This Document The following documents provide information about the SLC LineReach Access System: Number: 363-208-400 Title: SLC LineReach Access System Applications, Planning, and Ordering Guide Audience: Network planners, equipment engineers, and sales teams Content: Features, applications, high-level description, operations, administration, maintenance, planning, ordering, product support, reliability information, and technical specifications Number: 363-208-401...
  • Page 62 363-206-305 About This Document DDM-2000 FiberReach Drawings ED-8C762-20 DDM-2000 FiberReach Cable Assemblies ED-8C762-30 DDM-2000 FiberReach Wideband Shelf ED-8C843-30 DDM-2000 FiberReach Shelf Carrier Assembly ED-8C785-20 DDM-2000 FiberReach Cable Assemblies ED-8C785-30 DDM-2000 FiberReach Narrowband Shelf ED-8C843-31 DDM-2000 FiberReach Wall DT Unit ED-8C843-32 DDM-2000 FiberReach LGX Panel ED-8C843-34 DDM-2000 FiberReach Release 2.0 Software ED-8C843-35 DDM-2000 FiberReach Release 3.0 Software 108680224...
  • Page 63 363-206-305 About This Document DDM-2000 OC-3 Drawings ED-8C724-10 OC-3 and OC-3/OC-12 Combined Bay Arrangements ED-8C724-15 Cabling Plan (Rear Access) ED-8C724-16 Cabling Plan (Front Access) ED-8C724-20 Cable Assemblies ED-8C724-21 Cable Assemblies ED-8C724-22 Cable Assemblies ED-8C724-30 DDM-2000 Shelf Assembly ED-8C724-31 User Panel Assembly ED-8C724-34 OC-3 Releases 2 and 3 Software Ordering ED-8C724-36 OC-3 Release 5 Software Ordering ED-8C724-37 OC-3 Release 6 Software Ordering...
  • Page 64 801-525-168 Floor Plan Data Sheets DDM-2000 equipment is also available in traditional loop enclosure arrangements, descriptions of which may be found in the following Lucent Technologies practices: Number: 363-205-000 Title: SLC Series 5 Carrier System Ordering Guide — Loop Transmission...
  • Page 65 363-206-305 About This Document Number: 626-500-105 Title: 80-type Cabinets Ordering Information and Lettering Guide Number: 626-500-115 Title: 90-type Cabinets Coding and Ordering Information The following documents provide additional information about related equipment: Number: 365-303-102 Title: DSX-3 Cross-Connect Bay, Description, Operation, and Maintenance Manual Number: 365-301-130 Title: System III DSX-3/4, Planning, Engineering, Installation, and...
  • Page 66 363-206-305 About This Document Customer Technical Support (CTS) CTS is available through a toll-free technical assistance number. Lucent maintains a highly-skilled, multi-tier support structure consisting of regional engineers, product specialists, and system designers to support your network equipment. All levels of technical expertise may be called upon to solve the customer problem (refer to Figure 3).
  • Page 67 363-206-305 About This Document CUSTOMER Craft Customer Escalation Procedures LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES R TAC First Lucent Contact Supports Customer Supports Lucent Installer LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES NETWORK SYSTEMS TRANSMISSION CTS RTAC Assistance Problem Diagnosis/Isolation Provide Solutions/W ork Arounds Consultation LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES BELL LABORA TORIES...
  • Page 68 The group will also respond to any customer changes that occur during installation. All equipment engineered and installed by Lucent Technologies is thoroughly tested and integrated into a reliable system at cutover. Once approved by Lucent’s Quality Assurance Test group, the system is turned over to the customer.
  • Page 69 363-206-305 About This Document Customer Technical Support Enhanced Services The goal of Lucent Technologies’ Customer Technical Support Enhanced Services is to keep Lucent Transmission Systems products operating at maximum performance and to prevent problems from interrupting service to customers. Typical Enhanced Services include:...
  • Page 70 * For commercial customers, a check, money order, purchase order number, or charge card number is required with all orders. Make checks payable to Lucent Technologies. Lucent Technologies entities should use Form IND 1-80.80 FA, available through the Customer Information Center.
  • Page 71 RBOC/BOC customers should process document orders or standing order requests through their Company Documentation Coordinator. For questions regarding standing orders or to be placed on a standing order list, call the applicable Lucent Technologies Customer Information Center number listed previously. How to Comment on This Document Feedback forms are located immediately after the title page of this document.
  • Page 72 CD-ROM is available by annual subscription (on standing order). To order, call your Technical Information Resource Manager, your Lucent Technologies Account Executive, or the Lucent Technologies Customer Information Center at 1-888-LUCENT8 (1-888-582-3688). For pricing information, contact your Lucent Technologies Network...

  • Page 73: System Introduction

    System Introduction Contents Overview Lucent 2000 Product Family Basic Description of the SLC-2000 Access System Basic Description of the DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer DDM-2000 FiberReach Releases Release Descriptions Issue 3 June 2000...
  • Page 74 Contents 1-ii Issue 3 June 2000...
  • Page 75 System Introduction Overview This chapter introduces the Lucent 2000 Product Family and briefly describes the DDM-2000 FiberReach product. Lucent 2000 Product Family Lucent is focused on a carefully planned and growing product family designed to provide total network solutions. The 2000 Product Family complies with the synchronous optical network (SONET) standard and builds on features and capabilities that customers have found to be useful and successful in networks such as single-ended maintenance features and product upgrade capabilities.
  • Page 76 Basic Description of the SLC-2000 Access System The SLC -2000 Access System is the Lucent Technologies real-world digital loop carrier (DLC) solution that builds upon our proven digital loop carrier system experience. It is based on standard interfaces, network element commonality, and operational ease.
  • Page 77 363-206-305 System Introduction The SLC -2000 Access System builds upon many of the administrative and operational features of the industry standard SLC Series 5 Carrier System and the SLC 96 Carrier System. The SLC -2000 Access System offers better ways of providing services and supports the standard digital interfaces for universal and integrated systems.
  • Page 78 363-206-305 System Introduction feel that matches the DDM-2000 OC-3 and OC-12 Multiplexers. The DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer fits into the already existing SONET networks and interworks with the existing OSs. Remote operations are via the International Standards Organization (ISO) standard 7-layer open systems interconnection (OSI) protocol, while a user panel and craft interface terminal (CIT) port support local operations needs.
  • Page 79 363-206-305 System Introduction SLC LineReach Access System — The SLC LineReach Access System is a small digital loop carrier (DLC) remote terminal (RT) that provides up to 48 lines of POTS- type services, special services, or other DS0 services. Feature package 1.1 (FP1.1) supports up to two DS1-type interfaces and can be deployed in either a universal or integrated DLC configuration.

  • Page 80: Example Of Ddm-2000 Fiberreach Multiplexer In The Network

    363-206-305 System Introduction — For more information regarding the SLC LineReach Access System, as well as these new applications, refer to the SLC LineReach Access System Applications, Planning, and Ordering Guide , 363- 208-400. The wideband shelf and narrowband shelf communicate with each other via standard DS1 interfaces.
  • Page 81 363-206-305 System Introduction DDM-2000 FiberReach Releases NOTE: DDM-2000 FiberReach Release 3.0, 3.1, and 4.0 are NOT compatible with previous releases of DDM-2000 FiberReach, OC-3, OC-12 and FT-2000 that do not support TARP , thus care should be taken to avoid isolating NEs that have not yet been upgraded to Release 3.0 or later when upgrading a subnetwork.
  • Page 82 363-206-305 System Introduction Release 3.0 (TARP Release) supports the following features: Pointer Justification Count (PJC). This performance monitoring parameter indicates a frequency error in the network or other potential synchronization problems. It provides a threshold crossing alert (TCA) when the STS-1 pointer justification count in a performance bin exceeds a user provisioned threshold value.
  • Page 83 363-206-305 System Introduction ITM SNC Release 5.0 enhancements for FiberReach Release 3.0: — ITM SNC software download to FiberReach — ITM SNC as the TL1 GNE — ITN SNC backup and restore enhancements. Default TID. The default Target Identifier (TID) for R 3.0 is LT-DDM-2000, instead of the previous default of Site#NE#.
  • Page 84 363-206-305 System Introduction Multi-media Data Services: A new DS3 (BBG19) interface provides the flexibility to offer a full range of multi-media data services via embedded and new DDM-2000 networks. This full-solution offering is made possible by interfacing DDM-2000 to any of the numerous commercially available data edge devices which provide the various data services interfaces.
  • Page 85 Applications Contents Overview DDM-2000 FiberReach Applications Summary Ring Topologies OC-3 Path Switched Ring OC-12 Path Switched Ring DDM-2000 FiberReach Network Topologies (OC-1) Basic Wideband Shelf Configurations DS1 and T1 Services Single-Homed Access via Backbone Ring 2-10 2-10 Dual-Homed Access via a Backbone Ring 2-13 2-13 Integration with Dual Wire Center Applications...
  • Page 86 Contents Circuit Pack Overview 2-26 2-26 DDM-2000 FiberReach Service Applications 2-28 2-28 LAN/WAN Data Networking: DS3 Data Services 2-28 2-28 High Data-rate Subscriber Line (HDSL) Application 2-32 2-32 DDM-2000 FiberReach Service Applications Using the 28G-Type OLIU (Release 2.2 — Non-TARP Release) 2-34 2-34 DDM-2000 FiberReach Service Applications Using the...

  • Page 87: Applications

    Product Family, meets these diverse network needs. DDM-2000 FiberReach Applications Summary Lucent Technologies' 2000 Product Family has set the standard for networking flexibility. The newest member of this family, the DDM-2000 FiberReach ® Multiplexer, extends the benefits of the DDM-2000 Multiplexer and SLC...
  • Page 88 363-206-305 Applications Wideband Shelf — DS1 Services (via DSX-1 or T1 carrier access) — Video Transport. Narrowband Shelf — Telephony — DS0 Specials — Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN). DDM-2000 FiberReach interworks with DDM-2000 OC-3/OC-12 and SLC -2000 Access System hosts via an exceptional variety of networking options, including single-homed OC-1 path-switched ring extensions and fully survivable dual- homing topologies.
  • Page 89 363-206-305 Applications Ring Topologies The need to prevent service outage caused by network failure has created a new class of applications. The 2000 Product Family offers a wide range of self-healing network features that automatically protect against service outage caused by cable cuts and equipment failures, which in turn protect customers and generate increased revenue.

  • Page 90: Path Switched Ring

    363-206-305 Applications AC CA AC CA Node A Node A Host Host Node B Node B Node Node Node C Node C SWITCH MADE AC CA AC CA (a.) Normal Operation (b.) Path Failure Figure 2-1. Path Switched Ring A network which requires the bulk of its traffic to be dropped at a single node is an ideal application for path switched rings.
  • Page 91 363-206-305 Applications OC-3 Path Switched Ring A DDM-2000 FiberReach can be equipped with OC-3 optics. This option offers a cost effective solution at locations where the dropped traffic is primarily VT1.5 based and is accessed from any one of the 3 STS-1s. DDM-2000 OC-3 multiplexers can be mixed in the same OC-3 ring.

  • Page 92: Path Switched Ring Using

    363-206-305 Applications DDM-2000 FiberReach OC-1 EC-1 DDM-2000 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 DDM-2000 DDM-2000 FiberReach OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 DDM-2000 OC-3 OC-1 DDM-2000 FiberReach tpa853761/01 Figure 2-2. OC-3 Path Switched Ring Using OC-3 Multiplexer and FiberReach Multiplexer With OC-3 Optics Issue 3 June 2000...
  • Page 93 363-206-305 Applications OC-12 Path Switched Ring A DDM-2000 FiberReach can be equipped with OC-12 optics. This option offers a cost effective solution at locations where the dropped traffic is primarily VT1.5 based and is accessed from any one of the 12 STS-1s. FiberReach multiplexers equipped with OC-12 optics in Release 4.0 and later can be mixed in the same OC-12 ring.

  • Page 94: Path Switched Ring Using Ddm-2000

    363-206-305 Applications DDM-2000 OC-3 EC-1 OC-3c DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-12 OC-12 DDM-2000 DDM-2000 FiberReach OC-12 OC-12 OC-3c OC-12 OC-12 DDM-2000 OC-3 with OC-12 optics OC-1 DDM-2000 FiberReach tpa852606-01 Figure 2-3. OC-12 Path Switched Ring Using DDM-2000 OC-12, OC-3, and FiberReach Multiplexers With OC-12 Optics Issue 3 June 2000...
  • Page 95 363-206-305 Applications DDM-2000 FiberReach Network Topologies (OC-1) Business Carrier Access is one of today's fastest growing network applications. To supply the advanced communications services demanded by many business customers, local exchange carriers and competitive access providers are dedicating access networks between these customers and their wire centers. Long-distance voice and data services (for example, 1-800 reservations and customer support lines) are delivered from interexchange carrier (IXC) points of presence (POP) to the access networks along with any intra-LATA services...
  • Page 96 363-206-305 Applications Single-Homed Access via Backbone Ring Figure 2-4 and Figure 2-5 illustrate how single-homed OC-1 extensions can satisfy a growing access network. Single-homing applications connect both rotations of the OC-1 extension to a single DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer or SLC - 2000 Access System host.

  • Page 97: Ddm-2000 Fiberreach Rings Single Homing To A Ddm-2000 Oc-3 Ring

    363-206-305 Applications DDM-2000 RT Sites FiberReach Wideband Shelf SLC ®-2000 Wire Center Access System DS1/T1 OC-3 DDM-2000 OC-1 OC-3 DDM-2000 Host DS1/EC-1/IS3 DDM-2000 OC-3 Systems FiberReach Up to six Wideband Shelf separate OC-1 extensions per DS1/T1 DDM-2000 OC-3 OC-1 OC-1 Multiple DDM-2000 DDM-2000...

  • Page 98: Ddm-2000 Fiberreach Rings Single Homing To A Ddm-2000 Oc-12 Ring

    363-206-305 Applications DDM-2000 FiberReach can also be extended from an OC-12/virtual tributary (VT) path-switched ring as shown in Figure 2-5. The DDM-2000 OC-3 system at the host node grooms and packs VT1.5 channels from the OC-1 extension rings for maximum utilization of the OC-12 backbone ring. Both the host OC-3 and OC-12 systems use the ring (0x1) low-speed interfaces, with 60 millisecond path protection switching performed, at the remote DDM-2000 FiberReach and wire center DDM-2000 OC-3 endpoints.

  • Page 99: Ddm-2000 Fiberreach Dual Homing To A Ddm-2000 Oc-3/Oc-12 Ring

    363-206-305 Applications Dual-Homed Access via a Backbone Ring Dual homing offers even more survivability than a single-homed network. Even the catastrophic failure of a host node can be protected. Figure 2-6 illustrates dual-homed OC-1 extensions from four remote nodes to an OC-3 access ring. The host nodes can be two DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexers, two SLC -2000 Access Systems, or one DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer and one SLC -2000 Access System.

  • Page 100: Fiberreach Ring Dual Homing To A

    363-206-305 Applications Integration with Dual Wire Center Applications The survivability and networking benefits of Lucent’s dual ring interworking solution are cost-effectively extended to smaller locations via DDM-2000 FiberReach dual-homing capabilities. Figure 2-7 shows an OC-3 feeder ring from duplicated wire centers, with dual-homed DDM-2000 FiberReach extensions from selected feeder ring remote sites.

  • Page 101: Fiberreach Ring Dual Homing To A Ddm-2000 Oc-12 Ring In A Dual Wire Center Application

    363-206-305 Applications Dual-homing applications can also be upgraded to an OC-12 backbone ring as shown in Figure 2-8. As with the single-homing application, the DDM-2000 OC-3 host system supplies the VT1.5 grooming necessary for optimum backbone utilization. Wire Center #1 EC-1 RT Sites DDM-2000...

  • Page 102: Single-Homed Oc-1 Ring To A Ddm-2000

    363-206-305 Applications Single Homing to Linear DDM-2000 OC-3 Networks In business applications where the DDM-2000 OC-3 host is a node on a linear topology, two single-homed OC-1 ring extensions can be provided to multiple DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexers (see Figure 2-9). In this tapered linear application configuration, function slot "C"...
  • Page 103 363-206-305 Applications Stand-Alone OC-1 Ring/Hub Networks In applications such as campus or other self-contained environments where an OC-3 or OC-12 backbone ring is not needed or practical, DDM-2000 FiberReach can be deployed in a stand-alone OC-1 ring. This OC-1 ring extension can be configured directly from a DDM-2000/ SLC -2000 shelf with 27-type circuit packs in the Main slots.
  • Page 104 363-206-305 Applications This application can be further expanded to hub up to two OC-1 rings from a stand-alone DDM-2000/ SLC -2000 host system, as shown in Figure 2-11. In a future release, up to six OC-1 rings can be supported by equipping the function slots of the DDM-2000/ SLC -2000 shelf with 27G2-U OLIU circuit packs.
  • Page 105 363-206-305 Applications Another configuration of the OC-1 hub network uses the full capacity of the OC-3 shelf by dropping up to 28 VT1.5 channels to the low-speed DS1 slots for each of the 3 OC-1 ring extensions. The total capacity is 84 DS1 signals. This triple OC-1 Multiplexer configuration, shown in Figure 2-12, supports three independent OC- 1/DS1 ring networks with a consolidated host node for operations access, network synchronization, and efficient physical packaging.
  • Page 106 363-206-305 Applications Enhanced Routing The DDM-2000 hosts can support a collection of enhanced routing features, as shown in Figure 2-13, Figure 2-14, Figure 2-15, and Figure 2-16. These features support cross-connections within and across Function Units without using bandwidth on the main OC-3 or OC-12 rings. This allows even greater networking flexibility and efficiency.
  • Page 107 363-206-305 Applications OC-1 Ring Pass-Through This enhanced routing option establishes pass-through cross-connections for channels on an OC-1 ring terminating on a pair of 27G2-U OLIUs in the Function Units of a DDM OC-3. This application must use a pair of 27G2-U OLIUs in the function units slots.
  • Page 108 363-206-305 Applications OC-1 Ring Hairpin Routing, Single-Homed This routing option establishes cross-connections between channels on two separate OC-1 facilities that terminate on 27G2-U OLIU circuit packs in either the same or different Function Units (see Figure 2-14). In the single-homed configuration, both rotations of each of the two OC-1 rings terminate on a pair of 27G2-U OLIUs.
  • Page 109 363-206-305 Applications OC-1 Ring Hairpin Routing, Dual-Homed This routing option establishes cross-connections between channels on two separate OC-1 facilities that terminate on 27G2-U OLIU circuit packs in either the same or different Function Units. (See Figure 2-15.) In the dual-homed arrangement, only one rotation of each of the two OC-1 rings terminates on a single OC-3 shelf.

  • Page 110: Hairpin Local Drop Routing

    363-206-305 Applications Hairpin Local Drop Routing Figure 2-16 shows a hairpin local drop routing. This routing option establishes path-protection switched drop cross-connections between channels on an OC-1 ring and ports/channels on DS1/EC1/OC-3 circuit packs. (See Figure 2-16.) The OC-1 facility terminates on a pair of 27G2-U OLIU circuit packs in the Function Unit slots.
  • Page 111 363-206-305 Applications A mix of the enhanced routing services shown in Figure 2-14, Figure 2-15, and Figure 2-16 can be created in a single DDM-2000 FiberReach host. OC-3 Release 9.1 and later software and 27G2-U OLIUs are needed for these services. DDM-2000 FiberReach Network Topologies (OC-3 and OC-12) 28-Type Optical Line Interface (28G-U/28G2-U)
  • Page 112 363-206-305 Applications DS1 or HDSL Central Office EC-1 OC-3 DDM-2000 OC-3 R11.0 22F or G type OLIU DDM-2000 SLC-2000 OC-3 OC-3 Path Switched Ring OC-3 R11.0 R11.0 22F or G type OLIU 22F or G type OLIU EC-1 OC-1 OC-3 28G type OLIU DDM-2000 FiberReach...
  • Page 113 363-206-305 Applications The 29-type provides timing for the entire wideband shelf. Two modes will be provided: line-timed and holdover. Figure 2-18 displays OC-12 Ring Mixed Application with DDM-2000 FiberReach. DDM-2000 OC-12 and SLC -2000 ARM shelves are on the same ring. DS1 or HDSL Central Office EC-1...
  • Page 114 363-206-305 Applications DDM-2000 FiberReach Service Applications This section describes specific service applications. In addition to traditional telephony, DS1, and T1 extension services, the following are examples of specific service applications utilizing DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexers. LAN/WAN Data Networking: DS3 Data Services FiberReach Release 3.1 introduced a new DS3 Data Services Interface circuit pack (BBG19) for use with data edge devices.

  • Page 115: Lan/Wan Data Networking Using Locked Ds3 Cross-Connections

    363-206-305 Applications LAN/ATM DDM-2000 FiberReach DDM-2000 DDM-2000 Office LAN/ATM LAN/ATM OC-3 Shelf FiberReach Equipment DDM-2000 FiberReach Office LAN/ATM Equipment tpa 852435/01 Figure 2-19. LAN/WAN Data Networking Using Locked DS3 Cross-Connections Issue 3 June 2000 2-29...

  • Page 116: Unprotected Ds3 Data Services Using Bbg19

    363-206-305 Applications Figure 2-20 shows an application in which access for two unprotected DS3 data service channels is provided using BBG19 front access DS3 data services circuit packs. In the unprotected mode a single FiberReach shelf equipped with BBG19s provides drop capacity for two DS3s and up to 28 DS1s. BBG19 Central Office DDM-2000...

  • Page 117: Protected Ds3 Data Services Using Bbg4B Circuit Packs

    363-206-305 Applications Figure 2-21 shows an application which provides access for a single DS3 using BBG4B DS3 circuit packs. In the protected mode a single FiberReach shelf equipped with BBG4Bs provides drop capacity for a single DS3 and up to 28 DS1s.

  • Page 118: Lan/Wan Data Networking

    363-206-305 Applications Data Service Terminal DDM-2000 OC-3 BBG19 22F or G type OLIU OC-3 Path Switched Ring 28G type OLIU DDM-2000 FiberReach BBG19 DS1s Data Service tpa 852455/01 Figure 2-22. LAN/WAN Data Networking High Data-rate Subscriber Line (HDSL) Application The HDSL circuit pack (BBF8) provides HDSL interface capability on the DDM- 2000 OC-3 shelf to compatible PairGain equipment at the customer premises.
  • Page 119 363-206-305 Applications FiberReach shelves. Application for business customers, the private network, cell sites, PBXs, customer premises equipment (CPE), and other applications are supported. The BBF8 circuit pack fits into the low-speed slots and provides two, four-wire HDSL interfaces. Each interface provides a full DS1 rate payload capacity mapped to a SONET VT1.5 and then VT cross-connected into an STS-1.
  • Page 120 363-206-305 Applications DDM-2000 FiberReach Service Applications Using the 28G-Type OLIU (Release 2.2 — Non-TARP Release) The following figures show service applications of the DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer using the 28G-type OLIU. DS1 or HDSL Central Office EC-1 OC-3 DDM-2000 OC-3 R11.0 22F or G type OLIU DDM-2000 SLC-2000...
  • Page 121 363-206-305 Applications HDSL DDM-2000 OC-3 Central Office R5.0 EC-1 22 type OLIU OC-3 21 type OLIU DDM-2000 OC-12 R5.1 23G type OLIU DDM-2000 SLC-2000 OC-12 Path Switched Ring OC-3 OC-3 R11.0 R11.0 24G type OLIU 24G type OLIU OC-1 23G type OLIU DDM-2000 OC-12 R5.1...

  • Page 122: Fiberreach Extension (Dual-Homed)

    363-206-305 Applications DDM-2000 OC-3 Central Office R11.0 EC-1 22 type OLIU OC-3 21 type OLIU DDM-2000 OC-12 R5.1 23G type OLIU DDM-2000 SLC-2000 OC-3 OC-3 24G type OLIU 24G type OLIU R11.0 R11.0 OC-1 OC-12 Path Switched Ring 23G type OLIU 23G type OLIU DDM-2000 DDM-2000...
  • Page 123 363-206-305 Applications HDSL DDM-2000 OC-3 Central Office R11.0 EC-1 22 type OLIU OC-3 FT-2000 R7.2 FT-2000 FT-2000 R7.2 R7.2 OC-48 Line Switched Ring with OC-3 Path on Ring FT-2000 FT-2000 R7.2 R7.2 EC-1 OC-3 OC-3 Path Switched Ring 28G type OLIU 28G type OLIU DDM-2000 DDM-2000...
  • Page 124 363-206-305 Applications HDSL DDM-2000 OC-3 Central Office R11.0 EC-1 22 type OLIU OC-3 FT-2000 R7.2 FT-2000 FT-2000 R7.2 R7.2 OC-48 Line Switched Ring with OC-3 Path on Ring FT-2000 FT-2000 R7.2 R7.2 EC-1 OC-3 OC-3 Path Switched Ring 28G type OLIU 28G type OLIU DDM-2000 DDM-2000...
  • Page 125 363-206-305 Applications DDM-2000 FiberReach Service Applications Using the 28G-Type OLIU (Release 3.1, TARP) The following figures show service applications of the DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer using the 28G-type OLIU. In Figure 2-29, the FiberReach multiplexer is a network element on an OC-3 path switched ring with a DDM-2000 OC-3 host shelf in the Central Office.
  • Page 126 363-206-305 Applications Basic DS3 Cross-Connects Figure 2-30, Figure 2-31, and Figure 2-32 show the basic DS3 cross-connect used in several types of rings. The FiberReach cross-connections in all three of these figures are the same basic DS3. HDSL DDM-2000 OC-3 Central Office R13.0 EC-1...

  • Page 127: Fiberreach Extension (Dual-Homed) On Oc-12 Ring Application (Release 3.1 Or Later)

    363-206-305 Applications DDM-2000 OC-3 Central Office R13.0 EC-1 22 type OLIU OC-3 21 type OLIU DDM-2000 OC-12 R7.0 23G type OLIU SLC-2000 DDM-2000 OC-3 OC-3 24G type OLIU 24G type OLIU R13.0 R13.0 OC-1 OC-12 Path Switched Ring with OC-3 Path on Ring 23G type OLIU 23G type OLIU DDM-2000...
  • Page 128 363-206-305 Applications HDSL DDM-2000 OC-3 Central Office R13.0 EC-1 22 type OLIU OC-3 FT-2000 R9.0 FT-2000 FT-2000 R9.0 R9.0 OC-48 Line Switc hed Ring with OC-3 P ath on Ring FT-2000 FT-2000 R9.0 R9.0 EC-1 OC-3 OC-3 Path Switched Ring 28G type OLIU 28G type OLIU DDM-2000...
  • Page 129 363-206-305 Applications DDM-2000 FiberReach Service Applications Using the 29-Type OLIU (Release 4.0, TARP) The following figures show service applications of the DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer using the 29-type OLIU. In Figure 2-33, the FiberReach multiplexer is a network element on an OC-12 path switched ring with a DDM-2000 OC-3 host shelf in the Central Office.
  • Page 130 363-206-305 Applications HDSL DDM-2000 OC-3 Central Office R13.0 or later EC-1 24 or 29* type OLIU OC-3 FT-2000 R9.0 23G type OLIU FT-2000 FT-2000 R9.0 R9.0 OC-48 Line Switc hed Ring with OC-12 P ath on Ring FT-2000 FT-2000 R9.0 R9.0 EC-1 OC-3...
  • Page 131 363-206-305 Applications STS-3c 0X1 Optical Interface This new interface provides the ability of transporting STS-3c services on an OC-3c low-speed Function Unit optical interface that has been provisioned for 0X1 applications. Ring path switching is not done on the DDM-2000 FiberReach ring; rather STS-3c level path switching is done elsewhere in the network (for instance, when the FiberReach ring is used to transport ATM STS-3c traffic, path switching (rerouting) is normally executed through the external ATM switch/routers).

  • Page 132: Fiberreach Oc-3C Extension On Oc-12 Ring Application (Release 3.1 Or Later)

    363-206-305 Applications OC-12 Path Switched Ring DDM-2000 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-12 R7.0 R7.0 OC-3c OC-3c 28G-U OLIU 28G-U OLIU DDM-2000 DDM-2000 FiberReach FiberReach OC-3 OC-3 R3.1 R3.1 22 type OLIU 22 type OLIU OC-3c OC-3c Customer Customer Premise Premise Equipment Equipment tpa 852423/01 Figure 2-35.

  • Page 133: Sts-3C Dual 0X1 Application (Release 3.1 Or Later)

    363-206-305 Applications OC-3 Drop main-1 main-2 28-type OLIU 28-type OLIU FiberReach Shelf fn-1 fn-2 22-type OLIU 22-type OLIU ATM Broadband Connection cct = twoway (2waypr) tpa 852445/01 Figure 2-36. STS-3c Dual 0X1 Application (Release 3.1 or Later) Issue 3 June 2000 2-47...
  • Page 134 363-206-305 Applications Basic Narrowband Shelf Configurations The SLC -2000 system can host a DDM-2000 FiberReach Narrowband shelf (NBS) optical network unit (ONU) through an OC-1 ring using DDM-2000 FiberReach Wideband shelves (WBSs). Figure 2-37 and Figure 2-38 show the following typical applications: WBS Collocated with the SLC-2000 system (Figure 2-37): In this configuration, the collocated WBS is part of an OC-1 ring.
  • Page 135 363-206-305 Applications Remote Location (SONET or SLC ®-2000 system DSX-1 feeder) equipment 28 DS1 pipe for customers SLC ®-2000 (SONET ARM shelf feeders only) MDS assembly shelf DSX-1s DSX cross connect DSX-1s DDM-2000 FiberReach OC-1 OC-1 signal signal DDM-2000 DDM-2000 FiberReach OC-3 Shelf hosting WBSs in...
  • Page 136 363-206-305 Applications Remote Location SLC ®-2000 system equipment SLC ®-2000 ARM shelf* 26G2 OLIUs in Function group C DS1 low speed circuit packs OC-1 OC-1 signal signal MDS assemb ly shelf DSX cross connect DDM-2000 DDM-2000 FiberReach FiberReach WBS† WBS† OC-1 OC-1 signal...
  • Page 137 363-206-305 Applications Remote Location SLC ®-2000 system equipment SLC ®-2000 ARM shelf* 26G2 OLIUs in Function group C DS1 low speed circuit packs OC-1 OC-1 signal signal MDS assemb ly shelf DSX cross connect DDM-2000 DDM-2000 FiberReach FiberReach WBS† WBS† OC-1 OC-1 signal...
  • Page 138 363-206-305 Applications As stated earlier, the WBSs on the OC-1 ring must be hosted by either a DDM- 2000 OC-3 shelf or the ARM shelf of a SLC -2000 system. Figure 2-40 shows the configuration of a collocated WBS hosted by a SLC -2000 ARM shelf. This configuration eliminates the need for a separate DDM-2000 OC-3 shelf.
  • Page 139 363-206-305 Applications SLC ®-2000 system equipment SLC ®-2000 27G2-U OLIUs ARM shelf function group C MDS assemb ly shelf OC-1 DSX cross connect signal DDM-2000 FiberReach Remote Location OC-1 signal OC-1 signal DDM-2000 DDM-2000 FiberReach FiberReach OC-1 OC-1 signal signal DDM-2000 FiberReach DSXBIU...
  • Page 140 363-206-305 Applications Integrated DS1, T1, and DS0 Services Integrated Narrowband Business Carrier Access Figure 2-41 shows a business narrowband application using the DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer on an OC-1 path-switched ring. This application provides protected POTS, ISDN, and special services, as well as DS1 services on a protected OC-1 fiber.
  • Page 141 363-206-305 Applications WIRE CENTER DACS II TR-08/ DDM-2000 5ESS SLC -2000 OC-3 RT Access Switch System OC-3/OC-12 DS1/ DDM-2000 DACS IV- OC-1 OC-3/OC-12 2000 DDM-2000 DDM-2000 OC-3/OC-12 FiberReach Wideband DDM-2000 FiberReach Narrowband . . . Wideband DS0, DS1, Narrowband . . . DS0, DS1, tpa 843647/01 Figure 2-41.
  • Page 142 363-206-305 Applications Figure 2-42 shows a configuration similar to Figure 2-41; however the SLC -2000 RT host is at a remote site, not in the wire center. TR08/TR303 grooming is done by the SLC -2000 at the remote location. WIRE CENTER DS1s DACS II SLC -2000...
  • Page 143 363-206-305 Applications Figure 2-43 shows a dual-homed integrated application. Figure 2-44 shows three types of stand-alone applications. WIRE CENTER DACS IV- 2000 EC-1 TR-08/ DDM-2000 OC-3/OC-12 5ESS SLC -2000 OC-3 RT Access Switch System DDM-2000 DDM-2000 OC-3/OC-12 OC-3 DDM-2000 OC-1 FiberReach Wideband Shelf...
  • Page 144 363-206-305 Applications WIRE CENTER DACS II TR-08/ 5ESS -2000 Switch RT Access System DS1/ DDM-2000 DACS IV- OC-3 2000 DDM-2000 DDM-2000 FiberReach FiberReach OC-1 Wideband Wideband Narrowband Narrowband ..DS0, DS1, DS0, DS1, DDM-2000 FiberReach Wideband Narrowband .
  • Page 145 363-206-305 Applications Another integrated narrowband business carrier access application option for the DDM-2000 FiberReach narrowband shelf is to collocate it with the DDM-2000 OC-3/OC-12 shelf. Since the narrowband shelf's high-speed interface is a DS1, a DDM-2000 OC-3/OC-12 multiplexer can serve as the ring vehicle for carrying the DS0 traffic.
  • Page 146 363-206-305 Applications Integrated DS1 Transport Configuration with SLC LineReach Access System The SLC LineReach Access System supports DSX-1 electrical interface options by using the AUA61E LIU. The DSX-1 LIU meets all requirements in the digital cross-connect specification. The LIU has equalizer switches that provide equalization to the DSX cross-connect.
  • Page 147 363-206-305 Applications Digital cross connect or D4 channel bank Non-switched and non-locally switched special services OC-1 OC-1 DDM-2000 OC-3 DS1s customer shelf lines SLC LineReach OC-1 OC-1 Access System remote terminal (RT) slrintwbs Figure 2-46. DSX-1 Electrical Interface — SONET Transport (Integrated Configuration) Issue 3 June 2000 2-61...
  • Page 148 363-206-305 Applications Intelligent Vehicle Highway System (IVHS) The IVHS is beginning and will grow to play a major role in the roadway systems of the future. The primary use in the near-term is to reduce congestion. This is done in several ways: The IVHS provides more efficient and optimal traffic management, which attempts to avoid congestion in the first place.

  • Page 149: Intelligent Vehicle Highway System (Ivhs) Application

    363-206-305 Applications Video 2000 CODEC DDM-2000 OC-3 Traffic Operations Center DDM-2000 OC-3 OC-3 Ring DDM-2000 OC-3 Roadside Hub Roadside Hub Roadside Hub DDM-2000 OC-3 DDM-2000 OC-1 Ring FiberReach DDM2000 FiberReach Access Access Cabinet Cabinet DDM-2000 Video FiberReach Access Cabinet Local Controller Sensors Highway tpa 843632/01...
  • Page 150 363-206-305 Applications Teleprotection and Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) Communications for Electric Utilities Electric utilities are facing an unprecedented demand for increased communications bandwidth to support modern operations and business applications such as substation automation, computer networking, and video teleconferencing.

  • Page 151: Fiberreach Teleprotection And Scada Communications

    363-206-305 Applications Figure 2-48 also shows an optical drop/insert DS1 extension from the SONET rings implemented with RFL 9001 Intelligent Multiplexers. This extension is useful for serving low bandwidth sites remote from the SONET backbone. The figure shows a single host DDM-2000 interconnecting the rings, but a dual ring interworking (DRI) could be used to provide node survivability.
  • Page 152 363-206-305 Applications 2-66 Issue 3 June 2000...

  • Page 153: Shelf Descriptions And Configurations

    Shelf Descriptions and Configurations Contents Overview DDM-2000 FiberReach Wideband Shelf DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer Carrier Assembly DDM-2000 FiberReach Wall-Mount Distant Terminal 3-10 3-10 Wideband Shelf Plug-Ins 3-14 3-14 Lightning and Surge Secondary Protection Assembly for T1 Extensions and HDSL 3-15 3-15 Shelf Configuration 3-16 3-16...
  • Page 154 Contents 3-ii Issue 3 June 2000...
  • Page 155 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations Overview This chapter provides the physical description of the DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer shelf and equipage for the Wideband and Narrowband shelves. DDM-2000 FiberReach Wideband Shelf The DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer wideband shelf is shown in Figure 3-1 through Figure 3-9.

  • Page 156: Ddm-2000 Fiberreach Multiplexer Wideband Shelf - Front View

    363-206-305 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations DDM-2000 FiberReachWideband Shelf BBF3 BBF3 BBF3 BBF3 26 G2-U 26 G2-U BBG8B SYSCTL DS1PM DS1PM OLIU OLIU FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT ACTIVE ACTIVE LS-A-2 LS-B-2 LS-C-2 LS-D-2 FE ID BBF3 BBF3 BBF3 BBF3 TEST DS1PM...

  • Page 157: Oc-1 Optics With Bbg19

    363-206-305 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations DDM-2000 FiberReachWideband Shelf 26 G2-U 26 G2-U BBG8B BBG19 BBG19 SYSCTL DS1PM DS1PM OLIU OLIU Lucent Lucent FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE LS-A-2 LS-B-2 LS-C-2 LS-D-2 FE ID TEST DS1PM DS1PM...

  • Page 158: Ddm-2000 Fiberreach Multiplexer Wideband Shelf - With Bbg19

    363-206-305 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations DDM-2000 FiberReachWideband Shelf BBF3 BBF3 BBF3 BBF3 28 G-U 28 G-U BBG8B BBG19 BBG19 SYSCTL DS1PM DS1PM OLIU OLIU Lucent Lucent FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE LS-A-2 LS-B-2 LS-C-2 LS-D-2...

  • Page 159: Ddm-2000 Fiberreach Multiplexer Wideband Shelf - With Oc-12 Optics

    363-206-305 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations DDM-2000 FiberReachWideband Shelf 29 G-U 29 G-U 22-T ype 22-T ype BBG8 BBF3 BBF3 BBF3 BBF3 S1:1 S1:1 SYSCTL DS1PM DS1PM OLIU OLIU OLIU OLIU FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE...

  • Page 160: Ddm-2000 Fiberreach Multiplexer Wideband Shelf - Rear View

    363-206-305 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations OFFICE ALARMS FOR FUTURE USE LS (A,B,C) LS (A,B,C) INPUT * OUTPUT * DS3 OUT (37 PIN) (37 PIN) CONNECTORS DS3 IN PROTECTION TERMINAL BLOCK FUTURE POWER -48V A LS (A,B,C,D) INPUT * -RTN A TBOS (37 PIN) -48V B...
  • Page 161 363-206-305 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations pack. The auxiliary controller (AUXCTL) slot is reserved for the user panel (USPNL) circuit packs. The user panel (USPNL) is located at the far right side of the wideband shelf and is equipped with the following: Two −48 volt fuses (labeled FA and FB) Four alarm LEDs ACO/TEST pushbutton control...

  • Page 162: Ddm-2000 Fiberreach Multiplexer Wideband Shelf Front Panel

    363-206-305 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations DDM-2000 FiberReach Wideband Shelf TEST ACTY ACTY ECC2 Figure 3-9. DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer Wideband Shelf Front Panel Issue 3 June 2000...

  • Page 163: Fiberreach Multiplexer Carrier Assembly

    363-206-305 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer Carrier Assembly For rack-mounted applications, the DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer is available in a carrier assembly, as shown in Figure 3-10. This carrier assembly provides space for up to two wideband shelves, or one wideband and one narrowband shelf, or two narrowband shelves.

  • Page 164: Fiberreach Wall Mount Distant Terminal

    363-206-305 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations FiberReach Carr ier Assemb ly Group Configur ations ED8C843-30 G1 ED8C843-30 G4 ED8C843-30 G2 ED8C843-30 G5 ED8C843-30 G3 ED8C843-30 G50 tpa853787-0 Figure 3-11. DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer Carrier Assembly Group Configurations DDM-2000 FiberReach Wall-Mount Distant Terminal The DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer is available in a wall-mount enclosure.
  • Page 165 363-206-305 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations Figure 3-12 shows some of the different configurations available for this enclosure. Each DSX panel supports up to 16 DS1 circuit packs, so two DSX ® panels are needed for 1x7 protection. The LGX panel is for lightguide cross- connections.
  • Page 166 DSX panels, and an LGX panel. The enclosure is approximately 23 inches wide by 11 inches high by 13.4 inches deep. DSX Interconnect Assembly DS1-2 DS1-1 DDM-2000 FiberReach DDM-2000 FiberReach Lucent Technologies Lucent Technologies Wall Distant Terminal Bell Labs Innovations Bell Labs Innovations Wall Distant Terminal ASTY...

  • Page 167: Wall Mount Distant Terminal With Slc

    363-206-305 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations WBS and SLC LineReach Access System in Wall DT (with dual DSX cross-connect) (ED8C843-31, G53, Comcode 601925969) WBS and SLC LineReach Access System in Wall DT (no DSX cross- connect) (ED8C843-31, G53, Comcode 601925969) Figure 3-14 shows the configuration for a Wall Mount DT containing a SLC LineReach Access System and DDM-2000 FiberReach wideband shelf.

  • Page 168: Ddm-2000 Fiberreach Wideband Shelf Plug-Ins

    363-206-305 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations Wideband Shelf Plug-Ins Table 3-1 lists the DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer wideband shelf plug-ins. Table 3-1. DDM-2000 FiberReach Wideband Shelf Plug-Ins Product Code Functional Name Functional Designation BBF1B DS1 Low-Speed Interface BBF3/BBF3B DS1 Performance Monitoring DS1PM BBF6 T1 Extensions T1EXT...
  • Page 169 363-206-305 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations Lightning and Surge Secondary Protection Assembly for T1 Extensions and HDSL T1EXT/HDSL Digital lines in the outside plant environments may be exposed to high voltages due to lightning surges and power crosses due to fallen power lines. In order to protect a DDM-2000 shelf with T1EXT/HDSL circuit packs from such occurrences, an external assembly that houses a secondary surge protection is required.
  • Page 170 363-206-305 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations Shelf Configuration This section summarizes descriptive information used with applications information to plan procurement and deployment of the DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexers. There are several considerations that should be remembered when planning the DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexers' role in the network. Projected customer requirements will determine the initial capacity needed, as well as evolution to higher capacities.
  • Page 171 363-206-305 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations DS1 Services Only Figure 3-16, Figure 3-17, and Figure 3-18 show examples of the DDM-2000 FiberReach in a wideband application providing DS1 services only. The wideband shelf is a complete DS1 to OC-1 or OC-3 or OC-12 solution. The wideband shelf uses the two main optical line interface unit (OLIU) slots to interface an OC-1 or OC-3 or OC-12 line to the low-speed group(s).
  • Page 172 363-206-305 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations Main* Function Low Speed Units Groups * 28G-U for OC-3 29G-U for OC-12 tpa 843668/01 Figure 3-17. DDM-2000 FiberReach 1X7 Protected DS1 Services Only This same configuration would also be used for unprotected DS1s, as shown in Figure 3-18.
  • Page 173 DS1 increments by equipping the low-speed slots with dual T1 extension circuit packs. The SYSCTL is always required for these applications. Primary lightning protection (Lucent Technologies' protector unit 4B3EW or equivalent) and the secondary lightning and surge protection assembly (mounted externally to the DDM-2000 FiberReach shelf) are required for outside plant applications.
  • Page 174 363-206-305 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations Main* Function Low Speed Units Groups * 28G-U in Main slots for OC-3 * 29G-U in Main slots for OC-12 tpa 843637/01 Figure 3-19. DDM-2000 FiberReach with 1x1 Protected T1 Extension Services A 1x7 protection architecture, shown in Figure 3-20, allows up to seven service and one protection unit per multiplexer.
  • Page 175 363-206-305 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations Main* Function Low Speed Units Groups * 28G-U in Main slots for OC-3 29G-U in Main slots for OC-12 tpa 843670/01 Figure 3-20. DDM-2000 FiberReach with 1x7 Protected T1 Extension Services This same configuration would also be used for unprotected T1 service, as shown in Figure 3-21, for a maximum of seven service units per multiplexer.

  • Page 176: Configuration

    363-206-305 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations Main* Function Low Speed Units Groups * 28G-U in Main slots for OC-3 29G-U in Main slots for OC-12 tpa 843669/01 Figure 3-21. DDM-2000 FiberReach with Unprotected T1 Extension Services T1 Extensions and DS1 Service Figure 3-22 shows an example of the DDM-2000 FiberReach in a combination configuration of T1 extensions and DS1 service.
  • Page 177 363-206-305 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations Function Main* Low Speed Units Groups * 28G-U in Main slots for OC-3 29G-U in Main slots for OC-12 tpa 843640/01 Figure 3-22. DDM-2000 FiberReach with Four 1x1 Protected T1 Extensions and Eight 1x1 Protected DS1 Services Issue 3 June 2000 3-23...

  • Page 178: Ds1 Services

    363-206-305 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations A configuration with unprotected T1 extension service and protected DS1 services is shown in Figure 3-23. Main* Function Low-Speed Units Slots * 28G-U in Main slots for OC-3 tpa 850283/01 Figure 3-23. DDM-2000 FiberReach with Unprotected T1 Extensions and 1x7 Protected DS1 Services 3-24 Issue 3...
  • Page 179 363-206-305 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations HDSL Services Figure 3-24 and Figure 3-25 show examples of the DDM-2000 FiberReach in a wideband application providing HDSL interface capability. The wideband shelf uses the two main optical line interface unit (OLIU) slots to interface an OC-3 or OC-12 line to the low-speed group(s).
  • Page 180 363-206-305 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations Main* Function Low Speed Units Groups * 29-T ype in Main slots f o r OC-12 tpa 852386/01 Figure 3-25. DDM-2000 FiberReach — 1x2 Protected HDSL Services (1X2 Protection Mode) DS3 and DS1 Services When equipped with OC-1 OLIUs, the DS3 uses all of the capacity of the line. Hence, there is no capacity for DS1 service.
  • Page 181 363-206-305 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations Main* Function Low Speed Units Groups * 26 G-type f o r OC-1 28 G-type f o r OC-3 tpa 853762/02 Figure 3-26. DDM-2000 FiberReach with OC-12 Optics in Main Slot Providing DS1 and DS3 Services Main Function Low Speed Units...
  • Page 182 363-206-305 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations Data Services Interface Figure 3-28 shows an example of BBG19 (DS3) Data Services Interface application. Figure 3-29 shows an example with OC-1 optics in the Main providing Data Services. A BBG19 is installed in each Function Unit slot. These circuit packs provide a clear channel DS3 interface to external data communications equipment like LAN routers/ATM switches.
  • Page 183 363-206-305 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations Main Function Low Speed Units Groups tpa 853762/04 Figure 3-29. DDM-2000 FiberReach with OC-1 Optics in Main Slot Providing Data Services Issue 3 June 2000 3-29...

  • Page 184: Sts-3C 0 X 1 Application

    363-206-305 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations STS-3c 0 X1 Application Figure 3-30 shows a FiberReach shelf configured to provide an OC-3c customer interface. Both Main slots must be equipped with 28-type OC-3 OLIUs or 29-type OC-12 OLIUs and Function Unit slots with one or two 22-type OLIUs. NOTE: The features described above also apply to 28-type and 29-type OLIU circuit packs.
  • Page 185 363-206-305 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations DDM-2000 FiberReach Narrowband Shelf The DDM-2000 FiberReach Narrowband Shelf (NBS) is similar to the DDM-2000 FiberReach Wideband Shelf (WBS). Both are approximately 9.5 inches high by 8 inches wide. Either shelf may be mounted in the DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplex Carrier Assembly, the Wall DT Assembly, and the 61B cabinet.
  • Page 186 363-206-305 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations lines for a total capacity of 48 VF circuits or 40 ISDN lines. Four servers are required in the HDT to provide the four DSX-1 signals for VF circuits 1 through 48. A T1 metallic facility can also be used to connect the HDT server to the DSXBIU. The number of T1 lines and the release of the HDT DLC software will determine the capacity of the NBS.
  • Page 187 363-206-305 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations J200 J200 900064791 900064791 SCREW SCREW TRANSMISSION TRANSMISSION TIP/RING TIP/RING J303 J303 J302 J302 J301 J301 J300 J300 J206 J202 (1-12) (1-12) (25-30) (25-30) (13-24) (13-24) (37-48) (37-48) -48V ISCI RNG RTN -48V -48V -48V J205 -48V -48V...

  • Page 188: Ddm-2000 Fiberreach Narrowband Shelf Channel Unit

    363-206-305 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations DDM-2000 FiberReach Narrowband Shelf Channel Unit Table 3-2. Product Functional Name Available With Code SLC -2000 Release AUA25B POTS/M SPOTS CU CF (Discontinued Availability) AUA27* POTS CF + OHT (Versus feature not available) AUA39 POTS/SPOTS CU CS + OHT/CLASS (Discontinued Availability) AUA41 4W VF CF (Discontinued Availability) AUA41B...

  • Page 189: Spq

    363-206-305 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations Product Functional Name Available With Code SLC -2000 Release AUA159C ALC POTS/SPOTS CU + OHT/CLASS AUA178 ALC C-POTS CF OHT/CLASS (Discontinued Availability) AUA178B C-POTS (ALC + Adaptive Balance + Extended Range to 1400 OHMS + OHT + CLASS) AUA179 ALC POTS/SPOTS CU + ALIC5 + OHT/CLASS AUA200...
  • Page 190 363-206-305 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations Product Functional Name Available With Code SLC -2000 Release SPQ453 Dual Coin CF SPQ456 Quad DID SPQ460 Quad POTS/SPOTS (ALC, CF + Extended Range + VFDE) SPQ478 SLC -2000 ALC C- POTS CF OHT/CLASS SPQ494 Quad ISDN ANSI-U SPQ909 Lower-power POTS CF + OHT/CLASS...
  • Page 191 Holds a combination of two FiberReach shelves — 1 wideband shelf and 1 narrowband shelf — 2 narrowband shelves Holds up to two rectifiers — Lucent Technologies RSO 400 Series — 400 watts each Fiber administration shelf Tilts down for easy access to back of equipment Allows access to rear of module to facilitate cable administration.
  • Page 192 Laboratories based on expected worst case conditions to ensure high reliability and trouble free field performance. These test results are correlated with actual field data to validate cabinet performance. This extensive testing provides assurance that Lucent Technologies cabinet solutions meet specific application and performance needs of the customer. 3-38...

  • Page 193: Stac System, Frc-2000 Module With Pedestal Battery Base

    363-206-305 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations ELECTRONICS MODULE SPACER PEDESTAL BATTERY MODULE FLOOR MOUNT OPTION Figure 3-33. STAC System, FRC-2000 Module with Pedestal Battery Base Issue 3 June 2000 3-39...

  • Page 194: Stac System, Frc 2000 Module Wall Mount Option With Separate Pedestal Battery Module

    363-206-305 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations ELECTRONICS MODULE (WALL MOUNTED) PEDESTAL BATTERY MODULE (FLOOR MOUNTED) WALL/FLOOR MOUNT OPTION Figure 3-34. STAC System, FRC 2000 Module Wall Mount Option with Separate Pedestal Battery Module 3-40 Issue 3 June 2000...
  • Page 195 Power Contents Overview Introduction Wideband Shelf -48 V Battery Powering Power Distribution Wall Distant Terminal Powering for WBS and NBS Wideband Shelf Transmission Circuit Packs OLIU Circuit Packs DS1/DS1PM Circuit Packs Control Circuit Packs Narrowband Shelf –48 V Battery Powering Other Power Options Wall Distant Terminal Powering Narrowband Shelf Transmission Circuit Packs...
  • Page 196 Contents 4-ii Issue 3 June 2000...
  • Page 197 Power Overview This chapter describes the powering options for the DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer. power options information is provided first for the wideband shelf and then the narrowband shelf. Introduction The DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer can be powered from a variety of power sources.

  • Page 198: Ddm-2000 Fiberreach Multiplexer Wideband Shelf Power Architecture

    363-206-305 Power converters located on the circuit packs. In each circuit pack, the two feeders are diode ORed, fused, filtered, and regulated by the board-mounted power modules. This provides the required redundancy in case of the loss of one feeder or one fuse.
  • Page 199 363-206-305 Power Power Distribution See "Power Requirements" in Chapter 10, "Technical Specifications", for power dissipation values. Figure 4-2 shows a typical battery feeder interface for a single shelf. CAUTION: This information is for a typical application only. Consult 801-525-168, DDM- 2000 Floor Plan Data Sheets, and T-82046-30, Power Systems DC Distribution Circuit for Digital Transmission System, for proper engineering of battery plant and feeders.

  • Page 200: Wall Dt Powering (Power Supply For Wbs/Nbs)

    363-206-305 Power Wall Distant Terminal Powering for WBS and The DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer Wall Distant Terminal (Wall DT) uses bulk power converters to support powering from 120 V AC. This converter supplies –48 V to the FiberReach shelf. Customer premise locations usually have 60 V AC or 120 V AC commercial power from utilities.

  • Page 201: Wall Dt Powering (Single Power Supply For Wbs/Nbs)

    363-206-305 Power NARROWBAND SHELF FRAME GROUND 120V AC BATTERY POWER CORD CHARGING/ ALARM ALARM CABLE MISC WIDEBAND DISCR 120V AC SHELF FRAME GROUND FRAME GROUND -48V NOTE: Alarming for this arrangement can be from the wideband shelf (cable ED8C852-20 G7) or from the narrowband shelf (cable ED8C785-20 G9).

  • Page 202: Circuit Packs

    363-206-305 Power Wideband Shelf Transmission Circuit Packs OLIU Circuit Packs The OLIU circuit packs are powered by two DC-to-DC converters located on the circuit packs. The backplane power feeders supply A and B −48 volts to these converters via diode ORed circuits and are fuse-mounted on each of the circuit packs.

  • Page 203: Ddm-2000 Fiberreach Multiplexer Narrowband Shelf Power Architecture

    363-206-305 Power CDTU CU#N CU#2 CU#1 DSXBIU 48V (R) -48V(S) FILTER -25.5V +5V(S) -48V OPTIONAL 60 VAC INPUT Figure 4-5. DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer Narrowband Shelf Power Architecture Issue 3 June 2000...

  • Page 204: Ddm-2000 Fiberreach Multiplexer - Other Power Options

    363-206-305 Power Other Power Options The DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer uses miscellaneously mounted power converters to support powering from 60 V AC or 120 V AC sources. These converters supply −48 V to the FiberReach shelf. Customer premise locations usually have 120 V AC commercial power from utilities. The 60 V AC is widely used in Cable TV applications.

  • Page 205: Wall Dt Powering (Power Supply For Wb And Power Supply For Nb)

    363-206-305 Power Wall Distant Terminal Powering The DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer Wall Distant Terminal (Wall DT) uses bulk power converters to support powering from 120 V AC. This converter supplies –48 V to the FiberReach shelf. Customer premise locations usually have 60 V AC or 120 V AC commercial power from utilities.
  • Page 206 363-206-305 Power Narrowband Shelf Transmission Circuit Packs FHB2 Digital Signal Cross-Connect Backplane Interface Unit (DSXBIU) The DSXBIU is a narrowband shelf circuit pack that operates as the local controller for the narrowband shelf and multiplexes the DS0 signals from the channel units to DS1 interfaces.
  • Page 207 363-206-305 Power Ringing Generator Units (RGU) The AUA413 and AUA423 RGUs are used in the SLC -2000 MSDT as well as the DDM-2000 FiberReach narrowband shelf. The AUA413 provides 20-Hz negative- superimposed ringing current to satisfy loop applications for 0 to 132 ohms and AUA423 should be placed in an NBS where any channel units are used whose range exceeds 132 ohms.
  • Page 208 363-206-305 Power AUA421 Channel and Drop Test Unit (CDTU) The CDTU circuit pack is used in the SLC 2000 MSDT as well as the DDM-2000 FiberReach narrowband shelf. This circuit pack provides the remote end terminations and detectors required to support end-to-end channel testing of two- wire locally-switched services, such as POTS, coin, and multiparty services.

  • Page 209: Circuit Pack Power And Led Control

    363-206-305 Power Relay -48 V (A) Diode -48 V -48 V +5 V Fuse ORing DC/DC -48 V (B) & & Converter Filtering Current Limiter LED Control Fault LED (Red) Figure 4-9. Circuit Pack Power and LED Control Power Minor Alarm A yellow power minor (PMN) alarm LED is provided on the user panel to indicate an AC power failure at the remote terminal.
  • Page 210 363-206-305 Power Power Distribution See "Power Requirements" in Chapter 10, "Technical Specifications," for power dissipation values. Figure 4-10 shows a typical battery feeder interface for a single shelf. CAUTION: This information is for a typical application only. Consult 801-525-168, DDM- 2000 Floor Plan Data Sheets, and T-82046-30, Power Systems DC Distribution Circuit for Digital Transmission System, for proper engineering of battery plant and feeders.

  • Page 211: Transmission And Synchronization

    Transmission and Synchronization Contents Overview Transmission Interfaces DS1 Transmission Interface OC-1/OC-3/OC-12 Transmission Interface T1 Transmission Interface Transmission and Architecture Wideband Shelf Interfaces and Multiplexing Wideband Shelf Protection Architectures Narrowband Shelf Interfaces and Multiplexing Wideband and Narrowband Shelf Integration Synchronization Manual Timing Pack Switch Subnetwork Configurations Free Running/Line Timing External Timing/Line Timing Configuration...
  • Page 212 Contents Synchronization Reconfiguration in an Access Ring 5-17 5-17 5-ii Issue 3 June 2000...
  • Page 213 Transmission and Synchronization Overview This chapter describes the transmission and synchronization interfaces for the DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer. Transmission Interfaces DS1 Transmission Interface The DDM-2000 FiberReach wideband shelf supports DS1 interfaces. The DS1 interface accepts any DSX-1 compatible signal (clear channel interfaces). OC-1/OC-3/OC-12 Transmission Interface The DDM-2000 FiberReach wideband shelf supports an OC-1/OC-3/OC-12 interface.
  • Page 214 363-206-305 Transmission and Synchronization T1 Transmission Interface The DDM-2000 FiberReach wideband shelf supports a T1 interface. The interface accepts two T1 signals. The two signals are mapped into a standard VT1.5 signal, and then multiplexed into one VT-G signal. Transmission and Architecture Wideband Shelf Interfaces and Multiplexing The DDM-2000 FiberReach wideband shelf supports DS1, HDSL (with 28G-U/ 28G2-U [Release 3.1] and 29-type [Release 4.0] OLIUs) and T1 carrier extension...

  • Page 215: Ddm-2000 Fiberreach Wideband Shelf Block Diagram

    363-206-305 Transmission and Synchronization STS-1 Function Unit MAIN Low Speed STS-3c VT-G STS-1* STS-1 STS-1 STS-3c Low Speed HDSL STS-3c STS-3c OLIU OLIU Low Speed PROTECTION BUS OC3c DS-3, OC3c Protection on OC-1/OC-3/OC-12 22G Type (BBG4(B)) 22G Type LS interfaces OC-1 or OC-3/OC-12 OLIUs (3.1 TARP)
  • Page 216 363-206-305 Transmission and Synchronization Wideband Shelf Protection Architectures The eight low-speed interface slots of the DDM-2000 FiberReach wideband shelf can be configured in two protection architectures: 1x1 protected or 1x7 protected. (See Note.) In a 1x1 protection configuration, the eight slots are divided into four low-speed groups —...

  • Page 217: Fiberreach Multiplexer Narrowband Architecture (Octet Mode Shown)

    363-206-305 Transmission and Synchronization For the PSU, the DSXBIU has an additional microwire interface operating at RS- 422 levels. The backplane for the narrowband shelf can be configured in either quad or octet modes. In the quad mode, the 6 channel units in the upper subshelf and the 6 channel units in the lower subshelf provide up to 24 DS0s of service each on a 1- DS1 capacity per subshelf (2 DS1s total).
  • Page 218 363-206-305 Transmission and Synchronization Wideband and Narrowband Shelf Integration The wideband and narrowband shelves communicate with each other via a standard DS1 transmission interface. The electrical interface is compatible with DSX-1 requirements. No control communication exists between the wideband and narrowband shelves.
  • Page 219 363-206-305 Transmission and Synchronization Synchronization Each DDM-2000 FiberReach wideband shelf is provisioned to be line-timed from an incoming high-speed interface. In line timing mode, the OLIU circuit pack derives local shelf timing from the incoming OC-1/OC-3/OC-12 high-speed signal in the Main slot. The OLIU digital phase-locked loop (DPLL) also serves to remove any timing transients for improved network jitter performance.

  • Page 220: Free Running/Line Timing Synchronization In A

    363-206-305 Transmission and Synchronization Figure 5-3 shows a DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer ring application. The intermediate nodes in this subnetwork perform line timing, whereby both transmitted OC-N lines are timed from an incoming OC-N. In the ring topology, synchronization messaging allows automatic synchronization reconfiguration in the event of a fiber or equipment failure.
  • Page 221 363-206-305 Transmission and Synchronization External Timing/Line Timing Configuration The external timing/line timing configuration (shown in Figure 5-4) integrates loop feeder and customer location networks into the digital synchronization network as required by the SONET standard. This application is ideal for networks where only one location has a building integrated timing supply (BITS);...

  • Page 222: External Timing In A Ring Configuration

    363-206-305 Transmission and Synchronization External Clock DDM-2000 OC-3 SLC®-2000 ARM Shelf Line Timed Line Timed OLIU OLIU DDM-2000 DDM-2000 FiberReach FiberReach Line Timed OLIU DDM-2000 FiberReach tpa 843625/01 Figure 5-4. External Timing in a Ring Configuration 5-10 Issue 3 June 2000...

  • Page 223: Line Timing In A Ring Configuration

    363-206-305 Transmission and Synchronization Line Timing/Line Timing Configuration The line timing/line timing configuration (shown in Figure 5-5) provides an alternate timing arrangement that integrates loop feeder and customer location networks into the digital synchronization network as required by the SONET standard.
  • Page 224 363-206-305 Transmission and Synchronization Timing Distribution In many applications, all elements in a SONET network are directly traceable to a single master clock via line-timing (for example, loop access networks, outside trunks, private networks). In this environment, the high-performance desynchronizer design of the DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer allows a DS1 timing reference to be carried as a multiplexed DS1 payload to a customer premises.

  • Page 225: Timing From A Multiplexed Ds1

    363-206-305 Transmission and Synchronization BITS Clock Stratum 3 or Better OLIU Timing OC-1 Derived from DDM-2000 OC-3 OC-1 SLC®-2000 ARM Shelf DDM-2000 FiberReach Customer Network DS1 Carrying Data and Used as a Timing Reference tpa 843627/01 Figure 5-6. Timing from a Multiplexed DS1 Issue 3 June 2000 5-13...
  • Page 226 363-206-305 Transmission and Synchronization Synchronization Messaging The DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexers provide a synchronization messaging feature to ensure the integrity of network synchronization during both normal and abnormal conditions. With synchronization messaging, the current quality of the timing source can be conveyed from one DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer to the next.

  • Page 227: Synchronization Failure And Reconfiguration

    363-206-305 Transmission and Synchronization Normal Failure/Reconfiguration BITS BITS Traceable Traceable DDM-2000 DDM-2000 OC-3 or OC-3 or SLC®-2000 SLC-2000 ARM Shelf ARM Shelf DDM-2000 DDM-2000 DDM-2000 DDM-2000 FiberReach FiberReach FiberReach FiberReach DDM-2000 DDM-2000 FiberReach FiberReach Sync Flow tpa 843628/01 Figure 5-7. Synchronization Failure and Reconfiguration Synchronization Provisioning Integrity A welcome byproduct of synchronization messaging is the prevention of...

  • Page 228: Synchronization Messages Using K2 Byte

    363-206-305 Transmission and Synchronization interface, and all other OC-N interfaces that are enabled for synchronization messaging, the appropriate message indicating the quality of its timing and its active timing mode. Table 5-1 lists the associated internal timing status that is associated with synchronization messages received from the OC-N interface when synchronization messaging is enabled.

  • Page 229: Synchronization Messages Using S1 Byte

    363-206-305 Transmission and Synchronization The existence of automatic synchronization reconfiguration does not change the system's behavior on traditional line failures; for example, loss of frame (LOF), loss of pointer (LOP), loss of signal (LOS), and others. Examples In this section, some detailed examples are given to show specifically how the synchronization messages propagate through the DDM-2000 FiberReach network and assist in the recovery from a fiber failure.

  • Page 230: Synchronization Reconfiguration - Access Ring (Sheet 1 Of 3)

    363-206-305 Transmission and Synchronization the other DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexers are line-timed in a counterclockwise direction. The sync quality unknown (SQU) message is sent to indicate where timing is traceable to an external BITS and where it is valid to be used. The timing looped back (TLB) message is sent on the interface that is being used as the line timing reference and, thus, where using that timing would create a timing loop.
  • Page 231 363-206-305 Transmission and Synchronization In Figure 5-8c, the DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer at site C detects the incoming IC message and sends out the IC message to site D. The DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer at site C cannot switch to line time from the other rotation because it is receiving the TLB message on that interface.
  • Page 232 363-206-305 Transmission and Synchronization In Figure 5-8e, the DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer at site C detects the incoming SQU message from site D. The SQU message is a better quality message than the IC message being received from site B, so the DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer at site C switches to line time from site D.

  • Page 233: Operations Interfaces

    Operations Interfaces Contents Overview Craft Interface Terminals (CIT) CIT Access Using a PC as a CIT Remote Access Using the DCC CPro Graphical User Interface and Provisioning Tool User Panel User Panel LEDs 6-10 6-10 FE SEL Pushbutton 6-10 6-10 ACO/TST Pushbutton 6-11 6-11...
  • Page 234 Contents 6-ii Issue 3 June 2000...
  • Page 235 Operations Interfaces Overview This chapter presents the operations interfaces that enable local and remote access to the DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer Wideband shelf for its management. NOTE: For the DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer Narrowband shelf, all operations are through the SLC -2000. Operations interfaces include: EIA-232-D craft interface terminal (CIT) interface User panel controls and indicators...
  • Page 236 Lucent Technologies DDM-2000 Multiplexers Operations Systems Engineering Guide . Additional information about the OI features in multi-vendor subnetworks is provided in 824-102-144, Lucent Technologies 2000 Product Family Multi-Vendor Operations Interworking Guide . Craft Interface Terminals (CIT) The DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer supports a user friendly text-based interface called the craft interface.
  • Page 237 363-206-305 Operations Interfaces Figure 6-1. CIT Connectors (Direct Interface to CIT) Issue 3 June 2000...
  • Page 238 363-206-305 Operations Interfaces Null Modem Modem Modem Remote Location Figure 6-2. CIT Connectors (Modem Interface to CIT) Issue 3 June 2000...
  • Page 239 363-206-305 Operations Interfaces The terminal sessions over the CIT port and over the DCC are independent of one another. Two simultaneous login sessions (one CIT and one DCC) can be supported at any given time. See Figure 6-3. DDM-2000 DDM-2000 Login Session 2 CIT 1 Login Session 1...
  • Page 240 363-206-305 Operations Interfaces Using a PC as a CIT In addition to CIT functions, a PC is required for software downloads and facilitates software program updates. Any MS-DOS PC can be used to emulate a traditional CIT through a variety of low-cost terminal emulator software packages; thus, an MS-DOS PC can serve DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer needs very efficiently.
  • Page 241 363-206-305 Operations Interfaces CPro Graphical User Interface and Provisioning Tool The CPro Graphical User Interface and Provisioning Tool is a Microsoft Windows based user interface that can optionally be used with the DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer. The tool simplifies and mechanizes administration, maintenance, and provisioning operations.
  • Page 242 363-206-305 Operations Interfaces User Panel The user panel, shown in Figure 6-4, provides system-level information and control functions, while the ACTIVE and FAULT LED on each faceplate provide circuit pack level information. These features allow many operations tasks (for example, fault isolation or circuit pack replacement) to be performed when a CIT or external test equipment is not available.

  • Page 243: Fiberreach Multiplexer User Panel

    363-206-305 Operations Interfaces Critical Alarm Major Alarm Minor Alarm Power Minor Alarm ACO/LED Test TEST Power A Power B Abnormal Near-End Activity ACTY Far-End Activity ACTY Craft Interface Terminal Connector ECC2 Bar Code Label Figure 6-4. FiberReach Multiplexer User Panel Issue 3 June 2000...
  • Page 244 363-206-305 Operations Interfaces User Panel LEDs The user panel LEDs show a composite of all alarms and status conditions in the local shelf. The composite is defined as follows: The highest level alarm LED (CR, MJ, PMN, or MN) of all alarms at the local shelf is lit.
  • Page 245 363-206-305 Operations Interfaces ACO/TST Pushbutton The ACO/TST pushbutton tests all the LEDs on the shelf. All LEDs on the shelf will be lit while the pushbutton is pressed. If the ACO pushbutton is pressed and held for more than 2 seconds, the three digits of the software release number are displayed in the 7-segment FE ID display.

  • Page 246: Ddm-2000 Fiberreach Pushbutton Combinations

    363-206-305 Operations Interfaces Pushbutton Combinations The three pushbuttons described previously are used in combinations to perform seven functions. Figure 6-1 lists the functions. These functions are used as part of the procedures described in the TOP section of this manual. Table 6-1.
  • Page 247 363-206-305 Operations Interfaces ACTIVE Indicators A green ACTIVE indicator is provided on each OLIU circuit pack. It indicates which circuit packs are active (carrying service) at any given time. Since both OLIUs are active in a ring configuration, both ACTIVE indicators will always be illuminated. Although there is no ACTIVE LED on each low-speed circuit pack to indicate it is carrying service, the status of the circuit packs can normally be deduced without the CIT.
  • Page 248 The DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer supports remote and automated provisioning from a provisioning OS such as Telcordia Technologies' OPS/INE or Lucent Technologies ITN SNC. (FiberReach Release 4.0 is supported by TEMS.) The DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer also provides enhanced security. The TL1 maintenance messages of the DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer are based on Telcordia Technologies' TR-NWT-000833, Issue 3, Rev.
  • Page 249 824-102-151, DDM-2000 Multiplexers Operations Systems Engineering Guide . ITM SNC ITM SNC is an element management system (EMS) that supports SONET NEs ® such as the Lucent Technologies’ DDM-2000, FT-2000, SLC -2000, and the ® Fujitsu Lightwave Multiplexer (FLM). ITM SNC provides fault, provisioning, configuration, and security management functions via a Graphical User Interface (GUI).
  • Page 250 363-206-305 Operations Interfaces User-Definable Miscellaneous Discretes Environmental Alarms and — Controls To allow monitoring and control of equipment collocated with a DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer in a remote site, a set of user-definable miscellaneous discrete environmental alarms and controls is provided. Twenty-one miscellaneous discrete alarm/status points are provided to monitor environmental conditions at remote terminal sites (open door, high temperature, etc.).

  • Page 251: Miscellaneous Discretes

    363-206-305 Operations Interfaces Remote Terminal Central Office Misc. Alarm/Status Inputs Input Common -48V External Minor CIT or TL1/X.25 -48V Power Minor Fan Control Fan Unit (cabinet) Output Misc. Control Outputs Output Common tpa 852346/01 Figure 6-5. Miscellaneous Discretes Issue 3 June 2000 6-17...
  • Page 252 363-206-305 Operations Interfaces 6-18 Issue 3 June 2000...
  • Page 253 Circuit Pack Descriptions Contents Overview Wideband Shelf - Introduction Control Circuit Packs BBG8/BBG8B SYSCTL Circuit Pack Description Purpose of Circuit BBG8/BBG8B SYSCTL Faceplate Controls and Indicators General Description of Operation Detailed Description of Operation BBG8/BBG8B SYSCTL Hardware Setting BBG8/BBG8B SYSCTL Quick Reference Summary ECC2 User Panel Circuit Pack Description 7-11 7-11...
  • Page 254 Contents Purpose of Circuit 7-22 7-22 DS1PM Faceplate Indicator 7-22 7-22 General Description of Operation 7-23 7-23 Detailed Description of Operation 7-23 7-23 DS1PM Hardware Settings 7-26 7-26 DS1PM Quick Reference Summary 7-28 7-28 177A Retainer Card Description 7-29 7-29 Purpose of Card 7-29 7-29...
  • Page 255 Contents Detailed Description of Operation 7-56 7-56 HDSL Quick Reference Summary 7-61 7-61 Transmission - Optical Interface 7-62 7-62 Universal Optical Connectors 7-62 7-62 Optical Interface Circuit Packs 7-64 7-64 22-Type OLIU Circuit Pack Descriptions 7-66 7-66 Purpose of Circuits 7-66 7-66 22-Type Faceplate Indicators...
  • Page 256 Contents CDTU Faceplate Controls and Indicators 7-94 7-94 DSXBIU Circuit Pack Description 7-94 7-94 DSXBIU Faceplate Controls and Indicators 7-94 7-94 Channel Units in the Narrowband Shelves 7-96 7-96 Channel Unit Circuit Pack Descriptions 7-96 7-96 7-iv Issue 3 June 2000...
  • Page 257 Circuit Pack Descriptions Overview The first part of this chapter provides a detailed functional description of the DDM- 2000 FiberReach Multiplexer circuit packs for the wideband shelf. The second part of this chapter provides a detailed functional description of the DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer circuit packs for the narrowband shelf.

  • Page 258: Circuit Pack Descriptions

    363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions Optical Interfaces — 22D-U OC-3 (IS-3) OLIU — 22F/22F-U/22F2-U OC-3 (Intermediate Reach) OLIU — 22G-U/22G2-U/22G3-U/22G4-U (OC-3 Long Reach) OLIU — 26G2-U OC-1 optical line interface unit (OLIU) — 28G-U/28G2-U OC-3 optical line interface unit (OLIU) — 29G-U 1310 OC-12 (nm Long Reach) OLIU —...

  • Page 259: Circuit Pack Descriptions

    363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions BBG8/BBG8B SYSCTL Circuit Pack Description Purpose of Circuit The BBG8/BBG8B SYSCTL circuit pack is the system controller for the FiberReach Multiplexer. It has control over all shelf functions and provides all user interfaces into the system. BBG8/BBG8B SYSCTL Faceplate Controls and Indicators The BBG8 SYSCTL circuit pack faceplate controls and indicators are shown in...

  • Page 260: Bbg8 Sysctl Circuit Pack

    363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions BBG8 S1:1 SYSCTL Fault Lucent Critical Alarm FAULT Major Alarm Minor Alarm 7-Segment Power Minor Alarm Display ACO/LED Test TEST Power A FE ID Power B Far End Abnormal Select Pushbutton Near-End Activity ACTY Far-End Activity FE SEL ACTY Update/...
  • Page 261 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions General Description of Operation The SYSCTL circuit pack provides the majority of the control functions on the shelf. These include circuit pack monitoring, performance monitoring, protection switching, and user interfaces. The SYSCTL, which contains a microprocessor, controls links to all other circuit packs in the system and links to user interfaces.

  • Page 262: Bbg8 Sysctl Circuit Pack Block Diagram

    363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions Fault Sanity Processor Timer 7-Segment LED Display FE and Update/ Initialize Buttons User Panel LED’s and ACO Button Memory Interface User Interfaces Office Alarms Intrashelf Control Miscellaneous Internal Discretes Interfaces Inputs/Outputs Intershelf Control Control Main Processor Bus AUXCTL Power Monitor...
  • Page 263 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions Transmission/Timing Circuit Pack Interfaces The main processor can read and write parameters on the transmission circuit packs through a custom serial interface called the intrashelf control bus. These circuit packs have a built-in serial link receiver which provides an address map into the device.

  • Page 264: Bbg8/Bbg8B Sysctl Option Switches

    363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions Power Circuitry The SYSCTL receives two sources of −48 volts which are diode ORed, fused, and filtered prior to conversion to a +5 volt source to power the rest of the circuit pack. A failure of the fuse or converter causes the red FAULT LED to light. BBG8/BBG8B SYSCTL Hardware Setting The BBG8/BBG8B circuit pack has two hardware switches.
  • Page 265 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions Switch 1 (S1) Settings Product Identification S1-1 S1-2 S1-3 VALUE DDM-2000/ SLC -2000/ DDM-2000 FiberReach BBG8/BBG8B SYSCTL Quick Reference Summary Interface Functions Intrashelf interface functions performed by the SYSCTL are as follows: Direct control of other circuit packs via a serial control link and intrashelf control bus Control of circuit pack and user panel LEDs Detecting the presence of, and identifying, circuit packs installed in the...
  • Page 266 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions Maintenance Functions Maintenance functions provided by the SYSCTL are as follows: Automatic reset on power up Fault detection, isolation, and reporting Protection switching control of other circuit packs Inventory information ( CLEI code, date of manufacture, etc.). 7-10 Issue 3 June 2000...
  • Page 267 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions ECC2 User Panel Circuit Pack Description Purpose of Circuit The ECC2 User Panel (USPNL) for the DDM-2000 FiberReach wideband shelf provides system-level information and control functions, as well as LEDS. Faceplate Controls and Indicators The ECC2 USPNL is shown in Figure 7-4. LEDs provide system-level information and control functions.

  • Page 268: Fiberreach Multiplexer Ecc2

    363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions Critical Alarm Major Alarm Minor Alarm Power Minor Alarm ACO/LED Test TEST Power A Power B Abnormal Near-End Activity ACTY Far-End Activity ACTY Craft Interface Terminal Connector ECC2 Bar Code Label Figure 7-4. DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer ECC2 User Panel 7-12 Issue 3 June 2000...
  • Page 269 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions Detailed Description of Operation The ECC2 USPNL provides the following interfaces for the DDM-2000 FiberReach wideband shelf: Alarm and Status LEDs: — Critical Alarm — Major Alarm — Minor Alarm — Power Minor Alarm — Alarm Cutoff —...
  • Page 270 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions Filter -48 V RTN Replaceable -48 V Power Filter Fuse To/From Other Circuit Packs Replaceable Filter -48 V Power Fuse -48 V RTN Filter Alarm From SYSCTL Status LEDs ACO/LED SYSCTL Test Button To/From SYSCTL Connector Figure 7-5.

  • Page 271: Bbf1B Ds1 Circuit Pack

    363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions Wideband Shelf - Transmission Circuit Packs BBF1B DS1 Circuit Pack Description Purpose of Circuit The DS1 circuit pack provides a low-speed interface between asynchronous DS1 rate signals and SONET virtual tributary group (VT-G) signals. DS1 Faceplate Indicator The DS1 circuit pack FAULT indicator is shown in Figure 7-6.
  • Page 272 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions General Description of Operation The DS1 circuit pack terminates four bidirectional DS1 lines complying with standard DSX-1 signal specifications. The DS1 circuit pack interfaces to the OLIU circuit pack at the VT-G rate (6.912 MHz) and to the SYSCTL. Detailed Description of Operation Transmission Circuitry Transmit Direction.

  • Page 273: Bbf1B Ds1 Circuit Pack Block Diagram

    363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions To/From Prot. Sw. DS1 to VT 1.5 To/From Processor OLIU CPs Loopback VT 1.5 DS1 #1 VT-G (Service & Adds (Removes) Protection) VT OH To/From Prot. Sw. DS1 to VT 1.5 Processor Loopback VT 1.5 DS1 #2 Adds (Removes) Timing VT OH...
  • Page 274 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions The BBF3 DS1PM circuit pack can be mixed with the BBF1B. If mixed, the protection circuit pack must be a BBF3 DS1PM. Fault Detection Circuitry The DS1 circuit pack has in-service and out-of-service built-in test capability. In- service testing is continuous and errors are reported when they occur to the SYSCTL via the intrashelf control bus.

  • Page 275: Ds1 Cable Lbo Settings

    363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions Edge Connector Component Side Note: The switches are set by moving the slide toward the desired position. Figure 7-8. BBF1B DS1 Option Switches Table 7-1. DS1 Cable LBO Settings DS1 Cable LBO Settings (Note) 613C (608C) 1249C Other Cable DIP Switch...

  • Page 276: Ds1 Line Code Settings

    363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions Table 7-2. DS1 Line Code Settings DS1 Line Code Settings (Notes) DIP Switch Settings Line Code S1-4 S1-5 S1-6 S1-7 Format (Port 1) (Port 2) (Port 3) (Port 4) B8Zs Notes: 1. Switch section 8 (S1-8) is unused and ignored by the system.
  • Page 277 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions Control Functions The major control functions of the DS1 circuit pack are as follows: Protection switching for OLIU circuit pack protection VT path overhead processing Internal fault detection Inventory information ( CLEI code, date of manufacture, etc.). Maintenance Signal Functions The major maintenance signal functions are as follows: Detects VT path AIS...
  • Page 278 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions BBF3/BBF3B DS1PM Circuit Pack Description Purpose of Circuit The DS1PM circuit pack provides all of the functions of a BBF1B circuit pack and also provides performance monitoring (PM) of SF and ESF signals to allow for T1 tariff verification.
  • Page 279 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions General Description of Operation The DS1PM circuit pack terminates four bidirectional DS1 lines complying with standard DSX-1 signal specifications. The DS1PM circuit pack interfaces to the OLIU circuit pack at the VT-G rate (6.912 MHz) and to the SYSCTL. The DS1 and DS1PM circuit packs are, with respect to transmission, functionally equivalent.

  • Page 280: Ds1Pm Circuit Pack Block Diagram

    363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions To/From Prot. Sw. Framer To PM Processor DS1 to VT 1.5 To/From Processor Loopback OLIU CPs VT 1.5 DS1 #1 VT-G Adds (Removes) (Service & VT OH Protection) To/From Prot. Sw. To PM Processor Framer DS1 to VT 1.5 Processor Loopback VT 1.5...
  • Page 281 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions Protection Circuitry Optional revertive DS1PM circuit pack protection is provided with on-board relays on the DSX-1 side and with logic selectors at the VT-G level on the OLIU circuit packs. The SYSCTL controls these relays through two serial interfaces so that a failure of one serial interface to the DS1PM does not prevent control of the relays.
  • Page 282 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions Power Circuitry The OLIU circuit packs supply +5 V power to the DS1PM circuit packs. These inputs are diode ORed and the output is fused and then filtered before it is used to power the rest of the circuit pack. A failure of the fuse causes the red FAULT LED to light.

  • Page 283: Ds1Pm Cable Lbo Settings

    363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions Table 7-3. DS1PM Cable LBO Settings DS1PM Cable LBO Settings (Note) 613C 1249C Other Cable (608C) Cable dB Loss to DIP Switch Set- Cable Length to DSX-1 at tings Length to DSX-1 772 KHz S1-1 S1-2 S1-3 DSX-1 (feet) (feet)
  • Page 284 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions DS1PM Quick Reference Summary Transmit Functions Major transmit functions of the DS1PM circuit pack are as follows: Receives four AMI or B8ZS encoded DS1 signals from a DSX-1 Recovers DS1 clock and NRZ data from each DS1 signal Synchronizes and maps each data signal to a VT1.5 synchronous payload envelope (SPE) Inserts VT path overhead...
  • Page 285 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions 177A Retainer Card Description Purpose of Card To ensure proper operation of DS1/DS1PM circuit pack protection switching, the 177A Retainer card (Figure 7-12) must be installed in all unused slots within a low-speed group that is partially equipped with DS1/DS1PM circuit packs. CAUTION: Unused low-speed interface slots within a partially equipped group must be equipped with 177A Retainer cards if DS1 protection is used.

  • Page 286: Bbg4B Ds3 Circuit Pack

    363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions BBG4/BBG4B DS3 Circuit Pack Description Purpose of Circuit The BBG4/BBG4B DS3 circuit pack provides a low-speed interface between asynchronous DS3-rate signals and SONET STS-1 signals. The BBG4B DS3 provides the same functions as the BBG4 DS3 and can be used in place of the BBG4 DS3 in all applications.
  • Page 287 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions The red FAULT LED lights by the SYSCTL on detection of BBG4/BBG4B DS3 circuit pack failure. In the event of an incoming DS3 signal failure, this LED will flash on and off. The green ACTIVE LED lights when the circuit pack is active (carrying service).

  • Page 288: Bbg4/Bbg4B Ds3 Circuit Pack Block Diagram

    363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions To/From Companion CP Hybrid Receiver To/From Multiplexer Loopback To/From Protection OLIU CPs STS-1 DSX-3 Relays (Service & Demultiplexer Protection) From TGS CPs Timing (Service & Driver Protection) -48V A From Shelf -48V B -48V Fuses Intrashelf Control To/From SYSCTL...
  • Page 289 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions Control Circuitry The BBG4/BBG4B DS3 circuit pack interfaces with the SYSCTL via the intra-shelf control bus. Redundancy in the intra-shelf control bus assures the level of control required to perform protection switching and alarming of a faulty circuit pack. The BBG4/BBG4B DS3 provides maintenance elements for reporting the status of the circuit pack, status of the incoming STS-1 and DS3 signals, as well as the circuit pack inventory information ( CLEI code, date of manufacture, etc.).
  • Page 290 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions Loopbacks Two loopbacks are provided on the BBG4/BBG4B DS3. The terminal loopback bridges the DS3 desynchronizer output signal (transmitted toward the DSX-3) back into the DS3 synchronizer input. Operation of the loopback does not affect the signal transmitted to the DSX-3. The facility loopback bridges the STS-1 output signal to the OLIU back toward the DSX-3.
  • Page 291 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions BBG4/BBG4B DS3 Hardware Settings The location of the BBG4/BBG4B DS3 circuit pack LBO jumpers is shown in Figure 7-15. The BBG4/BBG4B DS3 LBO settings are shown in the table. LBO IN LBO OUT Edge Connector Component Side BBG4/BBG4B DS3 LBO Settings Cable Length (Ft) 735A...
  • Page 292 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions Power Circuitry The BBG4/BBG4B DS3 circuit pack receives two sources of −48 volts that are in turn diode ORed, fused, and filtered before conversion to +5 volts to power the rest of the circuit pack. A failure of the fuse or converter causes the red FAULT LED to light.
  • Page 293 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions Maintenance Signal Functions The major maintenance signal functions are as follows: Detects STS-1 path AIS coming from the fiber Detects STS-1 path unequipped signal coming from the fiber Inserts DS3 AIS toward the fiber and DSX-3 Detects DS3 AIS coming from the fiber Inserts and detects STS-1 path yellow signal to/from the fiber Detects DS3 OOF from the fiber...

  • Page 294: Bbf6 T1Ext Circuit Pack

    363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions BBF6 T1 EXT Circuit Pack Description Purpose of Circuit The T1EXT circuit pack provides all of the functions of a BBF3B circuit pack for two T1 carrier lines. The T1EXT circuit pack also provides 60mA simplex line powering and performance monitoring (PM) of SF and ESF signals to allow for T1 tariff verification.
  • Page 295 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions General Description of Operation The T1EXT circuit pack terminates two bidirectional T1 lines complying with standard T1 signal specifications. The T1EXT circuit pack interfaces to the OLIU circuit pack at the VT-G rate (6.912 MHz) and to the SYSCTL. The DS1PM and T1EXT circuit packs are, with respect to transmission, functionally equivalent.

  • Page 296: T1Ext Circuit Pack Block Diagram

    363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions To/From Prot. Sw. Framer To PM Processor To/From DS1 to VT 1.5 OLIU CPs Processor (Service & Loopback VT 1.5 DS1 #1 VT-G Protection) Adds (Removes) VT 1.5 VT OH Byte Timing Interleave & From To/From (Disinterleave) OLIU CPs To PM Processor...
  • Page 297 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions Control Circuitry The T1EXT circuit pack interfaces with the SYSCTL over the intrashelf control bus. Redundancy in the intrashelf control bus assures the level of control required to perform protection switching and alarming of a faulty circuit pack. The T1EXT provides maintenance elements for reporting the status of the circuit pack and the incoming VT1.5 and DS1 signals, as well as the circuit pack inventory information ( CLEI code, date of manufacture, etc.).
  • Page 298 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions When a T1EXT circuit pack is inserted, the relays are in the protection state until the SYSCTL determines that the circuit pack is good. The BBF6 T1EXT circuit pack can be mixed with the BBF1/1B. If mixed, the protection circuit pack must be a BBF3 DS1PM circuit pack.

  • Page 299: T1Ext Cable Lbo Settings

    363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions T1EXT Hardware Settings The line coding and line build out (LBO) are switch settable. Other parameters are provisionable through the software. The locations of the T1EXT circuit pack option switches are shown in Figure 7-18 and Table 7-5 and Table 7-6. Edge Connector Component Side...
  • Page 300 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions Table 7-6. T1EXT Line Code Settings T1EXT Line Code Settings (Notes) DIP Switch Settings Line Code S1-4 S1-5 S1-6 S1-7 Format (Port 1) (Port 2) (Port 3) (Port 4) B8ZS Notes: 1. Switch section 8 (S1-8) is unused and must be off. 2.
  • Page 301 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions T1EXT Quick Reference Summary Transmit Functions Major transmit functions of the T1EXT circuit pack are as follows: Receives two AMI or B8ZS encoded DS1 signals from a T-line Recovers DS1 and NRZ data from each DS1 signal Synchronizes and maps each data signal to a VT1.5 synchronous payload envelope (SPE) Inserts VT path overhead...

  • Page 302: Bbg19 Ds3 Circuit Pack

    363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions BBG19 DS3 Data Services Interface Circuit Pack Description Purpose of Circuit The BBG19 DS3 circuit pack provides an interface between asynchronous DS3- rate signals and SONET STS-1 signals. It provides front access to DS3 Data Services, such as Ethernet, Token Ring, ATM, FDDI, Frame Relay, and others, via BNC faceplate connectors.
  • Page 303 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions The red FAULT LED lights by the SYSCTL on detection of BBG19 DS3 circuit pack failure. In the event of an incoming DS3 signal failure, this LED will flash on and off. The green ACTIVE LED lights when the circuit pack is active (in-service). General Description of Operation NOTE: DS3 access is through a BNC connector on the faceplate.
  • Page 304 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions Detailed Description of Operation Transmission Circuitry Transmit Direction. Figure 7-20 provides an overall block diagram of the BBG19 DS3 circuit pack. The transmit direction is the direction toward the STS-1 signal, and receive direction refers to the direction toward the data services device. In the transmit direction, the BBG19 DS3 receives an incoming B3ZS encoded DS3 signal from the data services device.

  • Page 305: Bbg19 Ds3 Circuit Pack Block Diagram

    363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions Receiver Multiplexer Loopback To/From To/From Data Services STS-1 OLIU CPs Device Demultiplexer From TGS CPs Timing (Service & Driver Protection) -48V A From Shelf -48V B -48V Fuses Intrashelf Control To/From SYSCTL tpa 852245/01 Figure 7-20. BBG19 DS3 Circuit Pack Block Diagram Control Circuitry The BBG19 DS3 circuit pack interfaces with the SYSCTL via the intra-shelf control bus.
  • Page 306 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions using the same STS-1 time slot. This dual 0x1 interface also provides route diversity for point to multi-point interconnectivity and route restoration to data networking devices utilizing the BBG19s for access to the SONET network. Fault Detection Circuitry The BBG19 DS3 circuit pack has in-service and out-of-service built-in test capability.
  • Page 307 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions BBG19 DS3 Hardware Settings The location of the BBG19 DS3 circuit pack LBO jumpers is shown in Figure 7-21. The BBG19 DS3 LBO settings are shown in the table. LBO IN Edge LBO OUT Connector Component Side tpa 852244/01 BBG19 DS3 LBO Settings Cable Length (Ft)
  • Page 308 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions Power Circuitry The BBG19 DS3 circuit pack receives two sources of −48 volts that are in turn diode ORed, fused, and filtered before conversion to +5 volts to power the rest of the circuit pack. A failure of the fuse or converter causes the red FAULT LED to light.
  • Page 309 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions Maintenance Signal Functions The major maintenance signal functions are as follows: Detects STS-1 path AIS coming from the fiber Detects STS-1 path unequipped signal coming from the fiber Inserts DS3 AIS toward the fiber and data services device Detects DS3 AIS coming from the fiber Inserts and detects STS-1 path yellow signal to/from the fiber Detects DS3 OOF from the fiber...
  • Page 310 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions BBF8 High Data-Rate Digital Subscriber Line (HDSL) Purpose of Circuit The HDSL circuit pack (BBF8) provides HDSL interface capability on the DDM-2000 FiberReach shelf to compatible PairGain equipment at the customer premises. It allows the transport of T1 payloads, for up to 12,000 feet, over two metallic 24 AWG twisted-pair lines.
  • Page 311 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions BBF8 S1:1 HDSL Lucent FAULT tpa 852341/01 Figure 7-22. BBF8 HDSL Circuit Pack General Description of Operation Figure 7-23 provides an overall block diagram of the HDSL circuit pack. The BBF8 circuit pack provides an HDSL interface capability on the DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer.

  • Page 312: Hdsl Circuit Pack Block Diagram

    363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions Detailed Description of Operation Transmission Circuitry The BBF8 fits into a low-speed slot and provides two, four-wire (2 pair) HDSL interfaces. These interfaces are compatible with PairGain HDSL equipment which may be located up to 12,000 feet away. A 2B1Q line code is used on each transmission pair.

  • Page 313: Hdsl Line Specifications

    363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions Due to the increased power needs of the BBF8, only three BBF8 circuit packs (including protection) may be used in a function group. Powering for these packs is provided by the 28-type in the FiberReach shelf. Pack mixing with Quad DS1/T1 EXT circuit packs is not recommended.
  • Page 314 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions CAUTION: Unused low-speed interface slots within a partially equipped group must be equipped with 177A Retainer cards if HDSL protection is used. Failure to do so may result in corrupted transmission. The HDSL circuit pack is not recommended to be mixed with the BBF1B/3Bs.
  • Page 315 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions Special Loopback Code Detection: A1LB, A2LB, A3LB, A4LB, or A5LB Errored Second Threshold: NONE, 17, or 170 per 24 hours Loopback Time-out: NONE, 20, 60, 120 minutes Alarm Notification: ENABLE or DISABLE Allocation of DS0 time slots on HDSL loop: ALTERNATE or CONTIGUOUS Margin Alarm Threshold: 0-15 dB, 1 dB increments DS0 blocking: individually (T1, FT1) Fast Loss of Sync Word (LOSW): ENABLE or DISABLE.

  • Page 316: Hdsl Dip Switch Settings

    363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions Power Circuitry The 28-type circuit packs supply +5V power to the HDSL circuit packs in the corresponding DS1PM circuit pack groups. These inputs are diode ORed and the output is fused and then filtered before it is used to power the rest of the circuit pack.
  • Page 317 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions HDSL Quick Reference Summary Communication Functions Major transmit (Xmit) and receive (Rcv) functions of the HDSL circuit pack are as follows: Multiplexes four VT1.5 SPEs to a byte-interleaved VT-G signal (Xmit) Provides the VT-G signal to a 28-type circuit pack (Xmit) Inserts VT path overhead (Xmit) Receives up to two HDSL formatted signals (Xmit) Provides HDSL to VT1.5 mapping (Xmit)
  • Page 318 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions Transmission - Optical Interface Universal Optical Connectors Circuit packs having a "-U" after their designation indicate that these circuit packs have a universal optical connector. The following circuit packs are available with the connector: 22D-U OLIU 22F/22F-U/22F2-U 22G-U/22G2-U/22G3-U/22G4-U* OLIU...

  • Page 319: Universal Optical Connector

    363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions Faceplate-mounted block that universally accepts , SC, or FC buildout A2070 / A3070 Buildout (White) -Type A3080 Buildout (White) FC - Type A2060 / A3060 Buildout (Blue) SC - Type Figure 7-25. Universal Optical Connector Issue 3 June 2000 7-63...

  • Page 320: Fiberreach Oliu Feature Summary

    363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions Optical Interface Circuit Packs Table 7-8 lists the FiberReach OLIU Feature Summary. Table 7-8. FiberReach OLIU Feature Summary VT/STS Line Span Sig. Rate Length Fiber Ext. Degrade OLIU (Mb/s) (Km) Type Atten. System Note 22D-U 155.52 <...
  • Page 321 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions Notes: 1. OLIU has two sets of optical interfaces. 2. OLIU is discontinued. Functionally equivalent alternatives are available or planned. 3. OLIU has extended TSI capabilities to support pass-through and hairpin cross- connections for OC-1 rings terminated in function units of a DDM-2000 OC-3. All OLIUs have universal optical connectors (compatible with ST, SC, and FC connectors) unless specified otherwise.
  • Page 322 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions 22-Type OLIU Circuit Pack Descriptions Purpose of Circuits The 22-type OLIU circuit packs (22D-U, 22F/22F-U/22F2-U, and 22G-U/22G2-U/ 22G3-U/22G4-U) perform the optical/electrical conversion between optical carrier level 3 (OC-3) and STS-3 signals, multiplexing between STS-3 and three STS-1 signals and accessing SONET transport overhead.
  • Page 323 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions 22D-U S1:1 OLIU Lucent FAULT ACTIVE AT&T Universal Optical Connectors AT&T tpa852464-01 Figure 7-26. 22D-U OLIU Circuit Pack Issue 3 June 2000 7-67...
  • Page 324 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions 22F-U S1:1 OLIU FAULT ACTIVE AT&T Universal Optical Connectors AT&T tpa 851683/01 Figure 7-27. 22F-U OLIU Circuit Pack 7-68 Issue 3 June 2000...
  • Page 325 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions 22G-U S1:1 OLIU FAULT ACTIVE AT&T Universal Optical Connectors AT&T tpa 832538/01 Figure 7-28. 22G-U OLIU Circuit Pack Issue 3 June 2000 7-69...
  • Page 326 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions General Description of Operation The 22-type OLIUs multiplex three STS-1 signals to an STS-3, insert the SONET transport overhead bytes (line and section), and scramble the resulting signal. For the 22D-type OLIU, this STS-3 signal drives the LED transmitter to create an IS-3 output.
  • Page 327 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions The STS-1 outputs from the demultiplexer are sent to the STS-1 pointer processor which performs pointer interpretation and generation on each received STS-1. The output of the STS-1 pointer processor is three STS-1 signals, frame synchronous to each other. STS-1s are passed through without STS-1 path overhead termination.
  • Page 328 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions Control Circuitry The 22-type OLIU circuit packs interface with the BBG8/BBG8B SYSCTL circuit pack in the FiberReach shelf. The 22-type OLIU circuit packs provide maintenance elements for reporting the status of the circuit pack, status of the incoming optical and electrical signals, as well as inventory information ( CLEI code, date of manufacture, etc.).
  • Page 329 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions For all 22-type OLIUs, both A and B −48 volt backplane busses supply power to the converter through diode ORed circuit pack-mounted power select circuits and a circuit pack-mounted fuse. Failure of the fuse or converter causes the red FAULT LED to light.
  • Page 330 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions Control Functions The major control functions of the 22-type circuit packs are as follows: Process transport overhead Store inventory information ( CLEI code, date of manufacture, etc.) Maintenance Signal Functions The major maintenance signal functions of the 22-type circuit packs are as follows: Insert STS-1 path AIS For 22-type, insert and detect OC-3/IS-3 line AIS...
  • Page 331 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions 26G2-U OLIU Circuit Pack Description Purpose of Circuit The 26G2-U OLIU circuit pack interfaces with a 1310 nm optical line in the transmit and receive directions. It provides an interface between the OC-1 optical line and the electrical STS-1 and VT-G signals. The fiber is accessed via a pair of universal optical connectors on the 26G2-U faceplate that supports ST, SC, and FC type optical connectors.

  • Page 332: 26G2-U Oliu Circuit Pack

    363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions 26G2-U S1:1 OLIU LUCENT FAULT ACTIVE LUCENT Universal Optical Connectors LUCENT Figure 7-30. 26G2-U OLIU Circuit Pack 7-76 Issue 3 June 2000...
  • Page 333 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions A faceplate-mounted universal optical connector allows the 26G2-U OLIU to accept fiber terminated with ST, SC, or FC connectors. A 10 dB attenuator is required for loopback testing. The 26G2-U OLIU operates over single mode fiber. Various combinations of buildout attenuators and connectors are also available.

  • Page 334: 26G2-U Oliu Circuit Pack Block Diagram

    363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions Detailed Description of Operation Figure 7-31 is a block diagram of the 26G2-U OLIU circuit pack. SONET Transport OH To/From SYSCTL To/From Transport Companion STS-1 STS-1 Overhead OLIU OC-1 STS-1 Adds STS-1 Router Processor Tx Fiber Path Overhead Wide Section VT1.5...
  • Page 335 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions the backplane for STS-1 routing throughout the OC-3 shelf. The 26G2-U also provides an STS-1 electrical interface to a companion 26G2-U OLIU which allows the two OLIUs to be cross coupled. Receive Direction. In the receive direction, the optical receiver converts the light pulses from an NRZ-encoded OC-1 signal to equivalent electrical pulses.
  • Page 336 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions The 26G2-U OLIU interfaces via VT-G signals with circuit packs in the low-speed slots and via STS-1 signals with the circuit packs in the main and function unit slots. It selects the signals from the service or protection slot of each pair as directed by the SYSCTL.
  • Page 337 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions 26G2-U OLIU Quick Reference Summary Transmit Functions Major transmit functions of the 26G2-U OLIU circuit pack are as follows: Selects and multiplexes VT-Gs into one STS-1 synchronous payload envelope (SPE) Adds SONET and STS-1 path transport overhead Scrambles the STS-1 signal to prepare for optical conversion Uses a laser transmitter to produce a SONET standard OC-1 optical signal.
  • Page 338 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions 28G-U/28G2-U OLIU Circuit Pack Description Purpose of Circuit The 28G-U/28G2-U OLIU circuit pack interfaces with a 1310 nm optical line in the transmit and receive directions. It provides an interface between the OC-3 optical line and the electrical STS-1 and VT-G signals. The fiber is accessed via a pair of universal optical connectors on the 28G-U/28G2-U faceplate that supports ST, SC, and FC type optical connectors.
  • Page 339 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions 28G-U 28G-U 28G-U OLIU OLIU OLIU FAULT FAULT FAULT LUCENT LUCENT LUCENT ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE AT&T AT&T AT&T AT&T AT&T AT&T tpa 852476/01 tpa 852476/02 Figure 7-32. 28G-U/28G2-U OLIU Circuit Pack — 28-Type Pair with Interconnect Cable Assembly Issue 3 June 2000...
  • Page 340 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions A faceplate-mounted universal optical connector allows the 28G-U/28G2-U OLIU to accept fiber terminated with ST, SC, or FC connectors. The 28G-U/28G2-U OLIU operates over single mode fiber. Various combinations of buildout attenuators and connectors are also available. See Chapter 10, "Technical Specifications,"...
  • Page 341 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions Detailed Description of Operation Figure 7-33 is a block diagram of the 28G-U/28G2-U OLIU circuit pack. SONET Transport OH To/From SYSCTL To/From Transport Companion STS-1 STS-1 Overhead OLIU OC-3 STS-1 Adds STS-1 Processor Router Tx Fiber Path Overhead Wide Section VT1.5...
  • Page 342 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions The 28G-U/28G2-U provides an STS-1 electrical interface to a companion 28G-U/ 28G2-U OLIU which allows the two OLIUs to be cross coupled. Receive Direction. In the receive direction, the optical receiver converts the light pulses from an NRZ-encoded OC-3 signal to equivalent electrical pulses. The output from the optical receiver goes into a recovery device.
  • Page 343 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions The 28G-U/28G2-U OLIU interfaces via VT-G signals with circuit packs in the low- speed slots and via STS-1 signals with the circuit packs in the main and function unit slots. It selects the signals from the service or protection slot of each pair as directed by the SYSCTL.
  • Page 344 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions 28G-U/28G2-U OLIU Quick Reference Summary Transmit Functions Major transmit functions of the 28G-U/28G2-U OLIU circuit pack are as follows: Selects and multiplexes VT-Gs into one STS-1 synchronous payload envelope (SPE) Receives up to 3 STS-1s from function slots Adds SONET and STS-1 path transport overhead Combines 3 STS-1s into STS-3 Scrambles the STS-3 signal to prepare for optical conversion...
  • Page 345 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions 29G-U/29H-U OLIU Circuit Pack Description (Long Reach OC-12 Interface) Optical/Copper Specifications For direct optical loopbacks, at least 10 dB of optical attenuation is needed for the 29G-U optical line. The distributed feedback laser supplies an NRZ- coded signal.

  • Page 346: Optical System Interfaces (Points S And R)

    363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions Station Cable Outside Plant Cable Station Cable Point S Point R Fiber Fiber OLIU OLIU Crossconnect Crossconnect Transmitter Receiver (Tx) (Rx) Transmitter/Connector Receiver/Connector Assembly Assembly Connections Figure 7-34. Optical System Interfaces (Points S and R) 7-90 Issue 3 June 2000...
  • Page 347 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions Narrowband Shelf - Introduction The DDM-2000 FiberReach narrowband shelf is used in conjunction with the wideband shelf to provide sub-DS1 rate services with protected or unprotected DS1 or higher rate services. The narrowband shelf has its own power conversion. An arrangement of the narrowband shelf is shown in Figure 7-35.
  • Page 348 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions RGU Circuit Pack Description This circuit pack provides 20 Hz negative superimposed ringing voltage to satisfy loop applications up to 132 ohms. The RGU receives an input voltage from the power converter unit (PCS) and supplies ringing voltage to three lines simultaneously.
  • Page 349 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions power). The PSU converts incoming 60V AC to -48V DC for use by the Wideband and Narrowband shelves. In applications where -48V DC is readily available, The PSU is not required. PCU Faceplate Controls and Indicators The PCU circuit pack faceplate controls and indicators are shown in Figure 7-37.
  • Page 350 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions CDTU Faceplate Controls and Indicators The CDTU circuit pack faceplate controls and indicators are shown in Figure 7-38. Lucent AUA421 FAIL BUSY CDTU Figure 7-38. AUA421 CDTU Circuit Pack DSXBIU Circuit Pack Description The Digital Signal Cross-Connect Backplane Interface Unit (DSXBIU) is a Narrowband shelf circuit pack that operates as the local controller for the Narrowband shelf and multiplexes the DS0 signals from the channel units to DS1 interfaces.
  • Page 351 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions Lucent SLC-2000 FHB2 FAIL CONFIG LED Test DSXBIU 1" Figure 7-39. FHB2 DSXBIU Circuit Pack Issue 3 June 2000 7-95...

  • Page 352: Ddm-2000 Fiberreach Narrowband Shelf Channel Unit Plug-Ins

    363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions Channel Units in the Narrowband Shelves Channel Unit Circuit Pack Descriptions Table 7-9 lists the circuit packs that can be housed in the 12-channel unit slots of the narrowband shelf. All circuit packs within the DDM-2000 FiberReach narrowband shelf are unprotected.
  • Page 353 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions Product Functional Name Available With Code SLC -2000 Release AUA59 SPOTS CU CF + OHT/CLASS (Discontinued Availability) AUA75* Private Line Automatic Ring (PLAR) † AUA93 ISDN BRITE II, ANSI-U AUA94 ISDN Dual ANSI -U AUA150* POTS/SPOTS CU CF + OHT/CLASS AUA150C Dual POTS/SPOTS CF + OHT/CLASS + ALC ‡...
  • Page 354 363-206-305 Circuit Pack Descriptions Product Functional Name Available With Code SLC -2000 Release SPQ429 Quad EBS P-Phone (Discontinued Availability) SPQ440 Quad SLC-2000 ALC POTS/SPOTS CU CF + OHT + CLASS + CLSS (Discontinued Availability) SPQ440B Quad POTS/SPOTS ALC CF + OHT + CLASS + CLSS (Discontinued Availability) SPQ440C* Quad Extended Range SPOTS (Discontinued Availability)

  • Page 355: Administration And Provisioning

    Administration and Provisioning Contents Overview Wideband Shelf Administration Version Recognition Software Upgrades Remote Software Download and Copy Data Base Backup and Restoral ITM SNC Security Enhanced Security Features Software Compatibility Controller Maintenance and Memory Administration Controller Maintenance Memory Administration Service Affecting Actions DS-1/T1 Multiplexing and Mapping Wideband Shelf Provisioning Default Provisioning...
  • Page 356 Contents Line State Provisioning 8-12 8-12 AIS or Unequipped Provisioning 8-12 8-12 Data Communications Channel (DCC) Provisioning 8-12 8-12 Operations Interworking (OI) Provisioning 8-12 8-12 Software Compatibility 8-14 8-14 NSAP Provisioning 8-16 8-16 TARP Provisioning 8-16 8-16 Selectable Parameters 8-17 8-17 Switch Selectable Parameters 8-17...
  • Page 357 Contents DS3 Locked Cross-Connects 8-54 8-54 STS-3c Cross-Connects 8-55 8-55 Narrowband Administration and Provisioning 8-58 8-58 Narrowband Shelf Administration 8-58 8-58 Software Downloads and Upgrades 8-58 8-58 Security 8-58 8-58 Narrowband Shelf Provisioning 8-61 8-61 Channel Unit Provisioning 8-61 8-61 Issue 3 June 2000 8-iii...
  • Page 358 Contents 8-iv Issue 3 June 2000...

  • Page 359: Administration And Provisioning

    Administration and Provisioning Overview This chapter describes the administration and provisioning features of the DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer narrowband shelf and wideband shelves. The following topics are described in addition to the administration and provisioning features: Multiplexing and mapping Cross-connection provisioning for linear and ring networks Listing of provisionable parameters with their ranges and default values.
  • Page 360 Release 3.0 and later software can not be copied (NE-NE) to a FiberReach Release 2.2 or earlier NE. Remote PC-NE software downloads are recommended for FiberReach Release 3.0 and later. Refer to the Lucent Technologies 2000 Product Family Multi-Vendor Operations Interworking Guide , 824-102-144.
  • Page 361 363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning supported in multi-vendor subnetworks, but only between DDM-2000 Multiplexers. The remote software download and copy capabilities enable the network service providers to avoid costly craft dispatches for software upgrade. DDM-2000 FiberReach can also accept software downloads from Lucent’s ITM SNC 5.0 when upgrading from DDM-2000 FiberReach R3.0 or later to subsequent releases.
  • Page 362 363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning ITM SNC All of the backup and restore features are also available with the Integrated Transport Management Subnetwork Controller (ITM SNC). Refer to OI Software Compatibility table later in the chapter for release compatibilities. Refer to 107- 564-270, Integrated Transport Management (ITM) SubNetwork Controller (SNC), User Guide, for additional information.
  • Page 363 363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning The following commands are restricted to privileged users over the CIT and DCC interfaces. init-sys — Initialize System rstr-passwd — Restore login and password file rtrv-lgn — Retrieve Login rtrv-passwd — Retrieve login and password file set-feat —...
  • Page 364 363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning Enhanced Security Features In DDM-2000 FiberReach Release 4.0, security feature enhancements include: User Provisionable Banner - a “Welcome Banner” that appears when a user signs on to the system 30-Day Aging on Passwords for Privileged Accounts Individual Accountability —...
  • Page 365 363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning Controller Maintenance and Memory Administration Controller Maintenance The system controller (SYSCTL) provides control functions for the DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer. The SYSCTL circuit pack provides CIT interfaces and coordinates protection switching, as well as all shelf maintenance and provisioning activities.
  • Page 366 363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning service but could affect maintenance. For example, an incorrect TID could produce confusing TL1 reports to the operations system (OS). Service Affecting Actions Although the DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer is designed to minimize loss of service due to equipment failure or human action, there are certain controller related actions that can cause a loss of provisioning data and possibly loss of service.
  • Page 367 363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning DS-1/T1 Multiplexing and Mapping The DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer uses the floating virtual tributary (VT) mode, asynchronous mapping for clear channel DS1 transport. Each DS1 signal is mapped to a VT1.5 signal; four VT1.5s are byte-interleaved to form a VT-G signal;...
  • Page 368 363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning software parameters are maintained in the SYSCTL circuit pack, and a single CIT command is provided to restore all default values. All provisioning data is stored in nonvolatile memory to prevent data loss during power failures and maintenance operations.
  • Page 369 363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning RT site the user side. It does not matter as long as the two sides are opposite values. See the set-fecom command page in Chapter 11 for more details. The network service access point (NSAP) is a multiple part address that uniquely identifies an NE for OSI interworking purposes.
  • Page 370 363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning to-end circuit is completely provisioned, the channel automatically changes to the IS state, and normal alarm and event reporting starts. An additional state, NMON, is also supported in which alarm and event reporting is suppressed regardless of the validity of the signal being received on the channel.

  • Page 371: Oi Software Compatibility

    OI features include the following: Remote OS access via the TL1/X.25 GNE Remote CIT login (remote technician access) Remote software download and copy. See also 824-102-144, Lucent Technologies 2000 Product Family Multi-Vendor Operations Interworking Guide. Issue 3 June 2000 8-13...
  • Page 372 363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning Software Compatibility Table 8-2 lists the SONET software compatibility within a subnetwork for the Lucent 2000 Product Family systems. All configurations listed support Operations Interworking (OI). The table lists all possible software combinations. Combinations not listed are not supported. Table 8-2.

  • Page 373: Software And Circuit Pack Compatibility Matrix

    363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning Table 8-3. Software and Circuit Pack Compatibility Matrix FiberReach Product/Release MAIN Low-Speed Groups SYSCTL Release 2.2 26G-U — BBF1B BBG8/ 26G2-U BBF3B BBG8B BBF6 177A 28G-U/ — BBF1B 28G2-U BBF3B BBF6 BBF8 177A* Release 3.0 26G-U —...
  • Page 374 363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning NSAP Provisioning The network services access point (NSAP) is a multiple part address that uniquely identifies each NE for OI purposes. The NSAP is used for subnetwork DCC communications using the OSI protocol. A unique NSAP is programmed into the SYSCTL circuit pack at the factory and does not have to be modified by the user unless subnetwork partitioning is necessary.

  • Page 375: Parameters Provisionable Via Hardware Switches

    363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning Selectable Parameters Switch Selectable Parameters Table 8-4 describes the parameters provisionable via hardware switches. Refer to the command pages in Chapter 11, "Commands and Reports," for a complete explanation of parameters. Table 8-4. Parameters Provisionable via Hardware Switches Parameter Range Pack...

  • Page 376: Ddm-2000 Fiberreach Parameters Provisionable Via The Cit

    363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning CIT Selectable Parameters Table 8-5 describes the parameters provisionable via the CIT. Refer to the command pages in Chapter 11, "Commands and Reports," for a complete explanation of parameters. Additional information on the ID parameters is provided in the "Identifiers"...
  • Page 377 363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning Table 8-5. DDM-2000 FiberReach Parameters Provisionable via the CIT (Continued) Parameter Range Default Command (Note 1) (Note 2) DS1 line coding* AMI,B8ZS,noOverride‡ noOverride set-tl* DS1 alarm level* MJ, MN, NA set-tl* DS1 AIS insertion* yes, no set-tl* DS1 failure threshold* , 10...
  • Page 378 363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning Table 8-5. DDM-2000 FiberReach Parameters Provisionable via the CIT (Continued) Parameter Range Default Command (Note 1) (Note 2) TARP (Layer 4 provisioning)** L4tlif (lifetime parameter) 1 to 65535 ent-ulsdcc-l4 L4ajsys(Manual adjacency 12 hex digits No default. See Note 3. ent-ulsdcc-l4 parameters) L4ajorg...
  • Page 379 3.0 feature. Identifiers The following identifiers (ID) are used for the TID and NSAP address. See also the Lucent Technologies 2000 Product Family Multi-Vendor Operations Interworking Guide, 824- 102-144. TID: The target identifier (TID) is a 20-character parameter that is set through the CIT using the set-ne command.
  • Page 380 363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning After the init-sys:all or init-sys:systcl command is entered, the system sets the TID to a default value of LT-DDM-2000. The TID must be unique among all NEs. The default TID may be changed using the set-ne command to a unique user-assigned value recognized by the OS.

  • Page 381: Fiberreach Manual Vt1.5 Cross Connections (Termination/Drop) In A 1 X

    363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning identify ring channels in Main 1 as different from Main 2 because both rings are always provisioned with the same information. Cross-Connection Types There are three different VT1.5 cross-connection types for the DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer: termination/drop, pass-through, and locked. Termination/Drop Cross-Connection The termination/drop cross-connection is used in all path-switched ring applications for DDM-2000 FiberReach, where DS1 low-speed signals are cross-...
  • Page 382 363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning From Type Example Address OLIU Address (Notes) Commands m-{1-12}-{1-7}-{1-4,all} OC-12 <--> c-1-{1-4,all} ent-crs-vt1:m-1-1-1,c-1-1 m-{1-12}-{1-7}-{1-4,all} OC-12 <--> d-1-{1-4,all} ent-crs-vt1:m-1-1-1,d-1-1 m-1-{1-7}-{1-4,all} OC-1 <--> a-1-{1-2,all} T1EXT ent-crs-vt1:m-1-1-1,a-1-2 m-1-{1-7}-{1-4,all} OC-1 <--> b-1-{1-2,all} T1EXT ent-crs-vt1:m-1-3-4,b-1-2 m-1-{1-7}-{1-4,all} OC-1 <--> c-1-{1-2,all} T1EXT ent-crs-vt1:m-1-3-3,c-1-1 m-1-{1-7}-{1-4,all} OC-1 <-->...

  • Page 383: Fiberreach Manual Vt1.5 Cross Connections (Termination/Drop) In A 1 X

    363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning Notes 1. Locked Signals: Cross-Connect type (CCT) must be “locked” (locked). *When using HDSL (BBF8) circuit pack in the Low Speed area, the 28G-U/28G2-U or the 29G- U OLIU must be used in the main unit slots of the FiberReach shelf and you are limited to three HDSL (BBF8) circuit packs including protection.
  • Page 384 363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning From CP Type Example Address OLIU Address (Notes) Commands m-{1-3}-{1-7,all}-{1-4,all} OC-3 <--> d-1-{1-2,all} HDSL* ent-crs-vt1:m-1-3-3,d-2-3 m-{1-12-{1-7,all}-{1-4,all} OC-12 <--> a-1-{1-4,all} ent-crs-vt1:m-1-3-3,a-2-3 a-2-{1-4,all} m-{1-12}-{1-7,all}-{1-4,all} OC-12 <--> b-1-{1-4,all} ent-crs-vt1:m-1-3-3,b-2-3 b-2-{1-4,all} m-{1-12}-{1-7,all}-{1-4,all} OC-12 <--> c-1-{1-4,all} ent-crs-vt1:m-1-3-3,c-2-3 c-2-{1-4,all} m-{1-12}-{1-7,all}-{1-4,all} OC-12 <--> d-1-{1-4,all} ent-crs-vt1:m-1-3-3,d-2-3 m-{1-12}-{1-7,all}-{1-4,all}...

  • Page 385: Fiberreach Manual Sts-1 Cross Connections (Termination Drop Cross-Connections)

    363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning Notes 1. Locked Signals: Cross-Connect type (CCT) must be “locked” (locked). *When using HDSL (BBF8) circuit pack in the Low Speed area, the 28G-U/28G2-U or the 29G-U OLIU must be used in the main unit slots of the FiberReach shelf and you are limited to three HDSL (BBF8) circuit packs including protection.

  • Page 386: Fiberreach Manual Vt1.5 Cross Connections (Pass-Through) 1 X 1 And 1 X

    363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning Pass-Through Cross-Connection Another type of cross-connection allows a high-speed VT1.5 or STS-1 channel to be "passed-through" between two high-speed ring interfaces. This is used in all path-switched ring applications at nodes where traffic is not dropped. The high- speed time slot entering must be the same leaving in this type of cross- connection.

  • Page 387: Fiberreach Sts-3C 0 X

    363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning Pass-Through Cross-Connection for STS-1 Refer to Table 8-10 for a Manual STS-1 Cross Connection (Pass-Through). Table 8-10. DDM-2000 FiberReach Manual STS-1 Cross Connections (Pass-Through) From CP Type Example Address OLIU Address (Notes) Commands m-{1-3} OC-3 <--> m-{1-3} OC-3 OLIU ent-crs-sts1:m-1,m-1 (28-type)

  • Page 388: Fiberreach Manual Vt1.5 Cross Connections (Locked) In A 1 X 1 Configuration

    363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning Notes 1.Both main units must always be equipped with OC-3 or OC-12 OLIUs. Locked Cross-Connection A variation of ring cross-connections, the locked cross-connection, is supported at the VT1.5 level to lock the path selector to a specified rotation of the ring where an external path selector is used.
  • Page 389 363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning From CP Type Example Address OLIU Address (Notes) Commands m-{1-12}-{1-7}-{1-4,all} OC-12 <--> d-1-{1-4,all} ent-crs-vt1:m-1-1-1,d-1-2, cct=locked,ring={m1,m2} m-1-{1-7}-{1-4,all} OC-1 <--> a-1-{1-2,all} T1EXT ent-crs-vt1:m-1-1-1,a-1-2, cct=locked,ring={m1,m2} m-1-{1-7}-{1-4,all} OC-1 <--> b-1-{1-2,all} T1EXT ent-crs-vt1:m-1-3-4,b-1-2, cct=locked,ring={m1,m2} m-1-{1-7}-{1-4,all} OC-1 <--> c-1-{1-2,all} T1EXT ent-crs-vt1:m-1-3-3,c-1-1, cct=locked,ring={m1,m2} m-1-{1-7}-{1-4,all} OC-1 <-->...
  • Page 390 363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning From CP Type Example Address OLIU Address (Notes) Commands m-{1-12}-{1-7}-{1-4,all} OC-12 <--> b-1-{1-2,all} HDSL* ent-crs-vt1:m-1-1-1,b-1-2, cct=locked,ring={m1,m2} m-{1-12}-{1-7}-{1-4,all} OC-12 <--> c-1-{1-2,all} HDSL* ent-crs-vt1:m-1-1-1,c-1-2, cct=locked,ring={m1,m2} m-{1-12}-{1-7}-{1-4,all} OC-12 <--> d-1-{1-2,all} HDSL* ent-crs-vt1:m-1-1-1,d-1-2, cct=locked,ring={m1,m2} Notes 1. Locked Signals: Cross-Connect type (CCT) must be “locked” (locked). *When using HDSL (BBF8) circuit pack in the Low Speed area, the 28G-U/28G2-U or the 29G-U OLIU must be used in the main unit slots of the FiberReach shelf and you are limited to three HDSL (BBF8) circuit packs including protection.
  • Page 391 363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning From Type Example Address OLIU Address (Notes) Commands m-1-{1-7,all}-{1-4,all} OC-1 <--> d-1-{1-4,all} ent-crs-vt1:m-1-1-1,d-2-1, cct=locked,ring={m1,m2} m-{1-3}-{1-7,all}-{1-4,all} OC-3 <--> a-1-{1-4,all} ent-crs-vt1:m-1-1-1,a-1-2, a-2-{1-4,all} cct=locked,ring={m1,m2} m-{1-3}-{1-7,all}-{1-4,all} OC-3 <--> b-1-{1-4,all} ent-crs-vt1:m-1-1-1,b-1-2, b-2-{1-4,all} cct=locked,ring={m1,m2} m-{1-3}-{1-7,all}-{1-4,all} OC-3 <--> c-1-{1-4,all} ent-crs-vt1:m-1-1-1,c-1-2, c-2-{1-4,all} cct=locked,ring={m1,m2} m-{1-3}-{1-7,all}-{1-4,all} OC-3 <-->...
  • Page 392 363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning From Type Example Address OLIU Address (Notes) Commands m-{1-3}-{1-7,all}-{1-4,all} OC-3 <--> c-1-{1-4,all} HDSL* ent-crs-vt1:m-1-1-1,c-1-2, c-2-{1-4,all} cct=locked,ring={m1,m2} m-{1-3}-{1-7}-{1-4,all} OC-3 <--> d-1-{1-2,all} HDSL* ent-crs-vt1:m-1-1-1d1-2, cct=locked,ring={m1,m2} m-{1-12}-{1-7,all}-{1-4,all} OC-12 <--> a-1-{1-2} T1EXT ent-crs-vt1:m-1-1-1,a-1-2, a-2-{1-2,all} cct=locked,ring={m1,m2} m-{1-12}-{1-7,all}-{1-4,all} OC-12 <--> b-1-{1-2} T1EXT ent-crs-vt1:m-1-1-1,b-1-2, b-2-{1-2,all} cct=locked,ring={m1,m2}...

  • Page 393: U Oliu Circuit Pack

    363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning Manual Cross-Connection Procedure The following steps should be used to provision FiberReach systems for manual cross-connections: All cross-connections entered by the user are "manual" connections and must be deleted by the user to change service. All commands to change signal routings (enter or delete) may be service affecting.

  • Page 394: Example Oc-1 Ring Configuration Cross-Connections

    363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning DDM-2000 OC-3 Node 1 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 Ring 1 Ring 2 FN-A FN-B FN-C a-2-3 to m-1-2-3 where: a-2-3 = address of DS1 port 3, circuit pack 2 in group A m-1-2-3 = address of STS #1, VTG #2, VT #3 OC-1 RING DDM-2000 FiberReach...
  • Page 395 363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning In Figure 8-1, the example configuration is a ring network with two ring fibers and six nodes. Ring 1 carries ring traffic in the clockwise direction while Ring 2 carries ring traffic in the counterclockwise direction. In the example configuration, Node 1 is a DDM-2000 OC-3 shelf equipped with 27-type OLIU circuit packs in the Main slots, MXRVOs in Function Unit A, and DS1 or DS1PM circuit packs in the Low- Speed Group A slots.
  • Page 396 363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning Note that this same configuration could be set up using the second OC-1 interface on the 27G-U OLIUs in the main slots of the DDM-2000 OC-3 shelf at Node 1. To do this using the same VT1.5 timeslot on the OC-1 ring, replace the VT1.5 address m-1-2-3 with m-2-2-3 in Step 2;...

  • Page 397: Example Single-Homed Path-Switched Ring Configuration Cross-Connections

    363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning MAIN 2 MAIN 1 OLIU OLIU Ring 2 Ring 1 FN-A FN-B FN-C DS1s OC-3 RING MAIN 1 MAIN 2 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 OLIU OLIU OLIU OLIU FN-A FN-B FN-C FN-A FN-B FN-C OC-1 OC-1 OC-1 RING FIBERREACH MAIN 1...
  • Page 398 363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning 2000 nodes of an OC-3 ring, providing "ring-on-ring" architecture. Each OC-1 ring so supported occupies up to 28 VT1.5 time slots on the OC-3 ring. When single- homing is used, the OC-3 system passes the VT1.5 time slots between the OC-1 interfaces and OC-3 interfaces without terminating them or performing any path protection switching on them.
  • Page 399 363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning Example Cross-Connections To establish the end-to-end DS1 circuit from the CO to the DDM-2000 FiberReach wideband shelf as shown in Figure 8-2, enter a cross-connection at each node as follows: At RT1, RT2, and RT4: ent-crs-vt1:m-1-2-3,m-1-2-3:cct=twoway; The VT signal passes through these sites on the OC-3 ring, so two-way cross-connections with identical addresses are provisioned here.

  • Page 400: Example Dual-Homed Path-Switched Ring Configuration Cross-Connections

    363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning Dual-Homed Path-Switched Ring Example Dual-homing offers even more survivability than a single-homed network, as even the catastrophic failure of a host node can be protected. Figure 8-3 shows an example of a dual-homed OC-1 extension from two remote nodes on an OC-3 access ring.
  • Page 401 363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning Path protection switching is employed for dual-homed applications, just like in single-homed applications. That is, path switching is supplied by the remote DDM- 2000 FiberReach nodes and the DDM-2000 OC-3 systems in the wire center. However, the OC-3 host node configuration is different than single homing. Since an OC-3 host node terminates only one leg of the OC-1 extension, it employs a 0x1 low-speed interface to the OC-1 ring extension.

  • Page 402: Example Of Oc-1 Ring Pass-Through Using

    363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning OC-1 Ring Pass-Through Example In Figure 8-4, the OC-3 Node Host is equipped with a 22-type OLIU in the Main OLIU circuit packs in Function Units B1 and B2. Both FiberReach nodes are equipped with 26G2-U OLIUs in Main and DS1 or DS1PM circuit packs in the low speed slots.
  • Page 403 363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning Example Cross-Connections For example, to establish the end-to-end DS1 circuit that is passed through the OC-3 subsystem Host without using bandwidth on the OC-3 ring, the following cross-connects need to be established: At the node Host, enter the following cross-connection: ent-crs-vt1:b-1-2-4,b-1-2-4:cct=twoway;...

  • Page 404: Example Of An Oc-1 Ring Hairpin Routing, Single-Homed Configuration

    363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning OC-1 Ring Hairpin Routing, Single-Homed Example In Figure 8-5, Node Host is a DDM-2000 OC-3 shelf equipped with 27-type OLIU circuit packs in Function Unit A slots, and 22-type OLIU circuit packs in the Main slots. Node RT-B is a DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer with 26G2-type OLIU circuit packs in Main and DS1 or DS1PM circuit packs in the Low-Speed Group A slots, and it is included in the inner OC-1 ring.
  • Page 405 363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning Both rotations of each of the two OC-1 rings terminate on a pair of 27G2-U OLIUs placed in the Function Unit A. More specifically, the inner OC-1 ring terminates on the OC-1 #1 ports of the 27G2-U OLIUs, and the outer OC-1 ring terminates on the OC-1 #2 ports of the 27G2-U OLIUs.

  • Page 406: Example Of Oc-1 Ring Hairpin Routing, Dual-Homed Configuration

    363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning OC-1 Ring Hairpin Routing, Dual-Homed Example In Figure 8-6, Node X is a DDM-2000 OC-3 shelf equipped with a 27-type OLIU circuit pack in Function Unit A slot 1, and 22-type OLIU circuit packs in the Main slots. Node Y is also a DDM-2000 OC-3 shelf equipped with a 27-type OLIU circuit pack in Function Unit A slot 2 and Function Unit C slot 2.
  • Page 407 363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning In this Dual Homed configuration, only one rotation of each of the two OC-1 rings terminates on a single OC-3 shelf. More specifically, one rotation of the inner OC-1 ring terminates on the OC-1 #1 port of the 27G2-U OLIU placed in Function Unit A-1 of OC-3 Node X, and the corresponding rotation of the outer OC-1 ring terminates on the OC-1 #2 port of the 27G2-U OLIU placed in Function Unit A-1 of OC-3 Node X as well.

  • Page 408: Example Of Hairpin Local Drop Routing Configuration

    363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning Hairpin Local Drop Routing Example In Figure 8-7, Node Host is a DDM-2000 OC-3 shelf equipped with 27-type OLIU circuit packs in Function Unit A slots, 22-type OLIU circuit packs in the Main slots, and MXRVO circuit packs in Function Unit C along with the DS1 or DS1PM circuit packs in the corresponding Low Speed slots group C.
  • Page 409 363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning the Low-Speed slots. Both rotations of the OC-1 ring terminate on a pair of 27G2-U OLIUs placed in Function Unit A of the OC-3 (HOST) node. More specifically, the OC-1 ring terminates on the OC-1 # 2 ports of the 27G2-U OLIUs.
  • Page 410 363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning Cross-Connects for Release 3.1 and Later There are three new types of cross-connections for Release 3.1 The cross- connect types are as follows: Basic DS3 cross-connect DS3 locked cross-connect STS3c cross-connect. 8-52 Issue 3 June 2000...

  • Page 411: Protected Ds3 Services

    363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning Basic DS3 Cross-Connects Beginning with Release 3.1, the Function Unit of the FiberReach Shelf will support the DS3 (BBG4B/BBG4B) circuit pack. This provides the ability of transporting STS-1 services, using the DS3 circuit packs in the Function Unit slots. The cross- connections are done at the STS-1 rate and they are the traditional two-way DS3 cross-connects.
  • Page 412 363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning DS3 Locked Cross-Connects Beginning with Release 3.1, the Function Unit of the FiberReach Shelf will support the DS3 (BBG19) circuit pack. Node 2 Node 1 DDM-2000 OC-3 DDM-2000 OC-3 MAIN 2 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 MAIN 1 Ring 1 Ring 2 STS1E...

  • Page 413: Sts-3C Cross-Connects

    363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning STS-3c Cross-Connects The 0x1 OC-3c optical interface provides the ability of transporting STS-3c services on OC-3c low-speed function units optical interfaces that have been provisioned for 0X1 applications. The internal system’s application default value for OC-3 OLIU (22-type) in the function unit is “0x1”. The CIT ent-crs-sts3c command is used with a two-way cross-connect type option.
  • Page 414 363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning Locked STS-3c (0x1) Broadband Services Beginning with Release 3.1, a FiberReach with Main slots equipped with 28-type OC-3 OLIUs will transport STS-3c 0x1 service through 22-type OLIU OC-3 interfaces in its function group. Beginning with Release 4.0, a FiberReach with Main slots equipped with 29-type OC-12 OLIUs will transport STS-3c 0x1 service through 22-type OLIU OC-3 interfaces in its function group.

  • Page 415: Locked (0X1) Sts-3C - Broadband Services Using Ddm-2000 Oc-12 Multiplexer And Fiberreach Equipped With 29G-Type Olius

    363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning Switch OC-3c OC-3c Fn-x-2 Fn-x-1 OC-12 OC-12 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-3c OC-3c FiberReach FiberReach Switch Switch OC-12 OC-12 OC-3c OC-3c FiberReach OC-12 OC-12 OC-12 OC-3c OC-3c Switch Figure 8-11. Locked (0x1) STS-3c - Broadband Services Using DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer and FiberReach Equipped with 29G-Type OLIUs Issue 3 June 2000...
  • Page 416 363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning Narrowband Administration and Provisioning Narrowband Shelf Administration Software Downloads and Upgrades Software is downloaded into the narrowband shelf DSXBIU from the SLC -2000 Host via the ESF datalink of the DS1 signals that carry the narrowband services. Upgrades to the software are distributed on MS-DOS formatted diskettes that contain the new software and an installation program for installing the software.
  • Page 417 363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning Standard Users: These users have read/write access to system provisioning and maintenance information. Reports-Only Users: These users have read access to system information but no ability to change provisioning or maintenance parameters. Each user has an individual login and password, and each user selects and maintains his/her own password.
  • Page 418 363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning ent-ulsdccl3/l4—Enter Upper Layer Section DCC init-pm—Initialize Performance Monitoring ins-prog—Install Program reset—System Reset set-date—Set network element (NE) Date and time set-ne—Set NE name. Reports-only users can execute the following commands:? (help), logout, rlgn, set-passwd (their own), toggle, and all rtrv commands except, rtrv-lgn, and rtrv-passwd.
  • Page 419 363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning Narrowband Shelf Provisioning NOTE: The narrowband shelf’s common equipment and channel units are not protected. Channel Unit Provisioning The FiberReach narrowband shelf consists of upper and lower subshelves for channel units. Each subshelf can contain up to six channel units each, for a total of 12 channel units per narrowband shelf.
  • Page 420 363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning Figure 8-12 shows a basic configuration with the SLC -2000 HDT hosting an NBS in the octet mode. 12 POTS lines, 10 ISDN lines or 24 DS0s (3 channel units per quadr a nt) DSX-1* Server V-DT V-DT DSX-1*...
  • Page 421 363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning When in the octet mode, each of the four three-slot V-DTs can contain SPQ 494 quad ISDN channel units in the first two slots. The third slot can contain an AUA94 dual ISDN channel. This will allow the V-DT to support a total of ten ISDN lines with each line offering 2B+D service.
  • Page 422 363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning Therefore, a V-DT provisioned for the octet mode can provide ten ISDN lines with each line offering 2B+D service. These ten lines use a total of 22½ of the 24 time slots provided by the DSX-1 feeder. DSX-1 signal 24 timeslots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7...
  • Page 423 363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning For these time slots to be correctly associated with the actual channel unit slots in the MDS assembly, the system uses a virtual channel unit slot concept. You must use the SLC-2000 host digital terminal CIT to cross-connect the real and virtual time slots to the appropriate VRTs.
  • Page 424 363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning Addressing the Slots in the NBS Quadrant . Each quadrant’s slots (both real and virtual) are numbered the same for provisioning (Figure 8-15). For example, the physical slots fed by DSX-1 signal D are numbered 10, 11, and 12 in the NBS.

  • Page 425: Virtual Slot Concept (Octet Mode)

    363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning Virtual slots (seen only b y the HDT softw are) 1 2 3 (4) (5) (6) Virtual slots (seen only b y the HDT softw are) Physical slots 1 2 3 (4) (5) (6) Physical DSX-1 signals slots from Channel...

  • Page 426: Channel Unit Slot Restriction When Using An Spq494 In A Three-Slot V-Dt

    363-206-305 Administration and Provisioning Table 8-14. Channel Unit Slot Restriction When Using an SPQ494 in a Three-Slot V-DT Slot 1 can contain... Slot 2 can contain... Slot 3 can contain... • SPQ 494 • SPQ 494 • AUA94 • AUA94 •...

  • Page 427: Maintenance Description

    Maintenance Description Contents Overview Wideband Shelf Maintenance Single-Ended Maintenance Philosophy Three-Tiered Operations User Panel and Faceplate LEDs (Operations Tier 1) Craft Interface Terminal (CIT) (Operations Tier 2) Operations System (OS) Interface (Operations Tier 3) Miscellaneous Discretes TL1/X.25 Multi-Vendor OI Inservice Upgrades 9-10 9-10 Maintenance Signaling...
  • Page 428 Contents Dual-Homed Ring Interworking Application 9-19 9-19 Status of ACTIVE LED on Rings 9-21 9-21 Low-Speed Equipment Protection 9-21 9-21 Synchronization Reference Protection 9-21 9-21 Loopbacks 9-22 9-22 Tests 9-23 9-23 Transmission Tests 9-23 9-23 Operations Interface Tests 9-23 9-23 Performance Monitoring 9-23 9-23...
  • Page 429 Contents VT1.5 Path Parameters 9-32 9-32 Performance Monitoring Enabling 9-32 9-32 Errored Seconds (ES) 9-32 9-32 Severely Errored Seconds (SES) 9-32 9-32 Unavailable Seconds (UAS) 9-33 9-33 DS1 Path Parameters 9-33 9-33 Performance Monitoring Enabling 9-33 9-33 Errored Seconds (ES) 9-33 9-33 CV-P Coding Violations...
  • Page 430 Contents Path State Report 9-40 9-40 Equipment Report 9-40 9-40 Network Map Reports 9-40 9-40 9-iv Issue 3 June 2000...

  • Page 431: Maintenance Description

    Maintenance Description Overview This chapter outlines the various features available to the user to maintain and monitor the DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer. Specific trouble clearing and maintenance procedures are provided in the operation and maintenance (TOP) section of this manual. Wideband Shelf Maintenance Single-Ended Maintenance Philosophy A single-ended maintenance philosophy was originally incorporated in the design of the DDM-2000 Multiplexers as part of their optimization for operation in the...

  • Page 432: Fiberreach Wideband Shelf Single-Ended Operations Philosophy

    OI among multi-vendor NEs is covered later in this chapter. DDM-2000 FiberReach supports Lucent Technologies 2000 Product Family OI with DDM-2000 OC-3 and OC-12, SLC-2000 and FT-2000, and supports multi-vendor OI in subnetworks with other vendor NEs such as Tellabs TITAN 5500.

  • Page 433: Three-Tiered Operations

    363-206-305 Maintenance Description Three-Tiered Operations Figure 9-2 shows the three-tiered operation procedures for the DDM-2000 Multiplexers, including DDM-2000 FiberReach wideband shelves. The DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer operation procedures are built on three levels of system information and control, spanning operations needs from summary-level status to detailed reporting.
  • Page 434 363-206-305 Maintenance Description User Panel and Faceplate LEDs (Operations Tier 1) Office alarms are provided by a set of discrete relays that control office audible and visual alarms. Separate relays handle critical (CR), major (MJ), and minor (MN) alarms, although the CR and MJ alarms can be wire ORed to the office major, if desired.
  • Page 435 363-206-305 Maintenance Description and synchronization circuit packs, a flashing FAULT LED shows that an incoming signal to that circuit pack has failed. The green ACTIVE LED shows the current protection switching states of the 1x1 protected circuit packs. Craft Interface Terminal (CIT) (Operations Tier 2) The second operations tier provides access to DDM-2000 operations from a CIT over an EIA-232-D interface.
  • Page 436 X.25 link can be used to provide remote access between users and DDM-2000 via a packet data network. The remote user could be an OS or a user at a terminal. Lucent Technologies is involved in an active OSMINE process to ensure compatibility of DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexers with Telcordia Technologies OSs.
  • Page 437 363-206-305 Maintenance Description performance monitoring with OSs such as Telcordia Technologies's Network Monitoring and Analysis (NMA). The DDM-2000 supports service provisioning with memory administration OSs such as Lucent’s ITM SNC or Telcordia Technologies's OPS/INE. (FiberReach 4.0 will be supported by TEMS.) The DDM-2000 also supports remote recovery and control functions, installation provisioning, and security over the TL1/X.25 link.
  • Page 438 363-206-305 Maintenance Description DDM-2000 FiberReach is developed to be compatible with any other-vendor NEs that also support TARP , OSI, and TL1/X.25 as specified in Telcordia Technologies GR-253. In addition, DDM-2000’s TARP Manual Adjacency feature enables DDM- 2000 to operate in networks that include CMISE-based NEs which may not support TARP propagation.
  • Page 439 Remote Craft Interface Terminal (CIT) login Remote software download and copy Remote NE-to-NE automatic time/date synchronization at start-up. For more information about DDM-2000 FiberReach Release 3.0 OI, refer to 824- 102-144, Lucent Technologies 2000 Product Family Multi-Vendor Operations Interworking Guide. Issue 3 June 2000...
  • Page 440 363-206-305 Maintenance Description Inservice Upgrades All DDM-2000 FiberReach software releases support upgrades to future software releases. Maintenance Signaling The DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer provides maintenance signaling compliant with the SONET standard (ANSI* T1.105). The DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer generates and detects the following alarm indication signals (AISs), which notify downstream equipment that a failure has been detected and alarmed by some upstream equipment: SONET line AIS...

  • Page 441: Example Of Maintenance Signals As A Result Of

    363-206-305 Maintenance Description transmission except for OC-1 line AIS; maintenance signaling is in response to unprotected failures. DDM-2000 OC-3 CO DDM-2000 FiberReach System Incoming OC-1 Failure - LOS - LOF - LINE or Path AIS OLIU - LOP OLIU OLIU - STS Sig.

  • Page 442: Maintenance Signaling - Vt Ring Application

    363-206-305 Maintenance Description Figure 9-4 shows an example of the maintenance signals used by the DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer in a VT path-switched ring application. Line AIS VT-Path Yellow* VT-Path AIS † Ring 1 DDM-2000 OC-N OC-N Ring 2 STS-Path Yellow VT-Path Yellow* Line FERF DS1AIS*...
  • Page 443 363-206-305 Maintenance Description Fault Detection, Isolation, and Reporting Detection The DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer continuously monitors all circuit packs and incoming signals for faults. Incoming SONET signals are monitored for loss of signal (LOS), loss of frame (LOF), loss of pointer (LOP), and bit error ratio (BER) thresholds, and for the maintenance signals described in the preceding pages.
  • Page 444 363-206-305 Maintenance Description until a fault condition has been clear for at least as long as the alarm clear delay. Incoming signal failure conditions, AIS, and FERF signals are subject to the provisionable holdoff delay and a fixed 15-second clear delay. Yellow signals are not subject to holdoff or clear delays.
  • Page 445 363-206-305 Maintenance Description DDM-2000 Primary Ring Secondary Ring DDM-2000 DDM-2000 DDM-2000 Figure 9-5. Two-Fiber Unidirectional Ring The signal that enters the ring is protected on a SONET path basis as switching is performed independently for each path. Because of the ring's unidirectional operation, time slots must be reserved all the way around the ring for all ring traffic, limiting the capacity of the ring to the OC-N line rate.

  • Page 446: Path Protection Switching

    363-206-305 Maintenance Description AC CA AC CA Node A Node A Node D Node B Node D Node B Node C Node C SWITCH MADE AC CA AC CA (a.) Normal Operation (b.) Path Failure Figure 9-6. Path Protection Switching The user can set STS-1 and VT1.5 signal degrade thresholds using the set-sts1, set-vt1, rtrv-sts1, and rtrv-vt1 commands at a drop node on a protected ring.
  • Page 447 363-206-305 Maintenance Description OC-3/OC-1 Ring Interworking The DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexers support both dual-homed and single-homed FiberReach ring interworking applications to provide end-to-end protection from loss of service on traffic traveling over interconnected rings. The dual-homed configuration provides two points (nodes) of interconnection between the OC-3 Multiplexer ring and the FiberReach OC-1 ring to insure a continuation of service between rings, should one interconnecting node fail.

  • Page 448: Single-Homed Ring Interworking Application

    363-206-305 Maintenance Description Single-Homed Interworking Application Figure 9-7 shows a single-homed FiberReach configuration. A single DDM-2000 OC-3 shelf provides the point of interconnection between the two rings. On the OC-3 shelf, traffic from one ring is cross-connected through a 0x1 interface to one direction on the other ring.
  • Page 449 363-206-305 Maintenance Description Dual-Homed Ring Interworking Application Figure 9-8 shows a dual-homed FiberReach configuration. This application requires two DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexers to provide redundant points of interconnection between the FiberReach and the DDM-2000 OC-3 ring. The same 0x1 interface is used as for the single-homed application. However, for the dual-homing application, only one 27-type OLIU is required in the DDM-2000 OC-3 function unit to interface one side of the FiberReach ring.

  • Page 450: Dual-Homed Ring Interworking Application

    363-206-305 Maintenance Description Ring Ring Ring Ring Ring Ring Ring Ring Main -2 Main -2 Main -1 Main -1 27G-U 27G-U DDM-2000 DDM-2000 OLIUS OLIU OC-3 Shelf OC-3 Shelf FN ( )-1 FN ( )-2 FN ( )-2 FN ( )-1 OC-1 OC-1 Main-1...
  • Page 451 363-206-305 Maintenance Description Status of ACTIVE LED on Rings In all ring applications, ACTIVE LEDs on each Main OLIU are always lighted because it is not known if a signal on that OLIU is currently being selected by a far-end network element. Low-Speed Equipment Protection NOTE: The protection module is determined by protection modules that are...
  • Page 452 363-206-305 Maintenance Description the OC-1/OC-3/OC-12 transport overhead bytes. If the quality is not adequate, the system will switch to holdover until manually switched to a good reference. Automatic synchronization reconfiguration is always enabled; thus the system will automatically select the highest quality reference. See "Synchronization Messaging"...
  • Page 453 363-206-305 Maintenance Description Tests Transmission Tests Technicians can use the DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer internal testing capabilities for installation and manual troubleshooting. DS1 and DS3 test signal generators and detectors are integrated in the system, eliminating the need for external test equipment to do transmission testing. The DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer lets technicians test specific signals and system components.

  • Page 454: Ds1/Ds3 Line And Path And Ds3 Path Performance Monitoring (Pm)

    363-206-305 Maintenance Description with a particular path can be correlated, and the likely source of the degradation can be identified. Figure 9-9 shows DS1/DS3 line and path performance monitoring. DS1*/DS3 Line, Path DS3 Path DSX-1* DDM-2000 OC-3/OC-12 DSX-3 OC-3/OC-12 * OC-3 Shelves Only. Figure 9-9.
  • Page 455 363-206-305 Maintenance Description — DS1 — DS1 near-end path is monitored for SF framing and both near-end and far-end paths are monitored for ESF framing. The data is displayed in ES-P , SES-P , and UAS-P categories. CV-P is also displayed.
  • Page 456 363-206-305 Maintenance Description DS1 PATH DS1 PATH PERFORMANCE PERFORMANCE POINT B POINT C MONITOR MONITOR DDM-2000 DDM-2000 Performance Performance Report Report OC-1 DSX-1 DSX-1 Performance Performance Report Report POINT A Network POINT Z Legend: CSU - Channel Service Unit PRM - Performance Report Message Figure 9-10.
  • Page 457 363-206-305 Maintenance Description Additionally, each DS1PM circuit pack measures the near-end performance of the incoming DS1, allowing the service provider to determine if a good DS1 signal was received from the customer before transporting it through the network. This information can then aid in sectionalizing any reported performance problems. The DS1PM circuit pack can also provide this same near-end information for superframe (SF) formatted (sometimes known as "D4 framing") DS1 services, but complete end-to-end performance verification is limited due to the lack of the PRM...
  • Page 458 363-206-305 Maintenance Description C-Bit When the DS3 path PM C-bit option is selected, both near-end and far-end (far- end block errors — FEBE) PM data are monitored and displayed. The system provides counts of DS3 C-bit parity coding violations (CV-P), ES-P , SES-P , and UAS-P incoming from both the DSX-3 and the fiber.
  • Page 459 363-206-305 Maintenance Description Severely Errored Frame Seconds (SEFS) This parameter counts the number of seconds during which an out-of-frame, loss- of-signal, or OLIU circuit pack failure occurred. SEFSs are counted and thresholded independently for each OC-1/OC-3/OC-12 interface. OC-1/OC-3/OC-12 Line Parameters Performance Monitoring Enabling Collection of line parameters for OC-1/OC-3/OC-12 interfaces is initiated when a slot is equipped with an OLIU circuit pack.
  • Page 460 363-206-305 Maintenance Description Severely Errored Seconds (SES) A severely errored second is a second in which 12 or more for OC-1, or 32 or more for OC-3, or 124 or more for OC-12, B2 parity violations are detected or one in which a loss of signal, loss of frame or line AIS occurs.
  • Page 461 363-206-305 Maintenance Description STS-1 Path Parameters Performance Monitoring Enabling STS-1 path performance monitoring is initiated only when the first VT1.5 cross- connection associated with that STS-1 signal is made and the VT channel is in the IS state. Parameters continue to be available in reports and generate appropriate threshold crossing alerts until the last VT1.5 cross-connection is deleted.
  • Page 462 363-206-305 Maintenance Description STS signal failure. If there is an unprotected STS-1 path terminating equipment (OLIU) failure, unavailable seconds are counted from within 1 second of circuit pack failure to within 1 second of circuit pack recovery. VT1.5 Path Parameters Performance Monitoring Enabling VT1.5 monitoring is initiated when the associated VT1.5 or STS-1 cross- connection is made to a DS1 or DS1PM circuit pack.
  • Page 463 363-206-305 Maintenance Description Unavailable Seconds (UAS) A VT1.5 path is considered "unavailable" from the beginning of X consecutive severely errored seconds until the beginning of Y consecutive seconds, none of which is severely errored. X is equal to 10 seconds or, in the case of a failure, the VT signal failure.
  • Page 464 363-206-305 Maintenance Description Severely Errored Second (SES) For the DS1 SF format, a "severely errored second" is a second in which eight or more FEs are detected, or an OOF, or DS1 AIS is detected. For the DS1 ESF format, a near-end severely errored second is a second in which 320 or more CRC-6 violations, or a DS1 AIS, or DS1 OOF are detected.

  • Page 465: Ds3 Performance Monitoring Enabling

    363-206-305 Maintenance Description Table 9-1. DS3 Performance Monitoring Enabling Mode DS3 Port State IS (In Service) AUTO NMON (Not Monitored) DS3 Path CV-P Coding Violations CV-P coding violations are a count of the number of P-bit, adjusted F&M bit, or near-end and far-end C-bit parity errors in the DS3 signal received from the fiber and the DSX-3.

  • Page 466: Ds3 Performance Monitoring (Pm) Modes

    363-206-305 Maintenance Description until the beginning of Y consecutive seconds, none of which is severely errored. X is equal to 10 seconds or, in the case of a failure, the DS3 signal failure. Y is equal to 10 seconds of no SES or DS3 signal failures. If there is an unprotected DS3 circuit pack failure, UAS are counted from within 1 second of circuit pack failure to within 1 second of circuit pack recovery.
  • Page 467 363-206-305 Maintenance Description ES-L Errored Seconds This parameter is a count of seconds containing one or more BPVs, or one or more LOS (from the DSX-3) defects. SES-L Severely Errored Seconds This parameter is a count of seconds during which BPVs exceed 44 or one or more LOS defects occur.
  • Page 468 363-206-305 Maintenance Description parameter are provisionable, via the CIT, on a per shelf basis. Therefore, if values other than the defaults are to be used, only one value needs to be set for each parameter. Generation of TCAs can be disabled independently for each performance parameter.
  • Page 469 363-206-305 Maintenance Description Database Change Transmission to OS All provisioning changes are automatically reported to the OS over the TL1 interface using REPT DBCHG autonomous messages. Performance Monitoring Reports TCA Summary Report The TCA summary report lists the sum of the number of threshold crossings within the last 8 hours for quarter-hour thresholds and the number of threshold- crossings for the current day and current quarter hour.
  • Page 470 363-206-305 Maintenance Description monitored. This report also includes the protection switching state ("active" or "standby") and protection switching priority of all protected lines and equipment in the system. See the rtrv-state-(t1, sts1, vt1) command in Chapter 11, "Commands and Reports." Path State Report This report lists each VT1.5 active and standby path in a path switched ring configuration.

  • Page 471: Technical Specifications

    Technical Specifications Contents Overview 10-1 10-1 DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer Wideband Shelf Specifications 10-1 10-1 External Transmission Interfaces 10-1 10-1 Electrical Interfaces 10-2 10-2 DS1 Low-Speed (BBF1B) 10-2 10-2 DS1PM Low-Speed (BBF3/BBF3B) 10-3 10-3 DS3 Low-Speed (BBG4/BBG4B) 10-5 10-5 DS3 Data Services Interface (BBG19) 10-7 10-7 T1 Carrier Low-Speed (BBF6 T1EXT)
  • Page 472 Contents SONET Overhead Bytes 10-44 10-44 Performance 10-44 10-44 Wander/Jitter 10-44 10-44 Signal Performance 10-44 10-44 Protection Switching 10-45 10-45 Transient Performance 10-46 10-46 Delay 10-46 10-46 Performance Monitoring 10-47 10-47 Signaling Mode 10-49 10-49 Digital Data Performance 10-49 10-49 Operations Interfaces 10-49 10-49...
  • Page 473 Contents Shelf Fuses 10-56 10-56 Power Dissipation 10-56 10-56 DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer Reliability 10-59 10-59 Summary 10-59 10-59 Transmission Availability 10-59 10-59 Operation System Interface Availability 10-60 10-60 Optical Module Maintenance Objective 10-60 10-60 Infant Mortality 10-60 10-60 DDM-2000 FiberReach System Reliability Predictions 10-61 10-61 DDM-2000 Narrowband Shelf Specifications...
  • Page 474 Contents 10-iv Issue 3 June 2000...

  • Page 475: Technical Specifications

    Technical Specifications Overview This section contains the technical specifications for Releases 2.2, 3.0, 3.1, and 4.0 of the DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer. DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer Wideband Shelf Specifications External Transmission Interfaces The DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer transmission interfaces adhere to industry standards as listed in Table 10-1. Table 10-1.
  • Page 476 363-206-305 Technical Specifications Electrical Interfaces The DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer supports a DS1, DS1PM, DS3, and T1 Carrier low-speed interfaces, and DS3 Data Services and HDSL interfaces. DS1 Low-Speed (BBF1B) Electrical Specification The DS1 low-speed interface transmits and receives a standard electrical DS1 signal as specified in ANSI T1.102-1993, Section 2 (1.544 Mb/s nominal rate, DSX-1 interconnect specification).
  • Page 477 363-206-305 Technical Specifications DS1PM Low-Speed (BBF3/BBF3B) Electrical Specification The DS1PM low-speed interface transmits and receives a standard electrical DS1 signal as specified in ANSI T1.102-1993, Section 2 (1.544 Mb/s nominal rate, DSX-1 interconnect specification). Line coding is provisionable to AMI with or without B8ZS. Line buildout is provisionable as follows: —...
  • Page 478 363-206-305 Technical Specifications Far-End DS1 Path Parameters: — SES, and UAS for ESF framed signals using performance reportant messages (PRM) incoming from the DSX-1. DS1 Line Parameters: — ES-L Errored Seconds (Release 3.0 and later). 10-4 Issue 3 June 2000...
  • Page 479 363-206-305 Technical Specifications DS3 Low-Speed (BBG4/BBG4B) Electrical Specification The low-speed DS3 interface transmits/receives a standard electrical DS3 signal as specified in ANSI T1.102-1993, Section 5 (44.736 Mb/s rate, DSX-3 interconnect specification, B3ZS encoding). However, the signal does not have to contain a standard DS3 frame. LBO is provisionable as follows: —...

  • Page 480: Enhanced Ds3 Performance Monitoring Modes

    363-206-305 Technical Specifications Enhanced DS3 PM (See Table 10-3 and Table 10-23.) — CV-P Coding Violations These errors are counted and thresholded independently for all DS3 interfaces provisioned in VM or VMR mode. When the F&M bit or C-bit option (C-bit is OC-3 Multiplexer Release 8.0 and later releases) is selected, NEs could be provisioned in VMR or VM mode.
  • Page 481 363-206-305 Technical Specifications DS3 Data Services Interface (BBG19) Electrical Specification The low-speed DS3 interface transmits and receives a standard electrical DS3 signal as specified in ANSI T1.102-1993, Section 5 (44.736 Mb/s rate, DSX-3 interconnect specification, bipolar 3-zero substitution [B3ZS] encoding). However, the signal does not have to contain a standard DS3 frame.
  • Page 482 — The T1EXT does not include any components for primary or secondary lightning protection/surge protection or power cross. Primary protection (Lucent Technologies' protector unit 4B3EW or equivalent) is always required for tip/ring lines exposed to lightning and surges either in cabinet or as lines enter a building. An external...

  • Page 483: T1Ext Span Powering

    363-206-305 Technical Specifications Lightning Looping Type Protection Repeater or CSU DDM-2000 T1 EXT Loop 1 60 MA Looping Type -48V Repeater or CSU Notes: Loop 2 1. The arrow indicates direction of simplex current flow when both loops are equipped with looping type repeater or CSU 2.
  • Page 484 363-206-305 Technical Specifications Format Specification The T1EXT BBF6 low-speed interface can be provisioned for the following formats: clear channel (default), SF as specified in ANSI T1.403-1989, or ESF as specified in ANSI T1.403-1989. In the case of SF or ESF format selections, T1EXT performance information is collected by monitoring the associated T1EXT framing format.
  • Page 485 363-206-305 Technical Specifications HDSL Interface (BBF8) Electrical Specification The High Bit-rate Digital Subscriber Line (HDSL) circuit pack transmits and receives a 2B1Q signal as specified in Telcordia Technologies TA-NWT-001210. — Data is scrambled/descrambled with a pseudo-random sequence. — Line buildout is automatically provisioned. —...
  • Page 486 363-206-305 Technical Specifications — PM features listed above — Local and remote loopbacks — Programmable loopback time-out — Alarm status. Described in PairGain Specifications, OEM-HMO-SW1-02 Optical Interfaces The DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer supports either an OC-1 or OC-3 high- speed interface that is synchronous optical network (SONET) compliant. When equipped with the 26G2-U OLIU, the companion OLIU at the host node is the 27G-U OLIU.
  • Page 487 363-206-305 Technical Specifications Intra-office (IS-3) OC-3 Rate Interface (22D-U OLIUs) Optical Specification The 22D-U OLIUs are short-reach optical interfaces used to interconnect between the DDM-2000 OC-3 and OC-12 Multiplexers. The nominal line rate is 155.520 Mb/s. The LED transmitter supplies an NRZ-coded signal. Table 10-4, Table 10-5, and Table 10-8 provide detailed specifications and link budget information for the 22D-U OLIUs.
  • Page 488 363-206-305 Technical Specifications Table 10-4 lists the 22D-U OLIU specifications. Table 10-4. 22D-U OLIU Specifications System Information: 22D-U Terminal Equipment Identification 22D-U OLIU Optical Line Rate (Mb/s) 155.520 Mb/s Optical Line Coding Scrambled NRZ Optical Wavelength 1310 nm Performance Not applicable Transmitter Information: Optical Device Temperature Controller No TEC...
  • Page 489 363-206-305 Technical Specifications Table 10-5. 22D-U OLIU Link Budgets (Note 1) Parameter 22D-U Minimum Wavelength (λ 1270/1260* nm Tmin Maximum Wavelength (λ 1380 nm Tmax Spectral Width (δ λ † 170 nm −14.0 dBm Maximum Transmitter Power (P Tmax Minimum Transmitter Power (P -18.8/-21.8 dBm Tmin −14.0 dBm...
  • Page 490 363-206-305 Technical Specifications § Optical path penalty includes effects of dispersion, reflection, and jitter that occur on the optical path. ¶ One connector (0.75 dB) on each end is assumed to connect station cable to outside plant. ∗∗ Unallocated margin, or safety margin, is typically specified from 0 dB to 3 dB. ††...
  • Page 491 363-206-305 Technical Specifications Intermediate Reach OC-3 Interface (22F/22F-U/ 22F2-U OLIU) Optical Specification The 22F/22F-U/22F2-U OLIU photonics meet or exceed SONET intermediate reach specifications (TR 253-IR-1 MLM category). The MLM laser transmitter supplies an NRZ-coded signal. The PINFET receiver allows direct optical loopback without the use of an external attenuator. The 22F/22F-U/22F2-U OLIU intermediate reach OC-3 interface supports span lengths up to 33 km, assuming 0.45 dB/km single-mode fiber and the span engineering rules outlined in Table 10-7.
  • Page 492 363-206-305 Technical Specifications Long Reach OC-3 Interface (22G-U/22G2-U/ 22G3-U/22G4-U OLIU) Optical Specification The multilongitudinal mode (MLM ) laser transmitter supplies an NRZ- coded signal. For direct optical loopbacks, at least 7.0 dB (use 10 dB attenuator, see Table 10-21) of attenuation is needed for the 22G-U. No attenuation is needed for the 22G2-U/22G3-U/22G4-U.
  • Page 493 363-206-305 Technical Specifications Table 10-6 lists the 22F-type and 22G-type OLIU specifications. Table 10-6. 22F-Type and 22G-Type OLIU Specifications System Information: 22F-Type 22G-U/22G2-U 22G3-U/22G4-U Terminal Equipment Identification 22F/22F-U/22F2-U OLIU 22G-U/22G2-U OLIU 22G3-U OLIU Optical Line Rate (Mb/s) 155.520 Mb/s 155.520 Mb/s 155.520 Mb/s Optical Line Coding Scrambled NRZ...
  • Page 494 363-206-305 Technical Specifications Table 10-7. 22F-Type and 22G-Type OLIU Link Budgets 22F/22F-U/ 22G-U 22G2-U 22G3-U 22G4-U Parameter 22F2-U Minimum Wavelength (λ 1260 nm 1272 nm 1272 nm 1280 nm 1280 nm Tmin Maximum Wavelength (λ 1360 nm 1350 nm 1350 nm 1335 nm 1335 nm Tmax...
  • Page 495 363-206-305 Technical Specifications ∗∗ Unallocated margin, or safety margin, is typically specified from 0 dB to 3 dB. ‡‡ Budget available for both station and transmission cable and splices. §§ Attenuation and dispersion can be the limiting factors in span length. For OC-3 single-mode fiber systems, dispersion is not a factor and all applications are attenuation limited.
  • Page 496 363-206-305 Technical Specifications If planning a new fiber installation, the values at the end of the table, given for a number of commercially available fiber bandwidth-distance products, can be used. Fiber distances are calculated using the 120 MHz exit bandwidth limit; however, actual exit bandwidths may be higher for these distances due to the existence of splices.

  • Page 497: Optical System Interfaces (Points S And R)

    363-206-305 Technical Specifications Station Cable Outside Plant Cable Station Cable Point S Point R Fiber Fiber OLIU OLIU Crossconnect Crossconnect Transmitter Receiver (Tx) (Rx) Transmitter/Connector Receiver/Connector Assembly Assembly Connections Figure 10-2. Optical System Interfaces (Points S and R) Issue 3 June 2000 10-23...
  • Page 498 363-206-305 Technical Specifications Table 10-9 lists the 26G2-U OLIU specifications. Table 10-9. 26-Type OLIU Specifications System Information: 26-Type Terminal Equipment Identification 26-type OLIU Optical Line Rate (Mb/s) 51.84 Mb/s Optical Line Coding Scrambled NRZ Optical Wavelength 1310 nm Performance Not applicable Transmitter Information: Optical Device Temperature No TEC...
  • Page 499 363-206-305 Technical Specifications Table 10-10 and Table 10-11 list the link budgets for the 26-type OLIU circuit packs. Table 10-10. 26-Type OLIU Link Budgets Parameter 26-Type Minimum Wavelength (λ 1272 nm Tmin Maximum Wavelength (λ 1350 nm Tmax Spectral Width (δ λ 3.0 nm ) ∗...
  • Page 500 363-206-305 Technical Specifications Table 10-11. 26-Type OLIU Link Budgets - Multimode Operation Fiber Bandwidth Maximum Span Length (km) 1000 MHz-km 19.8 800 MHz-km 19.8 500 MHz-km 19.8 300 MHz-km 13.6 Note: The maximum Link Budget loss is 19.8 dB. Multimode fiber operation requires a minimum exit bandwidth of 44 MHz to ensure that dispersion loss is kept below acceptable levels.
  • Page 501 363-206-305 Technical Specifications Long Reach OC-3 Interface (28G-U/28G2-U OLIU)1 0 Optical Specification The multilongitudinal mode laser transmitter supplies a non-return to zero (NRZ)-coded signal. For direct optical loopbacks, no attenuations are needed for the 28-type. The 28-type OLIU long reach OC-3 interface supports span lengths up to 51km, assuming 0.45 dB/km single-mode fiber and the span engineering rules outlined in Table 10-13.
  • Page 502 363-206-305 Technical Specifications Table 10-12. 28-Type OLIU Specifications System Information: 28-Type Terminal Equipment Identification 28-type OLIU Optical Line Rate (Mb/s) 155.520 Mb/s Optical Line Coding Scrambled NRZ Optical Wavelength 1280-1335 nm Performance Not applicable Transmitter Information: Optical Device Temperature None Controller FDA Classification Class I...
  • Page 503 363-206-305 Technical Specifications Table 10-13 lists the link budgets for the 28-type OLIU. Table 10-13. 28-Type OLIU Link Budgets. Parameter 28-Type Minimum Wavelength (λ 1280 nm Tmin Maximum Wavelength (λ 1335 nm Tmax Spectral Width (δ λ 4.0 nm Maximum Transmitter Power (P 0.0 dBm Tmax Minimum Transmitter Power (P...
  • Page 504 363-206-305 Technical Specifications § Attenuation and dispersion can be the limiting factors in span length. For OC- 3 single-mode fiber systems, dispersion is not a factor and all applications are attenuation limited. The limits must be calculated based on both factors and the lesser of the two defines the actual maximum span length.
  • Page 505 363-206-305 Technical Specifications Long Reach OC-12 Interface (29G-U OLIU) Optical Specification The distributed feedback laser supplies an NRZ-coded signal. For direct optical loopbacks, at least 10 dB of optical attenuation is needed for the 29G-U. The 29G-U OLIU long reach OC-12 interface supports span lengths up to 51 km, assuming 0.45 dB/km single-mode fiber (including splices) and the span engineering rules outlined in Table 10-16.
  • Page 506 363-206-305 Technical Specifications Long Reach OC-12 Interface (29H-U OLIU) Optical Specification The distributed feedback laser supplies a NRZ-coded signal. For direct optical loopbacks, at least 10 dB of optical attenuation is needed for the 29H-U. The 29H-U OLIU long reach OC-12 interface supports span lengths up to 96 km, assuming 0.25 dB/km single-mode fiber (including splices) and the span engineering rules outlined in Table 10-16.
  • Page 507 363-206-305 Technical Specifications Table 10-15. 29G-U/29H-U OLIU Specifications System Information: 29G-U 29H-U Terminal Equipment Identification 29G-U OLIU 29H-U OLIU Optical Line Rate (Mb/s) 622.080 Mb/s 622.080 Mb/s Optical Line Coding Scrambled NRZ Scrambled NRZ Optical Wavelength (nm) 1310 nm 1550 nm Performance SONET LR-1 DFB (Long SONET LR-1 DFB (Long...
  • Page 508 363-206-305 Technical Specifications Table 10-16. 29G-U/29H-U OLIU Link Budgets (Notes) Parameter 29G-U 29H-U λ Minimum Wavelength ( 1280 nm 1530 nm Tmin λ Maximum Wavelength ( 1335 nm 1570 nm Tmax δλ Spectral Width ( 1.0 nm 1.0 nm Maximum Transmitter Power +1.9 dBm +2.0 dBm ∗(P...
  • Page 509 363-206-305 Technical Specifications ∗∗ The 29G-U/29H-U requires an external lightguide buildout as part of the connector assembly for loopbacks and for loss budgets less than 10 dB. †† Budget available for both station and transmission cable and splices. ‡‡ Attenuation can be the limiting factors in span length. A rough rule of thumb for attenuation-limited systems operating in the 1310 nm wavelength range is 0.45 dB/km.
  • Page 510 363-206-305 Technical Specifications OC-3 Optical Interface Mixing Mixing different OC-3 rate OLIUs at opposite ends of an optical link is often necessary for technical reasons or for convenience. The following information will aid in planning and engineering optical links having different types of OC-3 rate OLIUs at each end of the fiber.
  • Page 511 363-206-305 Technical Specifications Table 10-18 details the maximum link budgets for each pairing of OC-3 rate OLIUs when operating on single-mode (SM) fiber. These numbers give the maximum attenuation acceptable for proper operation of each transmitter/receiver pair. The link must have no more than this much attenuation either from fiber loss, splice loss, connector loss, external attenuators or a combination of these or the link will not operate properly.
  • Page 512 363-206-305 Technical Specifications Table 10-19 details the maximum link budgets for each pairing of OC-3 rate OLIUs when operating on multimode (MM) fiber. These numbers give the maximum attenuation acceptable for proper operation of each transmitter/receiver pair. The link must have no more than this much attenuation either from fiber loss, splice loss, connector loss, external attenuators or a combination of these or the link will not operate properly.

  • Page 513: Sparing Guidelines

    363-206-305 Technical Specifications Plug-In Maintenance Sparing Guidelines Table 10-20 provides a guideline for determining the number of DDM-2000 FiberReach plug-in spares needed for a given number of plug-ins in the field. The sparing guide serves as an initial estimate and is calculated with the following assumptions: The method for calculating spares follows the procedure described in Telcordia Technologies SR-TSY-000385, Issue 1.
  • Page 514 363-206-305 Technical Specifications Number of Spares Revised Date Plug-In Code (FIT) NS=1 NS=2 NS=3 NS=4 NS=5 NS=6 0.14 0.43 0.82 1.27 1.78 BBF6 (1427) 1024 1586 2223 2872 09/02/1998 BBF8 (5216) 09/02/1998 BBF9 (2037) 1111 1557 2012 08/24/1999 BBF10 (2277) 1393 1800 08/24/1999...
  • Page 515 363-206-305 Technical Specifications Number of Spares Revised Date Plug-In Code (FIT) NS=1 NS=2 NS=3 NS=4 NS=5 NS=6 0.14 0.43 0.82 1.27 1.78 21G3-U (1768) 1280 1794 2318 08/24/1999 22D-U (1959) 1155 1619 2092 08/24/1999 22F (3317) 1236 22F2-U (2033) 1113 1560 2016 09/02/1998...

  • Page 516: Universal Buildout Attenuators

    363-206-305 Technical Specifications Universal Optical Connectors The DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexers provide Lucent's universal optical connector on the OLIUs. This connector is a 2-part connector consisting of a faceplate-mounted block and an optical buildout. The faceplate block optionally supports an ST, SC, or FC-type optical buildout. A 0 dB ST-type connector is shipped as standard with each OLIU except for 22G-Us.
  • Page 517 363-206-305 Technical Specifications Table 10-21. Universal Buildout Attenuators Description Connection Loss (dB) Comcode A2060B SC 5 dB buildout MM-MM 106795271 A2060D SC 10 dB buildout MM-MM 106795289 A2060F SC 15 dB buildout MM-MM 106795297 A2070B ST 5 dB buildout MM-MM 106795313 A2070D ST 10 dB buildout MM-MM...
  • Page 518 363-206-305 Technical Specifications SONET Overhead Bytes The DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer currently uses the K2 byte in the SONET format for synchronization signaling. The reserved V4-byte in the VT1.5 superframe is used for internal fault detection in a DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer. This internal usage of the V4-byte may cause the value of the transmitted V4-byte to vary.
  • Page 519 363-206-305 Technical Specifications Protection Switching Ring Networks Path protection rings feed a SONET payload (STS or VT) from the ring entry point, simultaneously in both rotations of the ring, to the signal's ring exit point. The node that terminates the signal from the ring monitors both ring rotations and is responsible for selecting the signal that has the highest quality based on loss of signal (LOS), path alarm indication signal (AIS), and path bit error rate (BER) performance.
  • Page 520 363-206-305 Technical Specifications Transient Performance Power Loss Restart After system shutdown due to power loss, the system will begin error free transmission within one minute of restoration of power. Transmission Start-Up on Signal Application The system, after having no signal applied for greater than one minute at the DSX-n interface, will begin error free transmission within five seconds of the reapplication of a signal.

  • Page 521: Performance Monitoring Parameters Provisionable Via The Cit

    363-206-305 Technical Specifications Performance Monitoring Table 10-23 shows the provisionable range of the thresholds for monitored parameters and, in brackets, the default thresholds. Thresholding of any parameter(s) can be disabled. Table 10-23. Performance Monitoring Parameters Provisionable via the CIT Parameter Definition Threshold Range [Default] Command Current Quarter...
  • Page 522 363-206-305 Technical Specifications Parameter Definition Threshold Range [Default] Command Current Quarter set- Facility Measure Hour Current Day pmthres- š DS-1 Path ES-P Errored Seconds 1-900[65] 1-65535 [648] š SES-P Severely Errored Seconds 1-63[10] 1-4095 [100] š UAS-P Unavailable Seconds 1-63[10] 1-4095 [10] š...
  • Page 523 363-206-305 Technical Specifications Signaling Mode Loop start signaling with fast forward disconnect is provided with the channel units used in the SLC Series 5 and SLC -2000 systems with the SLC -2000 MSDT feature. Digital Data Performance The AUA52B OCU (office channel unit) dataport is designed to provide end links in DDS.

  • Page 524: Cit Interface Pin Connections

    363-206-305 Technical Specifications Table 10-24. CIT Interface Pin Connections EIA-232-D Pin Front Access CIT (DCE) Pin 2 - Circuit BA Carries data from Transmitted Data terminal to DDM-2000 FiberReach Pin 3 - Circuit BB Carries data from Received Data DDM-2000 FiberReach to terminal Pin 7 - Circuit AB Signal ground Signal Ground...
  • Page 525 363-206-305 Technical Specifications Windows NT available to work with the OC-3 Releases 7.2 and earlier, and 13.0 and later, and OC-12 Releases 7.0 and later, and FiberReach 4.0. Compatible Modems A compatible modem must meet the following minimum requirements: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, or 19,200 baud Full duplex 8 data bits No parity bits...
  • Page 526 363-206-305 Technical Specifications 3.5 inch Floppy Disk drive 8 Megabyte RAM required (12 Megabyte RAM preferred) Hard disk with at least 40 Megabytes of available space Serial port (EIA-232-D) — configured as COM1 or COM2 MS-DOS operating system version 5.0 or later Windows NT or Windows 95 Mouse VGA color monitor...
  • Page 527 363-206-305 Technical Specifications Office Alarms The office alarms interface is a set of discrete relays that controls office audible and visual alarms. Separate relays handle critical, major, and minor alarms. Each contact closure is rated at 1 A, 60 V maximum. The CR and MJ alarms can be wire-ORed.
  • Page 528 Maximum number of NEs per alarm group NOTE: DDM-2000 FiberReach 3.0 or later supports large subnetworks of up to 256 NE. Refer to Lucent Technologies 2000 Product Family Multi-Vendor Operations Interworking Guide, 824-102-144, for additional information. Physical Specifications Wideband Shelf Physical Characteristics Dimensions: 9.65 in.
  • Page 529 363-206-305 Technical Specifications Environmental Specifications Temperature and Humidity A DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer shelf meets Telcordia Technologies Network Equipment Building System (NEBS) requirements for use in central office environments without fans. A heat baffle assembly is required for all applications in a bay frame and for cabinet configurations where thermal environments are specified.
  • Page 530 363-206-305 Technical Specifications Underwriters Laboratories (UL) The DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer is UL listed for restricted access installations in business and customer premises applications installed in accordance with Articles 110-16 and 110-17 of the National Electric Code , ANSI / NFPA Number 70-87. Other installations exempt from the requirements of the National Electric Code may be engineered according to the accepted practices of the local telecommunications utility.

  • Page 531: Power Dissipation - Wideband Shelf

    363-206-305 Technical Specifications Table 10-25. Power Dissipation - Wideband Shelf Power Dissipation with 2 with 2 with 29G-U Configuration 26G2-U 28-Type or 29H-U DDM-2000 FiberReach WBS with 8 BBF3 circuit packs 41 Watts 44 Watts 48 Watts (16 DS1s, 1x1 protected) DDM-2000 FiberReach WBS with 8 BBF3 circuit packs 38 Watts 41 Watts...
  • Page 532 363-206-305 Technical Specifications Power Dissipation with 2 with 2 with 29G-U Configuration 26G2-U 28-Type or 29H-U DDM-2000 FiberReach WBS with 8 BBF6 (T1EXT) — 74 Watts 78 Watts circuit packs (14 T1EXT, 1x7 protected) and 2 BBG19 circuit packs DDM-2000 FiberReach WBS with 3* BBF8 circuit packs —...
  • Page 533 363-206-305 Technical Specifications DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer Reliability Summary This section describes the Telcordia Technologies reliability requirements that apply to the DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer and the calculations used to predict how the DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer meets those standards. The DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer meets all the applicable Telcordia Technologies reliability requirements that cover transmission availability, operation system (OS) availability, optical module maintenance, and infant mortality.
  • Page 534 363-206-305 Technical Specifications the RT environment. Individual circuit pack failure rates used in the model were calculated using the method described in TR-TSY-000332, Issue 4, Reliability Prediction Procedure for Electronic Equipment (RPP) . A summary of the circuit pack failure rates is shown in Table 10-27. Operation System Interface Availability The Telcordia Technologies objective states that the OS outage should be less than 28 minutes per year (50 percent hardware, 50 percent software).

  • Page 535: Fiberreach System Reliability Prediction

    363-206-305 Technical Specifications DDM-2000 FiberReach System Reliability Predictions Table 10-26 and Table 10-27 show the system reliability predictions for the DDM- 2000 FiberReach Multiplexer. Table 10-26. DDM-2000 FiberReach System Reliability Prediction. Telcordia Technologies Environment Criteria (Note 3) Prediction (Note 4) Application (Note 2) Requirement...
  • Page 536 363-206-305 Technical Specifications Telcordia Technologies criteria (Outage Requirements and Objectives) is based on TA-TSY- 000418, Issue 3, Generic Reliability Assurance Requirements for Fiber Optic Transport Systems . Outage is in minutes per year. Mean time to repair is assumed to be two hours for the CO and four hours for RT environments. Not applicable for Releases 3.0 and later.
  • Page 537 363-206-305 Technical Specifications Notes: Calculations are based on Telcordia Technologies RPP Issue 4 data. All KS and Lucent components considered as quality level III. All components evaluated at 40°C ambient and 50 percent electrical stress. FITS is the number of failures per billion hours of operation (10 Issue 3 June 2000 10-63...

  • Page 538: Power Dissipation - Narrowband Shelf

    363-206-305 Technical Specifications DDM-2000 Narrowband Shelf Specifications Physical Specifications Narrowband Shelf Physical Characteristics Dimensions: 9.65 in. H x 8.03 in. W x 11.93 in. D Weight (Max.): 20 lb. (9 kg) Appearance: Coordinated with other equipment in the Lucent 2000 Product Family Power Requirements Shelf Fuses...
  • Page 539 363-206-305 Technical Specifications ∗ When the DDM-2000 FiberReach is configured to include a wideband shelf and a narrowband shelf, this power requirement as well as the power requirement for specific channel units and the appropriate wideband shelf configuration should be added to get the total power requirement. †...

  • Page 540: Transmission Specifications - Vf Channel Units With Fixed Settings

    363-206-305 Technical Specifications Table 10-29. Transmission Specifications - VF Channel Units with Fixed Settings Value (Measured at 25° C) ® Parameter POTS SPOTS Unit Coin 0-1500 Ω 0-1500 Ω Loop Resistance (Beyond CSA Loops the HDT excluding the set Loop Current >...
  • Page 541 363-206-305 Technical Specifications Table 10-29. Transmission Specifications — VF Channel Units with Fixed Settings — Continued Value (Measured at 25° C) ® Parameter POTS SPOTS Unit Coin Intermodulation Distortion A-B (R2) Product: > 43 dB (−13 dBm0 Input) 2A-B (R3) Product: > 44 dB <...

  • Page 542: Transmission Specifications - Multiparty And Fsr Channel Units

    363-206-305 Technical Specifications Table 10-30. Transmission Specifications — Multiparty and FSR Channel Units Value (Measured at 25° C) Parameter Multiparty** 0-1500 Ω 0-900 Ω Loop Resistance (Beyond the HDT excluding the set) ≤ 5 dB over 1004 Hz 1,004 Hz On-Hook Loss On-hook transmission Off-Hook Loss not supported...
  • Page 543 363-206-305 Technical Specifications Table 10-30. Transmission Specifications — Multiparty and FSR Channel Units—Continued Value (Measured at 25° C) Parameter Multiparty** ≥ + 3 dBm0 Overload at COT and HDT 200 Hz, 500 Hz, 1,000 Hz: ≥ 58 dB Longitudinal Balance at the HDT 3,000 Hz: ≥...

  • Page 544: Transmission Specifications - Aua45

    363-206-305 Technical Specifications Table 10-31. Transmission Specifications — AUA45 Dual Ringing Repeater Channel Unit Parameter Value (Measured at 25° C) Loop Design The AUA45 channel unit is not limited to CSA design rules. Maximum cable loss should not exceed 9 dB, split in any proportion between the two end cable links.
  • Page 545 363-206-305 Technical Specifications Table 10-31. Transmission Specifications — AUA45 Dual Ringing Repeater Channel Unit—Continued Parameter Value (Measured at 25° C) 200 Hz, 500 Hz, 1,000 Hz: ≥ 58 dB Longitudinal Balance at the HDT 3,000 Hz: ≥ 53 dB (Minimum)¶ Better than −65 dB (200 Hz to 3,400 Hz) Equal-Level Cross talk * Measured as insertion loss between 900-ohm terminations.

  • Page 546: Transmission Specifications - Vf Channel Units With Adjustable Settings

    363-206-305 Technical Specifications Table 10-32. Transmission Specifications — VF Channel Units with Adjustable Settings ® 2-Wire E SPOTS 4-Wire CUs Parameter CUs(AUA42, AUA43) (AUA41, AUA44, AUA54) Loop Resistance (beyond CSA loops 0-2800 ohms (loop start, HDT, excluding telset) ground-start) 0-5000 ohms (DX) Gain Range (Granularity) −1.0 dB to 6.75 dB...
  • Page 547 363-206-305 Technical Specifications Table 10-32. Transmission Specifications — VF Channel Units with Adjustable Settings—Continued ® 2-Wire E SPOTS 4-Wire CUs Parameter CUs(AUA42, AUA43) (AUA41, AUA44, AUA54) 3,000 Hz 58 dB 58 dB 62 dB −65 dB −65 dB (channel unit) Equal-Level Cross talk, C- −65 dB (interunit cross talk) message weighted between...
  • Page 548 363-206-305 Technical Specifications ® Table 10-33. SPQ 400 Electrical and Transmission Specifications Parameter Value 0 Ω to 900 Ω Loop Resistance (excluding telset) 20 mA (900 Ω loop) to 30 mA (0 Ω loop) Loop Current VF loss, off-hook, between CO and network interface 4 to 8 dB (NIF) at customer location Nominal 1,000-Hz loss, SPQ400 only:...
  • Page 549 363-206-305 Technical Specifications ® Table 10-33. SPQ 400 Electrical and Transmission Specifications — Continued Parameter Value 60-Hz Rejection > 20 dB ≤ −65 dBm0 Cross talk (0-dBm0 input, 200 Hz to 3,400 ≤ 15 counts Impulse noise at a threshold of 47 dBrnCO for 15 minutes Data pulse distortion (PAR) - End-to-end...
  • Page 550 363-206-305 Technical Specifications ® Table 10-34. SPQ 400 Environmental Specifications Temperature Range (Ambient) −40° to 85°C (−40° to 185°F) Operating −40° to 85°C (−40° to 185°F) Storage Relative Humidity, Noncondensing 5% to 95% ® Table 10-35. SPQ 440 Electrical and Transmission Specifications Value Parameter POTS...
  • Page 551 363-206-305 Technical Specifications ® Table 10-35. SPQ 440 Electrical and Transmission Specifications — Continued Parameter Value POTS and Special Services 600 ohms + 2.16 µF Structural Impedance 200 Hz to 1,000 Hz: ≥ 58 dB Minimum longitudinal balance (measured by 3,000 Hz: ≥...
  • Page 552 363-206-305 Technical Specifications ® Table 10-35. SPQ 440 Electrical and Transmission Specifications — Continued Parameter Value < −40 dBm0 at 0 Hz to 4,000 Hz 1,004 Hz to 1020 kHz, 0 dBm0 Signal-to-distortion with input of: 0 dBm0 to −30 dBm0 >...
  • Page 553 363-206-305 Technical Specifications ® Table 10-37. SPQ 909 Electrical and Transmission Specifications Parameter Value 450 Ω DC Supervisory Range (including telset) 0 Ω to 20 Ω Loop Resistance (up to 500 ft. of AWG 22) Loop Current 20 mA to 25 mA Nominal 1,000-Hz VF loss off-hook 4 dB between CO and RT CUs...
  • Page 554 363-206-305 Technical Specifications ® Table 10-37. SPQ 909 Electrical and Transmission Specifications — Continued Parameter Value 600 Ω Output impedance (structural impedance, hybrid impedance) 200 Hz to 1,000 Hz: ≥ 45 dB Minimum longitudinal balance (measured by 3,000 Hz: ≥ 40 dB IEEE Method 455-1985) ≤...
  • Page 555 363-206-305 Technical Specifications ® Table 10-37. SPQ 909 Electrical and Transmission Specifications — Continued Parameter Value < −50 dBm0 System generated tones 0 Hz < f < 16 kHz Gain tracking at 1004 Hz, relative to 0 dBm0: −37 dBm0 to +3 dBm0 ±0.5 dB maximum (±0.25 dB average) −50 dBm0 to −37 dBm0 ±1.5 dB maximum (±0.5 dB average)
  • Page 556 363-206-305 Technical Specifications 10-82 Issue 3 June 2000...
  • Page 557 Commands Reports Contents Overview 11-1 11-1 Command Page Format 11-1 11-1 Input Format 11-2 11-2 Addresses 11-3 11-3 Command Prompt Mode 11-7 11-7 Special Control Characters 11-8 11-8 Paged Reports 11-8 11-8 Confirmation Requests 11-9 11-9 Output Descriptions 11-9 11-9 Alarm Level Prompt...
  • Page 558 Contents INIT-PM Initialize Performance Monitoring 11-74 11-74 INIT-SYS Initialize System 11-75 11-75 INS-PROG Install Program 11-81 11-81 LOGOUT Logout 11-88 11-88 OPR-ACO Operate Alarm Cutoff 11-89 11-89 OPR-LPBK-T1 Operate Loopback 11-90 11-90 OPR-LPBK-T3 Operate Loopback 11-95 11-95 RESET Reset 11-99 11-99 RLGN Remote...
  • Page 559 Contents RTRV-STATE-EQPT Retrieve State Equipment 11-204 11-204 RTRV-STATE-PATH Retrieve State Path 11-208 11-208 RTRV-STATE-STS1 Retrieve State STS1 11-211 11-211 RTRV-STATE-VT1 Retrieve State VT1.5 11-214 11-214 RTRV-STS1 Retrieve STS-1 11-217 11-217 RTRV-SYNC Retrieve Synchronization 11-220 11-220 RTRV-TRACE-STS1 Retrieve Path Trace STS-1 11-226 11-226 RTRV-T1...
  • Page 560 Contents SWITCH-LS Protection Switch Speed 11-356 11-356 SWITCH-PATH-STS1 Switch Path STS-1 11-360 11-360 SWITCH-PATH-VT1 Switch Path VT1.5 11-364 11-364 SWITCH-SYNC Protection Switch Synchronization 11-367 11-367 TEST-ALM Test Office Alarm 11-371 11-371 TEST-LED Test Indicators 11-373 11-373 TEST-SYSCTL Test System Controllers 11-374 11-374 TEST-TRMSN-T1...

  • Page 561: Commands And Reports

    Commands and Reports Overview This chapter describes the command and report features of the American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII) terminal interface to a DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer. It provides detailed information about each command, as well as system report outputs and explanations. Reason for Reissue This chapter has been updated to provide the details of software commands for FiberReach Release 4.0.
  • Page 562 363-206-305 Commands and Reports — The RELATED COMMANDS part identifies commands that affect or are affected by the named command or sets the conditions displayed by a report. Some commands are not affected by any other command and will not have this part included on the command page. Entries which are to be typed exactly as shown are printed in bold type.
  • Page 563 363-206-305 Commands and Reports Addresses Table 11-1 specifies the valid addresses for slots, lines, ports, channels, paths, cross-connections, and operations interfaces. Where lists of items appear in braces { }, and one (and only one) of these items may be used to form the address.

  • Page 564: Ddm-2000 Fiberreach Address Table

    363-206-305 Commands and Reports Table 11-1. DDM-2000 FiberReach Address Table Object Entity Address Example Entire system Main slot main-{1,2,all} main-all Function unit slot fn-{1,2,all} fn-all (R3.1 and later) Function unit pair (R3.1 and later) Slots Low speed slot ls-all ls-all ls-{a,b,c,d}-{1-2,all} ls-b-2 Sys.
  • Page 565 363-206-305 Commands and Reports Table 11-1. DDM-2000 FiberReach Address Table Object Entity Address Example STS-1 Channel (within OC-1) m{1,2}-1 m2-1 STS-1 Channel (within OC-3, m{1,2}-{1-3,all} m2-3 using 28-type OLIUs in Main) STS-1 Channel (within OC-12, m{1,2}-{1-12,all} m2-10 using 29-type OLIUs in Main) STS-1 Channel (for DS3, R3.1 and later) STS-3c Channel (within OC-3,...
  • Page 566 363-206-305 Commands and Reports Table 11-1. DDM-2000 FiberReach Address Table Object Entity Address Example VT1.5 Channels (within OC-1) m-1-all m-1-all m-1-{1-7}-{1-4,all} m-1-4-all m-1-3-3 VT1.5 Channel (within OC-3, using 28-type OLIUs in Main) m-{1-3}-{1-7}-{1-4,all} m-1-3-3 VT1.5 VT1.5 Channel for DS1 Channels for {a,b,c,d}-{1}-{1-4,all} a-1-all Cross-...
  • Page 567 363-206-305 Commands and Reports The 2000 Product Family includes many SONET products that are capable of interworking with each other. At times, references to other SONET products may appear in DDM-2000 reports. The following list shows standard abbreviations for the various members of the 2000 family. Complete Product Name Abbreviated Product Name unknown...
  • Page 568 363-206-305 Commands and Reports the system will use default values for all optional parameters for which a value has not been given. The help command provides in-context help during a dialog with DDM-2000. Help is provided automatically when an invalid input is entered and can also be requested anytime by typing a question mark (?).
  • Page 569 363-206-305 Commands and Reports Confirmation Requests NOTE: Some commands can be service-affecting if their default parameters are ignored. After all parameters have been entered, a caution message followed by the command name, the selected values of parameters, and the prompt “Execute? (y/n or CANcel/DELete to quit)= is printed.
  • Page 570 363-206-305 Commands and Reports The following comands are always restricted to privileged users only: — init-sys (initialize system) — rstr-passwd (restore password) — rtrv-lgn (retrieve login) — rtrv-passwd (retrieve password) — set-fecom (set far-end communication) — set-lgn (set login) — set-secu (set security) —...

  • Page 571: Ddm-2000 Fiberreach Command Menu

    363-206-305 Commands and Reports DDM-2000 FiberReach Command Menu Table 11-2 lists the DDM-2000 FiberReach commands by category and indicates what type of user is able to execute each command. Table 11-2. DDM-2000 FiberReach Command Menu Command Category Verb Modifier Security Level Privileged, General, Maintenance, Reports only state-eqpt...
  • Page 572 363-206-305 Commands and Reports Table 11-2. DDM-2000 FiberReach Command Menu (Contd) Command Category Verb Modifier Security Level rtrv- map-network Privileged, General, Maintenance, Reports only crs-sts1 Privileged, General, Maintenance, Reports only crs-sts3c Privileged, General, Maintenance, Reports only crs-vt1 Privileged, General, Maintenance, Reports only ulsdcc-l3 Privileged, General, Maintenance,...
  • Page 573 363-206-305 Commands and Reports Table 11-2. DDM-2000 FiberReach Command Menu (Contd) Command Category Verb Modifier Security Level set- state-sts1 Privileged, General state-vt1 Privileged, General fecom Privileged feat Privileged sts1 Privileged, General Privileged, General Privileged, General init- Privileged switch- ls Privileged, General, Mainenance path-vt1 Privileged, General, Mainenance opr-...
  • Page 574 363-206-305 Commands and Reports Table 11-2. DDM-2000 FiberReach Command Menu (Contd) Command Category Verb Modifier Security Level cnvt- Privileged, General cpy- prog Privileged only if Security enabled. Privileged, General if Security disabled. rtrv- Privileged, General, Mainenance, Reports-Only FAULT state-eqpt Privileged, General, Mainenance, Reports-Only state-path Privileged, General, Mainenance,...
  • Page 575 363-206-305 Commands and Reports Table 11-2. DDM-2000 FiberReach Command Menu (Contd) Command Category Verb Modifier Security Level rtrv- pmthres-vt1 Privileged, General, Mainenance, Reports-Only. pmthres-t1 Privileged, General, Mainenance, Reports-Only. pmthres-t3 Privileged, General, Mainenance, Reports-Only. Privileged, General, Mainenance, Reports-Only. state-eqpt Privileged, General, Mainenance, Reports-Only.
  • Page 576 “Connect a CIT and Establish a Session” with the DDM-2000. CPro-2000 CPro-2000 is a software package from Lucent Technologies to help users of DDM-2000 Multiplexer systems set up and use an advanced, yet simple, craft operations environment on a personal computer using Microsoft* Windows* 3.1 in the enhanced mode.
  • Page 577 APPLY Page APPLY NAME apply: Locally Overwrite Executing Software Generic with Software Generic INPUT FORMAT apply[:[date= date ][,[time= time ][,action= action ]]]; DESCRIPTION CAUTION: Normal alarming protection switching disabled DDM-2000 system while this command used copy Network Element’s dormant program. This command used...
  • Page 578 APPLY Page APPLY input parameters are: Date entered digits YYMMDD, where represents last date digits year, month, day. Default current system day. parameter entered, date value entered action install NULL value already passed 24-hour interval current time system’s date, will default next system’s...
  • Page 579 APPLY Page APPLY NOTE: this command issued with action =install while there outstanding apply command, newly issued command will replace request with newly entered values date and time. this command entered non-privileged user, following denial message displayed: command syntax correct, following message will...
  • Page 580 APPLY Page APPLY date specified unknown local system, following denial message will displayed: this command issued dormant copy software generic either missing (does reside flash memory) determined have been corrupted, following denial message displayed: otherwise valid command with action equal initiated, with cancel...
  • Page 581 APPLY Page APPLY After testing program apply, following confirmation message will displayed: Issue June 2000 11-21 DDM-2000 FiberReach...
  • Page 582 APPLY Page APPLY When this command used install release program that significantly different from program currently running system, following confirmation message will displayed after testing program apply: "Install Generic Program" section this manual complete instructions before using this command. command obtain exact target...
  • Page 583 APPLY Page APPLY When user gives positive response confirmation message, following message displayed: < > < > After displaying above message, program apply will begin provisioned date and time. software apply commands that fail succeed will reported History (rtrv-hsty report). apply generic issued...
  • Page 584 APPLY Page APPLY When user gives positive response confirmation message, following message displayed: Once program installation canceled, following message displayed: RELATED COMMANDS cpy-prog ins-prog rtrv-ne 11-24 Issue June 2000 DDM-2000 FiberReach...
  • Page 585 CPY-PROG Page CPY-PROG NAME cpy-prog: Copy Program INPUT FORMAT cpy-prog: TID; DESCRIPTION This command used copy software program from DDM-2000 network element another. software copied non-executing, dormant copy software generic. When executing this command copy Network Element’s software generic), local network element will...
  • Page 586 CPY-PROG Page CPY-PROG system name specified name local system instead remote system, following error message will displayed user will asked reenter TID: system name specified unknown local system, following error message will displayed: user will asked reenter TID. system name specified currently duplicate...
  • Page 587 CPY-PROG Page CPY-PROG user attempts copy program target network element that either command progress already scheduled, apply apply following denial message displayed: user attempts copy program target network element that cpy-prog command progress, following denial message displayed: remote system communication failure "P"...
  • Page 588 CPY-PROG Page CPY-PROG FiberReach releases, after testing program copy, following confirmation message will displayed: Network Element (NE) receives this command, unable determine TID-NSAP translation entered (TID could found), this command will denied following message displayed: remote NE’s does match entered (only NSAP matched...
  • Page 589 CPY-PROG Page CPY-PROG receives this command able determine TID-NSAP translation, NSAP unreachable (TID kept same, NSAP must have been changed), this command will denied following message displayed: above message, NSAP represents found TID-NSAP translation. When this command used copy release program (into dormant...
  • Page 590 CPY-PROG Page CPY-PROG "Install Generic Program" section this manual complete instructions before using this command. command obtain exact target system. rtrv-map-network current program version also obtained from initial screen when logged into system with craft interface terminal (CIT). When user gives positive response...
  • Page 591 DLT-CRS-STS1 Page DLT-CRS-STS1 NAME dlt-crs-sts1: Delete Cross-Connection STS-1 INPUT FORMAT dlt-crs-sts1: Address1 , Address2 [: cct= CrsType]; DESCRIPTION CAUTION: Execution this command affect service. This command deletes STS-1 cross-connections. This command available beginning with FiberReach Release later, when FiberReach shelf equipped with 28-type...
  • Page 592 DLT-CRS-STS1 Page DLT-CRS-STS1 Address1 , Address2 and must match existing STS-1 cross- CrsType connection execution command will complete with following message: attempt made execute this command, when incompatible OLIU packs exists Main, request will denied with following message: After entering this command, following...
  • Page 593 DLT-CRS-STS3c Page DLT-CRS-STS3c NAME dlt-crs-sts3c: Delete Cross-Connection STS-3c INPUT FORMAT dlt-crs-sts3c: Address1 , Address2 [: cct= CrsType]; DESCRIPTION CAUTION: Execution this command affect service. This command deletes STS-3c cross-connections. STS-3c signals identified first STS-1 address STS-3c signal. following chart shows mapping STS-3c addresses...
  • Page 594 DLT-CRS-STS3c Page DLT-CRS-STS3c input parameters are: Address1 and Address2 These addresses STS-3c channels that deleted. Valid connections listed below. Where items appear braces (and only one) these items used form address. Allowed FiberReach shelf equipped with type OLIU circuit packs Main unit slots,...
  • Page 595 DLT-CRS-STS3c Page DLT-CRS-STS3c attempt made execute this command, when incompatible OLIU packs exists main, request will denied with following message: After entering this command, following confirmation message displayed: RELATED COMMANDS ent-crs-sts3c rtrv-crs-sts3c Issue June 2000 11-35 DDM-2000 FiberReach...
  • Page 596 DLT-CRS-VT1 Page DLT-CRS-VT1 NAME dlt-crs-vt1: Delete Cross-Connection VT1.5 INPUT FORMAT dlt-crs-vt1: Address1 , Address2 [:cct=CrsType]; DESCRIPTION CAUTION: Execution this command affect service. This command deletes VT1.5 signal cross-connections within DDM-2000 FiberReach system. input parameters are: Address1 and Address2 These addresses VT1.5 channels, VT1.5...
  • Page 597 DLT-CRS-VT1 Page DLT-CRS-VT1 CrsType specifies cross-connection type. valid values are: Two-way cross-connections apply add/drop twoway pass-through cross-connections only. Two-way default value. Locked cross-connections support nonpath-switched locked drop applications. address includes value value applies every cross-connection within range addresses. The Address1 , Address2 and parameters must match...
  • Page 598 DLT-CRS-VT1 Page DLT-CRS-VT1 this command entered with several addresses address used more these addresses cannot processed, command will complete following message will displayed: When CrsType used command entered with more addresses that cannot processed address that cannot processed, command will complete following message...
  • Page 599 DLT-CRS-VT1 Page DLT-CRS-VT1 After entering this command, following confirmation message displayed: this command entered with part address, following confirmation message displayed: RELATED COMMANDS ent-crs-vt1 rtrv-crs-vt1 Issue June 2000 11-39 DDM-2000 FiberReach...
  • Page 600 DLT-ULSDCC-L4 Page DLT-ULSDCC-L4 NAME dlt-ulsdcc-l4: Delete Upper Layer Section INPUT FORMAT dlt-ulsdcc-l4:[L4ajsys= AJSystemId ][L4tdctid= TDCTID ]; DESCRIPTION NOTE: This command page describes functionality dlt-ulsdcc-l4 command FiberReach Release later TARP releases. This command used delete provisionable parameters Layers through open systems interconnection (OSI) 7-layer...
  • Page 601 DLT-ULSDCC-L4 Page DLT-ULSDCC-L4 parameter used specify entry TARP L4tdctid Data Cache (TDC) delete. Specifying this parameter causes deletion single data TDC. Multiple rows data deleted using multiple occurrences this command. stores three parameters each entry; NSAP, address type. address type user provisionable default...
  • Page 602 DLT-ULSDCC-L4 Page DLT-ULSDCC-L4 After entering this command, following confirmation message displayed: entries match Target Identifier (TID) specified then action taken following denial message L4tdctid displayed: entries Manual Adjacency table match specified then action taken following denial message displayed: L4ajsys RELATED COMMANDS ent-ulsdcc-l4 ent-ulsdcc-l3...
  • Page 603 ENT-CRS-STS1 Page ENT-CRS-STS1 NAME ent-crs-sts1: Enter Cross-Connection STS-1 INPUT FORMAT ent-crs-sts1: Address1 , Address2 [: cct= CrsType]; DESCRIPTION This command sets bidirectional STS-1 cross-connections between Main function unit slots available with FiberReach later releases, when equipped with 28-type OLIU circuit packs Main slots.
  • Page 604 ENT-CRS-STS1 Page ENT-CRS-STS1 Ring Release Cross-Connect Addresses: m-{1-3} m-{1-3} Allowed when Main slots equipped with 28G-U OLIUs. m-{1-3} Starting with Release 3.1, allowed when addressed function group equipped with (BBG4/BBG4B/BBG19) circuit packs. m-{1-12} Starting with FiberReach Release 4.0, Allowed when Main slots equipped...
  • Page 605 ENT-CRS-STS1 Page ENT-CRS-STS1 addresses indicate pass-through cross-connection CrsType not twoway request denied with following message: attempt made execute this command, when incompatible OLIU packs exists Main, request will denied with following message: After entering this command, following confirmation message displayed. RELATED COMMANDS dlt-crs-sts1...
  • Page 606 ENT-CRS-STS3c Page ENT-CRS-STS3c NAME ent-crs-sts3c: Enter Cross-Connection STS-3c INPUT FORMAT ent-crs-sts3c: Address1 , Address2 [: cct= CrsType]; DESCRIPTION This command sets bidirectional STS-3c cross-connections between main-1 main-2 (using 29-type OLIU circuit packs, starting with Release 4.0), between Main slots function unit slots (starting...
  • Page 607 ENT-CRS-STS3c Page ENT-CRS-STS3c STS-3c signals identified (addressed) using first STS-1 address contained each STS-3c signal. following chart shows mapping STS-3c addresses internal STS-1 structure: STS-3c Mapping Table Interface Address Internal STS-1 1,2,3 4,5,6 (29-type Main) Main 7,8,9 (29-type Main) m-10 10,11,12 (29-type Main)
  • Page 608 ENT-CRS-STS3c Page ENT-CRS-STS3c this command invoked using addresses where active STS-3c cross- connections active STS-1 cross-connections within STS-3c address already exist, following denial message will displayed: cross-connection request includes invalid circuit pack type, invalid address, specifies cross-connection supported system, following denial message will...
  • Page 609 ENT-CRS-STS3c Page ENT-CRS-STS3c attempt made execute this command, when incompatible OLIU packs exists main, request will denied with following message: After entering this command, following confirmation message displayed. RELATED COMMANDS set-feat rtrv-feat set-oc3 rtrv-oc3 dlt-crs-sts3c rtrv-crs-sts3c rtrv-crs-sts1 Issue June 2000 11-49 DDM-2000 FiberReach...
  • Page 610 ENT-CRS-VT1 Page ENT-CRS-VT1 NAME ent-crs-vt1: Enter Cross-Connection VT1.5 INPUT FORMAT ent-crs-vt1: Address1 , Address2 [: cct= CrsType][, ring= RingId]; DESCRIPTION This command sets bidirectional VT1.5 cross-connections among Main low- speed slots applied systems with various arrangements. cross-connections require presence OLIU circuit packs Main...

  • Page 611: Fiberreach Shelf With

    ENT-CRS-VT1 Page ENT-CRS-VT1 STS-1 Group Group Group Group Note: Each STS-1 signal contains 28 VT1.5 signals. Figure 11-1. DDM-2000 FiberReach Shelf with VT1.5 Signals highlighted Figure 11-1, each OC-1 signal contains STS-1 signal. STS-1 signal contains Groups signals. Each Group contains VT1.5 signals,...
  • Page 612 ENT-CRS-VT1 Page ENT-CRS-VT1 input parameters are: Address1 and Address2 These addresses VT1.5 channels, VT1.5 channel port that cross- connected. VT1.5 ring pass-through traffic, Address1 and must same. Valid addresses listed Address2 following pages. NOTE: cross-connections bidirectional. CrsType specifies cross-connection type. valid values are:...
  • Page 613 ENT-CRS-VT1 Page ENT-CRS-VT1 following list valid cross-connections. successfully perform cross-connection, user equip Main slots with 28-type (Starting must with Release 3.1) 29-type (Starting with Release 4.0) OLIU circuit packs. Where items appear braces (and only one) these items used form address.
  • Page 614 ENT-CRS-VT1 Page ENT-CRS-VT1 m-{1-3}-{1-7,all}-{1-4,all} m-{1-3}-{1-7,all}-{1-4,all} Allows pass-through cross-connections when equipped with 28-type OLIUs Main slots FiberReach later). addresses must same. m-{1-12}-{1-7,all}-{1-4,all} m-{1-12}-{1-7,all}-{1-4,all} Allows pass-through cross-connections when equipped with 29-type OLIUs Main slots FiberReach later) T1EXT (BBF6) circuit pack supports ports. When addressing ports...
  • Page 615 ENT-CRS-VT1 Page ENT-CRS-VT1 When setting path-protected hairpin local drop cross-connection, both slots function unit which OC-1 ring terminated must equipped with 27G2-U 26G2-U OLIU circuit packs. Otherwise following denial message will displayed: this command invoked using addresses where active cross-connections already exist, following...
  • Page 616 ENT-CRS-VT1 Page ENT-CRS-VT1 When command entered with several addresses (for example, when address used), more these addresses already cross- connected, following response message will displayed: addresses indicate pass-through cross-connection CrsType not twoway request denied with following message: After entering this command, following confirmation...
  • Page 617 ENT-CRS-VT1 Page ENT-CRS-VT1 this command entered with parameter part address, following confirmation message displayed. CrsType locked RingId displayed confirmation message. RELATED COMMANDS dlt-crs-vt1 rtrv-crs-vt1 Issue June 2000 11-57 DDM-2000 FiberReach...
  • Page 618 ENT-TL1MSGMAP Page ENT-TL1MSGMAP NAME ent-tl1msgmap: Enter Message Operation Systems INPUT FORMAT ent-tl1msgmap:acid= ACID ,msgtype= MessageType ,action= Action ; DESCRIPTION NOTE: security enabled port shelf, then this command available privileged users only ports shelf. This command maps DDM-2000 message types operations systems (OS) this...
  • Page 619 ENT-TL1MSGMAP Page ENT-TL1MSGMAP input parameters are: Application Context (ACID) string alphanumeric ACID characters, which function. valid ACID values are: tl1Maintenance (This identifies type). maintenance tl1MemoryAdministration (This identifies type). memory~administration (This identifies type). tl1Test testing tl1PeerComm (This identifies type peer communications. This ACID also...
  • Page 620 ENT-TL1MSGMAP Page ENT-TL1MSGMAP Action either enabled or disabled associates action MessageType When this command entered, following confirmation message will displayed: RELATED COMMANDS rtrv-tl1msgmap 11-60 Issue June 2000 DDM-2000 FiberReach...
  • Page 621 ENT-ULSDCC-L3 Page ENT-ULSDCC-L3 NAME ent-ulsdcc-l3: Enter Upper Layer Section Layer INPUT FORMAT ent-ulsdcc-l3:[L3org= OrganizationId ][,L3res= Reserved ] [,L3rd= RoutingDomain ][,L3rarea= RoutingArea ] DESCRIPTION NOTE: This command page describes functionality ent-ulsdcc-l3 command FiberReach Release later TARP releases. CAUTION: Errors provisioning this command change NSAP...
  • Page 622 ENT-ULSDCC-L3 Page ENT-ULSDCC-L3 NOTE: security enabled, then this command available privileged users only ports shelf. structure NSAP shown following display. field names shown first row, size bytes) each field listed second row. NSAP Structure NSAP Org. Area Sys. Field: Bytes: Default 000000 0000...
  • Page 623 ENT-ULSDCC-L3 Page ENT-ULSDCC-L3 additional information provisioning, refer 824-102-144, 2000 Product Family Operation Interworking Guide TARP Releases input parameters are: Organization 6-digit hexadecimal field used provision into L3org NSAP address allocated company code assigned ANSI *-administered Registration Authority Organization Names. original value this parameter...
  • Page 624 ENT-ULSDCC-L3 Page ENT-ULSDCC-L3 After entering this command following confirmation message displayed: NOTE: This command executes immediately upon entering however changes refected report rtrv-map-neighbor minutes after this command executed. user enters same parameter values currently defined "L3" parameters, system does reset. RELATED COMMANDS dlt-ulsdcc-l4...
  • Page 625 ENT-ULSDCC-L4 Page ENT-ULSDCC-L4 NAME ent-ulsdcc-l4: Enter Upper Layer Section Layer INPUT FORMAT ent-ulsdcc-l4:[L4tlif= LifeTime ][[[,L4ajsys= AJSystemId ] [[,L4ajorg= AJOrganizationId [, ] L4ajres= AJReserved ] [,L4ajrd= AJRoutingDomain ][,L4ajarea= AJRoutingArea ]]]] [[,L4t1tm= TimerT1 ][,L4t2tm= TimerT2 [, ] L4t3tm= TimerT3 ] [,L4t4tm= TimerT4 ][,L4lftm= LDBFlushTimer ]] [[,L4etdc= L4etdc ][[,L4tdcsys= L4tdcSystemId ][[, L4tdctid L4tdctid ] [,L4tdcorg= L4tdcOrganizationId ][,L4tdcres= L4tdcReserved ]...
  • Page 626 ENT-ULSDCC-L4 Page ENT-ULSDCC-L4 Multiple TARP Manual Adjacent values entered using multiple occurrences this command. Layer parameters that provisioned using this command, that needed operation have original values. Hence, necessary provision these parameters operate properly network. NOTE maximum Manual Adjacencies initiated from Network Element.
  • Page 627 ENT-ULSDCC-L4 Page ENT-ULSDCC-L4 Select (SEL) field currently user provisionable normally default value "0". purpose differentiate between multiple NSAP addresses associated with same system. value fixed according usage. "af" when TARP over CLNP. value "1d" when over CLNP. "00" other uses. When retrieved displayed,...
  • Page 628 ENT-ULSDCC-L4 Page ENT-ULSDCC-L4 NSAP Routing Domain field local This parameter used provision NSAP Area field TARP L4ajarea adjacent This byte (4-digit hex) field TARP adjacent default value this parameter value NSAP Area field local This parameter used provision TARP Timer L4t1tm maximum time...
  • Page 629 ENT-ULSDCC-L4 Page ENT-ULSDCC-L4 This byte digit) field manually entered into TARP Data Cache. There default value this parameter. NOTE: NSAP System field, which L4tdcsys unique each only parameter that required enter TARP data cache entry. this parameter specified, then other user settable NSAP...
  • Page 630 ENT-ULSDCC-L4 Page ENT-ULSDCC-L4 Services Provider Code assigned ANSI- administered Registration Authority Organization Names. default value this parameter NSAP’s Organization field local This parameter used provision NSAP Reserved L4tdcres field manually entered into TDC. This byte (4-digit hex) NSAP Reserved field that manually entered...
  • Page 631 ENT-ULSDCC-L4 Page ENT-ULSDCC-L4 invalid value entered (that value equal less than L4tlif value greater than 65535), following message displayed user reprompted: invalid L4t1tm , L4t2tm , L4t3tm , L4t4tm or L4lftm value entered (for example, value equal less than following message displayed user...
  • Page 632 ENT-ULSDCC-L4 Page ENT-ULSDCC-L4 After entering this command following confirmation message displayed: user changes value "L4" parameter enters same parameter values currently defined "L3" parameters, system does reset. RELATED COMMANDS ent-ulsdcc-l3 rtrv-ulsdcc-l3 rtr-vulsdcc-l4 dlt-ulsdcc-l4 11-72 Issue June 2000 DDM-2000 FiberReach...
  • Page 633 HELP Page HELP NAME help: Provide In-context Help INPUT FORMAT DESCRIPTION Help ? provides help within craft dialog CIT. Help provided automatically when invalid input entered also requested time typing " ". " " displays help message then displays another prompt.

  • Page 634: Init-Pm

    INIT-PM Page INIT-PM NAME init-pm: Initialize Performance Monitoring (PM) INPUT FORMAT init-pm:reg= Register ; DESCRIPTION This command initializes current and/or current quarter-hour performance-monitoring storage registers. Registers previous previous quarter-hours affected. NOTE: security enabled port shelf, then this command available privileged users only ports...
  • Page 635 INIT-SYS Page INIT-SYS NAME init-sys: Initialize System INPUT FORMAT init-sys: Address ; DESCRIPTION CAUTION: Execution this command affect service. command should used in-service system. This init-sys:all command should only used installation before system turnup. This command initializes provisionable parameters their default values.

  • Page 636: Init-Sys

    INIT-SYS Page INIT-SYS NOTE: Parameters provisioned using following commands listed below parameters. Alarm delays set-attr-alm NSAP Starting with FiberReach Release later TARP releases, following additional parameters will affected well: L4ajorg, L4ajres, L4ajrd, L4ajarea, L4ajsys L3lv2is L4tlif L4t1tm, L4t2tm, L4t3tm, L4t4tm, L4lftm L4etdc ent-ulsdcc-l3...
  • Page 637 INIT-SYS Page INIT-SYS FiberReach Release later TARP releases, Alarm Group parameter will part provisioning parameters, therefore will set-ne affected this command. address used only installation before turning over system. This ensures that parameters system have proper default values before system-specific provisioning done.
  • Page 638 INIT-SYS Page INIT-SYS this command. set-ne TBOS CO/RT selection — FiberReach Release later TARP releases, TBOS parameter will available, therefore will affected this command. set-ne UserSide/NetworkSide settings Channel set-fecom Low-Speed Protection Mode low-speed protection mode match installed low-speed protection assembly. valid protection assembly...
  • Page 639 INIT-SYS Page INIT-SYS TBOS link — FiberReach Release later TARP releases, TBOS link parameter will part set-ne provisioning parameters, therefore will affected this command. CO/RT selection UserSide/NetworkSide settings channel enable/disable When command entered, following confirmation init-sys:sysctl message will displayed: ’ NOTE: Executing init-sys:sysctl cause...
  • Page 640 INIT-SYS Page INIT-SYS Entering command will cause following confirmation init-sys:all message displayed: ’ RELATED COMMANDS reset 11-80 Issue June 2000 DDM-2000 FiberReach...

  • Page 641: Ins-Prog

    INS-PROG Page INS-PROG NAME ins-prog: Install Program INPUT FORMAT ins-prog: TID; DESCRIPTION This command installs program into system controller. This command supports local program installation network element from personal computer (PC) connected port target system. command used copy system controller program from local...
  • Page 642 INS-PROG Page INS-PROG command syntax correct, following message will displayed: This command only completed successfully executed from modem port received over DCC. This command cannot executed during remote login session. this command executed during remote login session, following message will displayed: this command...
  • Page 643 INS-PROG Page INS-PROG user attempts remotely install program into Target network element that either command progress already apply apply scheduled, following denial message will displayed: user attempts remotely install program Target network element that cpy-prog command progress, following denial message will displayed: this...
  • Page 644 INS-PROG Page INS-PROG support remote program installation from local system that connects target system must running compatible programs. support local program installation from local (target) system that connects must running compatible programs. programs compatible, following denial message will displayed: remote program installation, target...
  • Page 645 INS-PROG Page INS-PROG receives this command able determine TID-NSAP translation, NSAP unreachable (TID kept same, NSAP must have been changed), this command will denied following message displayed: < > above message, NSAP represents found TID-NSAP translation. communication cannot established when attempting download software...
  • Page 646 INS-PROG Page INS-PROG When this command used download software local site from personal computer (PC), following confirmation message will displayed after testing program installation: When upgrading software, following confirmation message will displayed after testing program installation: 11-86 Issue June 2000 DDM-2000 FiberReach...
  • Page 647 INS-PROG Page INS-PROG When this command used download release software (into dormant memory remote system) that significantly different from software currently running remote system, download software into dormant memory local system from where software downloaded significantly different from software currently running local system,...

  • Page 648: Logout

    LOGOUT Page LOGOUT NAME logout: Terminate Session INPUT FORMAT logout; DESCRIPTION This command terminates user session. this command entered during local session, will terminate sessions established user. entered during remote session, this command will terminate remote session return user local session.

  • Page 649: Opr-Aco

    OPR-ACO Page OPR-ACO NAME opr-aco: Operate Alarm Cutoff INPUT FORMAT opr-aco; DESCRIPTION This command silences audible office alarms. Alarms remain silent until alarm condition arises. this command executed while there active alarm condition system, will: Silence active audible office alarms Light alarm cut-off...

  • Page 650: Opr-Lpbk-T1

    OPR-LPBK-T1 Page OPR-LPBK-T1 NAME opr-lpbk-t1: Operate-Loopback-T1 INPUT FORMAT opr-lpbk-t1: Address [:lpbktype= LoopbackType ]; DESCRIPTION CAUTION: Execution this command affect service. This command executes loopback circuit pack towards optical fiber (terminal) (facility) shown Figure 11-2. loopback remains place until released rls-lpbk-t1 command. DDM-2000 DDM-2000 DS1/DS1PM T1EXT CP...
  • Page 651 OPR-LPBK-T1 Page OPR-LPBK-T1 input parameters are: Address port(s) looped back. Address terminal loopback, valid addresses protected configuration are: all, {a,b,c,d}-all, {a,b,c,d}-1-{1-4,all} terminal loopback, valid addresses protected configuration are: all, {a,b,c}-{1,2}-{1-4,all}, d-1-{1-4,all} facility loopback, valid addresses protected configuration are: all, {a,b,c,d}-all, {a,b,c,d}-1-{all}, Release later...
  • Page 652 OPR-LPBK-T1 Page OPR-LPBK-T1 loopback type consistent with address, following denial message displayed: command cannot completed hardware problems circuit pack, following message displayed: Address and CPname refer slot address provisioned circuit pack type slot, respectively. slot AUTO state determined have wrong circuit pack type...
  • Page 653 OPR-LPBK-T1 Page OPR-LPBK-T1 this command invoked establish other than existing loopback type (that facility loopback requested when terminal loopback already exists vice versa) same address, following denial message will displayed: When input terminal loopback, this command will cause following confirmation message displayed: Issue...
  • Page 654 OPR-LPBK-T1 Page OPR-LPBK-T1 When input facility loopback, this command will cause following confirmation message displayed: RELATED COMMANDS rls-lpbk-t1 11-94 Issue June 2000 DDM-2000 FiberReach...

  • Page 655: Opr-Lpbk-T3

    OPR-LPBK-T3 Page OPR-LPBK-T3 NAME opr-lpbk-t3: Operate-Loopback-T3 INPUT FORMAT opr-lpbk-t3: Address [:lpbktype= LoopbackType ]; DESCRIPTION CAUTION: Execution this command affect service. This command executes loopback port towards optical fiber (terminal) (facility), shown Figure 11-3. Starting with FiberReach Release 3.1, this command allowed shelf equipped...
  • Page 656 OPR-LPBK-T3 Page OPR-LPBK-T3 input parameters are: Address port(s) looped back. Address Valid Port Addresses (BBG4/BBG4B): {f,all} Valid Port Addresses (BBG19): all, f-{1-2,all} loopbacktype specifies whether loopback terminal facility lpbktype terminal loopback directed towards high-speed terminal facility. This default value. facility loopback directed towards...
  • Page 657 OPR-LPBK-T3 Page OPR-LPBK-T3 slot determined have wrong pack type command, following message will printed CIT: equipped properly loopback established Where address slot AID. this command invoked establish other than existing loopback type (that facility loopback requested when terminal loopback already exists vice versa)
  • Page 658 OPR-LPBK-T3 Page OPR-LPBK-T3 When input facility loopback, this command will cause following confirmation message displayed: RELATED COMMANDS rls-lpbk-t3 11-98 Issue June 2000 DDM-2000 FiberReach...

  • Page 659: Linear Application

    RESET Page RESET NAME reset: Reset System Software Program INPUT FORMAT reset; DESCRIPTION CAUTION: Execution this command affect performance-monitoring data. This command resets system software program. history performance-monitoring data lost. alarm information lost "rediscovered." date time lost "rediscovered" from default date time).
  • Page 660 RESET Page RESET NOTE reset done shelf, adjacent shelves (shelves other ends optical interfaces that terminate shelf being reset) show transient "section channel failed" alarms. This normal system response. When input, this command displays following confirmation message: During system start-up after reset other...

  • Page 661: Rlgn

    RLGN Page RLGN NAME rlgn: Remote Login INPUT FORMAT rlgn: TID; DESCRIPTION This command establishes remote login session SONET data communications channel (DCC). network element (NE) which part same maintenance subnetwork compatible product type accessed with this command. alarm status report system printed...
  • Page 662 RLGN Page RLGN user attempts login remote shelf where another remote session already established, following denial message will displayed: user logged into shelf then tries remotely login same shelf, following denial message will displayed: user toggled back local after establishing remote session tries...
  • Page 663 RLGN Page RLGN nonprivileged user remotely logs into remote through state, following denial message will displayed: lockout unknown could found) entered, following message will displayed user will reprompted TID: unknown unable determine TID-NSAP translation entered could found) entered, this command will denied following...
  • Page 664 RLGN Page RLGN receives this command able determine TID-NSAP translation, NSAP unreachable (TID kept same, NSAP must have been changed) other reason, remote simply reachable, this command will denied following message displayed: < > above message, NSAP represents found TID-NSAP translation.

  • Page 665: Rls-Lpbk-T1

    RLS-LPBK-T1 Page RLS-LPBK-T1 NAME rls-lpbk-t1: Release-Loopback-T1 INPUT FORMAT rls-lpbk-t1: Address [:lpbktype= LoopbackType ]; DESCRIPTION This command releases previously established loopback port. When using interfaces, only allowed loopback type terminal. input parameters are: Address port(s) where loopback released. Address terminal loopback, valid addresses protected...
  • Page 666 RLS-LPBK-T1 Page RLS-LPBK-T1 Loopbacktype specifies whether loopback terminal facility. lpbktype Since only type loopback allowed time T1EXT circuit packs, this parameter used these circuit packs. terminal loopback directed towards high speed terminal facility. This default value. Terminal only loopback type allowed when using...

  • Page 667: Rls-Lpbk-T3

    RLS-LPBK-T3 Page RLS-LPBK-T3 NAME rls-lpbk-t3: Release-Loopback-T3 INPUT FORMAT rls-lpbk-t3: Address [:lpbktype= LoopbackType ]; DESCRIPTION This command releases loopback port previously established opr-lpbk-t3 command. Starting with FiberReach Release 3.1, this command allowed shelf equipped with 28-type OLIUs Main circuit packs Function unit slots.

  • Page 668: Rstr-Passwd

    RSTR-PASSWD Page RSTR-PASSWD NAME rstr-passwd: Restore Logins, Passwords, User Types INPUT FORMAT rstr-passwd: login , passwd , user_type , clr ; DESCRIPTION NOTE: This command available privileged users only. This command used restore login, password encrypted only encoded form), user type information from...
  • Page 669 RSTR-PASSWD Page RSTR-PASSWD This parameter indicates whether login data existing should deleted before login, password, user type information restored. This parameter have following values: Clear login file before restoring login clear information (used only when privileged). user_type Append restored login information network noclear...
  • Page 670 RSTR-PASSWD Page RSTR-PASSWD user attempts restore another user when maximum privileged number users already been reached, this attempt will privileged denied following message will displayed: attempt made restore already existing privileged user’s login/password information with either user_type general, maintenance or this attempt denied...

  • Page 671: Rtrv-Alm

    RTRV-ALM Page RTRV-ALM NAME rtrv-alm: Retrieve Alarm Status INPUT FORMAT rtrv-alm[:alm= AlarmLevel ]; DESCRIPTION This command displays report active alarm status conditions local network element. report includes source address alarm well date time alarm, whether condition service-affecting, short description condition. input parameter AlarmLevel...

  • Page 672: Rtrv-Attr-Alm

    RTRV-ATTR-ALM Page RTRV-ATTR-ALM NAME rtrv-attr-alm: Retrieve Attribute Alarm INPUT FORMAT rtrv-attr-alm; DESCRIPTION This command displays current alarm attributes, provisioned set-attr-alm command. output report appears follows: output parameters are: This shows alarm holdoff delay seconds incoming Alarm Delay signal equipment failures. This parameter integer...
  • Page 673 RTRV-ATTR-ALM Page RTRV-ATTR-ALM RELATED COMMANDS set-attr-alm Issue June 2000 11-113 DDM-2000 FiberReach...

  • Page 674: Rtrv-Attr-Cont

    RTRV-ATTR-CONT Page RTRV-ATTR-CONT NAME rtrv-attr-cont: Retrieve Attribute Control INPUT FORMAT rtrv-attr-cont[: Address ]; DESCRIPTION This command displays provisioned name miscellaneous discrete environmental control points, set-attr-cont command. input parameter Address environmental control point. default address Address cont-all. Valid Addresses: cont-{1-4,all} output report appears follows:...
  • Page 675 RTRV-ATTR-CONT Page RTRV-ATTR-CONT NOTE: This command will denied entered system whose SYSCTL CO/RT parameter (via command). set-ne command determine switch setting. following denial rtrv-ne message will displayed: RELATED COMMANDS rtrv-attr-env rtrv-ne set-attr-cont set-attr-env Issue June 2000 11-115 DDM-2000 FiberReach...

  • Page 676: Rtrv-Attr-Env

    RTRV-ATTR-ENV Page RTRV-ATTR-ENV NAME rtrv-attr-env: Retrieve Attribute Environment INPUT FORMAT rtrv-attr-env[: Address ]; DESCRIPTION This command displays provisioned alarm provisioned name provisioned alarm type miscellaneous discrete environmental alarm/status points, set-attr-env command. input parameter address environmental input point. Address Valid Addresses: env-{1-15,all}, env-{all} (default) output report...
  • Page 677 RTRV-ATTR-ENV Page RTRV-ATTR-ENV Alarm provisioned alarm level environmental input Alarm following values: Critical alarm Major alarm Minor alarm alarmed, reported This user-defined classification environmental Alarm Type alarm/status point. Provisioned description environmental alarm/status point. Description NOTE: This command will denied entered system whose SYSCTL...

  • Page 678: Rtrv-Crs-Sts1

    RTRV-CRS-STS1 Page RTRV-CRS-STS1 NAME rtrv-crs-sts1: Retrieve Cross-Connection STS-1 INPUT FORMAT rtrv-crs-sts1[: Address ]; DESCRIPTION This command retrieves STS-1 cross-connections within DDM-2000 system. NOTE: This command available with FiberReach later releases. This report also indicates VT1.5 cross-connections exist. VT1.5 cross- connection report, obtained using...
  • Page 679 RTRV-CRS-STS1 Page RTRV-CRS-STS1 NOTE: Starting with FiberReach Release each cross-connection reported only once (not once each direction). above report lists both STS-1 STS-3c cross connections applicable) separate sections. output report shows channels order that reflects physical layout system (for example, high-speed slots shown...

  • Page 680: Rtrv-Crs-Sts3C

    RTRV-CRS-STS3c Page RTRV-CRS-STS3c NAME rtrv-crs-sts3c: Retrieve Cross-Connection STS-3c INPUT FORMAT rtrv-crs-sts3c[: Address ]; DESCRIPTION This command retrieves STS-3c cross-connections within DDM-2000 system. Cross-connections entered using ent-crs-sts3c command. This command available FiberReach starting with Release 3.1. This command used only shelf equipped with 29-type...
  • Page 681 RTRV-CRS-STS3c Page RTRV-CRS-STS3c output report appears follows: & output report shows STS-3c channels order that reflects physical layout system (for example, high-speed slots shown first, followed those associated with function unit). output report also shows STS-1 channels applicable) separate section. STS-1 channels listed...

  • Page 682: Rtrv-Crs-Vt1

    RTRV-CRS-VT1 Page RTRV-CRS-VT1 NAME rtrv-crs-vt1: Retrieve Cross-Connection VT1.5 INPUT FORMAT rtrv-crs-vt1[: Address ]; DESCRIPTION NOTE: slots equipped with different pack types (for example, during upgrade), output report this command will include data what considered time valid system pack type. This command retrieves VT1.5...
  • Page 683 RTRV-CRS-VT1 Page RTRV-CRS-VT1 output report appears follows. Only existing ports channels that cross-connected will displayed report. NOTE: Starting with FiberReach Release each cross-connection reported only once (not once each direction). output parameters are: Address1 address VT1.5 channel Address port. Address2 address VT1.5 channel...
  • Page 684 RTRV-CRS-VT1 Page RTRV-CRS-VT1 RELATED COMMANDS dlt-crs-vt1 ent-crs-vt1 rtrv-crs-sts1 rtrv-state-path 11-124 Issue June 2000 DDM-2000 FiberReach...

  • Page 685: Rtrv-Eqpt

    RTRV-EQPT Page RTRV-EQPT NAME rtrv-eqpt: Retrieve Equipment INPUT FORMAT rtrv-eqpt[: Address ]; DESCRIPTION This command displays circuit pack type version information more slots network element (NE). also shows which low-speed protection mode (1x1 1x7) active shelf. input parameter Address identifies more slot(s).
  • Page 686 RTRV-EQPT Page RTRV-EQPT X.X.X output parameters are: This address slot. Address Circuit pack mnemonic name that identifies Circuit Pack general type function provided circuit pack. example, Optical Line Interface Units named OLIU; SYStem ConTroLlers named SYSCTL. Apparatus code uniquely identifies specific function Apparatus...
  • Page 687 RTRV-EQPT Page RTRV-EQPT CLEI code 10-character code identifying each CLEI Code circuit pack. Equipment catalog item (ECI) code 6-character code Code identifying each circuit pack. This code corresponds bar-coded label faceplate circuit pack, uniquely equivalent CLEI code. This 12-character code uniquely identifying each...
  • Page 688 RTRV-EQPT Page RTRV-EQPT RELATED COMMANDS rtrv-state 11-128 Issue June 2000 DDM-2000 FiberReach...

  • Page 689: Rtrv-Feat

    RTRV-FEAT Page RTRV-FEAT NAME rtrv-feat: Retrieve Feature INPUT FORMAT rtrv-feat; DESCRIPTION This command retrieves list active feature options enabled set-feat command. output report appears follows: output parameters are: This name feature currently enabled. Feature Option Description feature. Description RELATED COMMANDS set-feat Issue June...

  • Page 690: Rtrv-Fecom

    RTRV-FECOM Page RTRV-FECOM NAME rtrv-fecom: Retrieve Far-end Communications INPUT FORMAT rtrv-fecom:[ Address ]; DESCRIPTION This command displays provisioned state network element’s (NE’s) section data communication channels (DCC), set-fecom command. embedded overhead communications channel SONET line used end-to-end communications maintenance. carries alarm, control, status...
  • Page 691 RTRV-FECOM Page RTRV-FECOM output parameters this report are: This column displays address DCC. Address This column shows whether communication over Communication enabled disabled. network side/user side (NS/US) parameter settings NS/US available with BBG8 controller identify setting each network element. This identification needed communications...

  • Page 692: Rtrv-Hsty

    RTRV-HSTY Page RTRV-HSTY NAME rtrv-hsty: Retrieve History INPUT FORMAT rtrv-hsty; DESCRIPTION This command displays event-history report. This report contains list most recent system events. This report will contain events. events listed last-in, first-out order, date- time-stamped. NOTE: large number conditions reported, RTRV-HSTY report...

  • Page 693: Rtrv-Lgn

    RTRV-LGN Page RTRV-LGN NAME rtrv-lgn: Retrieve Login INPUT FORMAT rtrv-lgn; DESCRIPTION This command retrieves login authorization information. This report lists each user’s login privileges. report does contain passwords. NOTE: This command available privileged users only. FiberReach Release earlier, output report appears follows: Issue...
  • Page 694 RTRV-LGN Page RTRV-LGN Starting with FiberReach Release 4.0, output report appears follows: output parameters are: This column lists login names. Login This column indicates type authorization each user User Type assigned. valid values privileged, general, maintenance and reports-only. Passwd Age. Starting with FiberReach...
  • Page 695 RTRV-LGN Page RTRV-LGN RELATED COMMANDS set-lgn set-secu rtrv-secu Issue June 2000 11-135 DDM-2000 FiberReach...

  • Page 696: Rtrv-Link

    RTRV-LINK Page RTRV-LINK NAME rtrv-link: Retrieve Link Configuration INPUT FORMAT rtrv-link; DESCRIPTION This command displays currently-provisioned parameters user’s craft interface link, command. This includes link which set-link user logged into, baud rate, page length reports. baud rate autobaud provisionable parameter. output report appears...
  • Page 697 RTRV-LINK Page RTRV-LINK Baud identifies data rate this link. data rate Baud automatically agree with terminal workstation connected link. after data rate indicates auto that data rate autobaud routine SYSCTL circuit pack. After connecting port, press <enter><enter> <CR><CR> (double carriage return) "AA"...

  • Page 698: Rtrv-Map-Neighbor

    RTRV-MAP-NEIGHBOR Page RTRV-MAP-NEIGHBOR NAME rtrv-map-neighbor: Retrieve Neighbor INPUT FORMAT rtrv-map-neighbor; DESCRIPTION NOTE: This command page describes functionality command FiberReach Release later rtrv-map-neighbor FiberReach TARP releases. This command displays immediate neighbors that reachable local Network Element (NE). TIDs included this report always determined real-time...
  • Page 699 RTRV-MAP-NEIGHBOR Page RTRV-MAP-NEIGHBOR following example report under normal conditions applicable FiberReach Release later: Note that NSAP value part same line other reported information, wrapped around based 80-column screen width. NOTE Multiple Area Addresses have been provisioned other local NE’s area, TARP NSAP-to-TID translation...
  • Page 700 RTRV-MAP-NEIGHBOR Page RTRV-MAP-NEIGHBOR Starting with FiberReach Release 3.1, output parameter, added report, This parameter used indicate whether communication between neighboring network elements neighboring Level areas) functional not. This parameter populated also, least those neighboring Level Also when local Level neighbor different area, value...
  • Page 701 RTRV-MAP-NEIGHBOR Page RTRV-MAP-NEIGHBOR This product type local Product Type This column identifies whether listed Network Element Level provisioned Level Possible values are: "Y" " ". FiberReach Release cannot provisioned Level ISs. Starting with FiberReach Release 3.1, this parameter have value "?"...
  • Page 702 RTRV-MAP-NEIGHBOR Page RTRV-MAP-NEIGHBOR NSAP Structure NSAP Organization Area Sys. Field: Bytes: Default 000000 0000 0000 0000 none Value: (hex) user provisionable provisionable provisionable different fields that make NSAP address separated single space report. more information NSAP’s individual fields, refer command page.

  • Page 703: Rtrv-Map-Network

    RTRV-MAP-NETWORK Page RTRV-MAP-NETWORK NAME rtrv-map-network: Retrieve Network INPUT FORMAT rtrv-map-network; DESCRIPTION NOTE: This command page describes functionality command FiberReach Release later rtrv-map-network FiberReach TARP releases. This command displays Network Elements (NEs) same Level area that reachable local through DCC. TIDs included this report...
  • Page 704 RTRV-MAP-NETWORK Page RTRV-MAP-NETWORK output report parameters are: This column contains local remote subnetwork. time local unable determine reachable NSAP, network report indicates this showing "?" column. NOTE: When "?" displayed report, will always appear, along with related information report. This product type local...
  • Page 705 RTRV-MAP-NETWORK Page RTRV-MAP-NETWORK becomes isolated, user were this report while this condition still exists, isolated would longer listed report; only that reachable local listed. NOTE Multiple Area Addresses have been provisioned other local NE’s area, TARP NSAP-to-TID translation remote successfully completed, this report...
  • Page 706 RTRV-NE Page RTRV-NE NAME rtrv-ne: Retrieve Network Element INPUT FORMAT rtrv-ne; DESCRIPTION NOTE: This command page describes functionality rtrv-ne command FiberReach Release later FiberReach TARP releases. This command displays information that provisioned set-ne command switches SYSCTL pack. FiberReach Release earlier, output report appears...
  • Page 707 RTRV-NE Page RTRV-NE Starting with FiberReach Release 4.0, output report appears follows: output parameters are: This system name, indicated string alphanumeric characters. default value "LT- DDM-2000". must unique each element subnetwork. This parameter valid starting with FiberReach Release 4.0. field used identify whether...
  • Page 708 RTRV-NE Page RTRV-NE This parameter valid starting with FiberReach Release 4.0. AGNE AGNE (Alarm Gateway value yes or no which indicates whether this system alarm gateway network element. default value this parameter no One AGNE needed each alarm group support message communications Status...

  • Page 709: Rtrv-Ne

    RTRV-NE Page RTRV-NE Product keyword that switches BBG8 Product SYSCTL value SHELFID (DDM shelf shelf) backplane identify product supported. DDM-2000 OC-3 shelf part DDM-2000 network. software also checked OHCTL determined that product OC-3 (BBG9 BBG10). DDM-2000 OC-12 shelf part DDM-2000 network.
  • Page 710 RTRV-NE Page RTRV-NE Apply This parameter reported starting with FiberReach Action Release 4.0. dormant software generic currently stored network element, command scheduled program apply installation with Action=install on Date=date and Time=time date reported digit YYMMDD, time HH:MM:SS program installation scheduled yet, blank "...

  • Page 711: Rtrv-Oc1

    RTRV-OC1 Page RTRV-OC1 NAME rtrv-oc1: Retrieve INPUT FORMAT rtrv-oc1[: Address ]; DESCRIPTION This command displays configuration OC-1 line(s), set-oc1 command. input parameter follows: Address identifies OC-1 line(s). default Address all. Valid OC-1 Addresses: all, main-{1,2,all} output report appears follows: output parameters are: Address...
  • Page 712 RTRV-OC1 Page RTRV-OC1 This parameter appears release later. indicates aisalm provisioned alarm level OC-1 line following values: Critical alarm Major alarm Minor alarm alarmed, reported (default). RELATED COMMANDS set-oc1 11-152 Issue June 2000 DDM-2000 FiberReach...

  • Page 713: Rtrv-Oc3

    RTRV-OC3 Page RTRV-OC3 NAME rtrv-oc3: Retrieve INPUT FORMAT rtrv-oc3[: Address ]; DESCRIPTION This command displays configuration OC-3 lines, set-oc3 command. NOTE: This command available with FiberReach later releases, using 28-type OLIU circuit pack. input parameter follows: Address identifies OC-3 line(s). default Address all.
  • Page 714 RTRV-OC3 Page RTRV-OC3 FiberReach Release later releases, output report appears follows: output parameters are: Address OC-3 line. Line Address Signal Degrade Threshold This error rate (BER) threshold shown logarithm base value integer with −5 range through corresponding BERs −9 through respectively.
  • Page 715 RTRV-OC3 Page RTRV-OC3 This parameter specifies alarm level non-service- Alarm affecting OC-3 line failure condition. valid values are: Critical alarm Major alarm Minor alarm alarmed, reported (default). This parameter specifies whether OC-3 interface DccMode configured interworking with ring interface. There valid values this...

  • Page 716: Rtrv-Oc12

    RTRV-OC12 Page RTRV-OC12 NAME rtrv-oc12: Retrieve OC12 INPUT FORMAT rtrv-oc12[: Address ]; DESCRIPTION This command displays configuration OC-12 lines provisioned command. FiberReach, this command available starting with set-oc12 Release 4.0. input parameter follows: Address identifies OC-12 line(s). default Address all. FiberReach shelf equipped...
  • Page 717 RTRV-OC12 Page RTRV-OC12 output parameters are: Address OC-12 line. Line Address Signal Degrade Threshold This error rate (BER) threshold logarithm base value integer with range −5 −9 through corresponding BERs through slot empty equipped with something other than optical unit, hyphen will appear...
  • Page 718 RTRV-OC12 Page RTRV-OC12 RELATED COMMANDS set-oc3 set-oc12 11-158 Issue June 2000 DDM-2000 FiberReach...

  • Page 719: Rtrv-Passwd

    RTRV-PASSWD Page RTRV-PASSWD NAME rtrv-passwd: Retrieve Passwords INPUT FORMAT rtrv-passwd; DESCRIPTION This command displays logins, passwords encrypted form), user type logins system. This command should used back this only information external workstation. Additional workstation software command will used rstr-passwd re-create this information network...
  • Page 720 RTRV-PASSWD Page RTRV-PASSWD RELATED COMMANDS rstr-passwd rtrv-lgn set-lgn set-passwd 11-160 Issue June 2000 DDM-2000 FiberReach...

  • Page 721: Rtrv-Pm-Line

    RTRV-PM-LINE Page RTRV-PM-LINE NAME rtrv-pm-line: Retrieve Performance Monitoring Line INPUT FORMAT rtrv-pm-line: Address ; DESCRIPTION This command displays performance-monitoring data associated with OC-1, OC-3 OC-12 (with 29-type OLIUs Main) lines terminated system. Starting with FiberReach Release 3.1, OC-3 data available when Main unit...
  • Page 722 RTRV-PM-LINE Page RTRV-PM-LINE output report appears follows: output parameters are: This column shows address monitored signal. Address This column indicates time system clock when data Start Time collection started. This parameter shows number coding violations data collection interval that started time reported previous...
  • Page 723 RTRV-PM-LINE Page RTRV-PM-LINE greater-than symbol (>) following count indicates that register overflowed that indicated count register maximum. hyphen indicates that count that parameter available trouble condition. blank indicates that report field does apply. question mark following count indicates that count includes data less...

  • Page 724: Rtrv-Pm-Sect

    RTRV-PM-SECT Page RTRV-PM-SECT NAME rtrv-pm-sect: Retrieve Performance Monitoring Section INPUT FORMAT rtrv-pm-sect: Address ; DESCRIPTION This command displays performance-monitoring data associated with following: OC-3 optics shelf equipped with 28-type OLIUs Main unit slots and/ 22-type OLIUs Function unit slots) OC-12 optics shelf equipped...
  • Page 725 RTRV-PM-SECT Page RTRV-PM-SECT output report appears follows: output parameters are: This indicates address OC-1 line Address shelf equipped with 26-type OLIUs Main unit slots), OC-3 line shelf equipped with 28-type OLIUs Main unit slots and/or 22-type OLIUs Function unit slots), OC-12 line shelf...
  • Page 726 RTRV-PM-SECT Page RTRV-PM-SECT asterisk following count parameter indicates that threshold crossing occurred that parameter. RELATED COMMANDS init-pm rtrv-pm-line rtrv-pm-tca rtrv-pmthres-sect set-pmthres-sect 11-166 Issue June 2000 DDM-2000 FiberReach...

  • Page 727: Rtrv-Pm-Sts1

    RTRV-PM-STS1 Page RTRV-PM-STS1 NAME rtrv-pm-sts1: Retrieve Performance Monitoring STS-1 INPUT FORMAT rtrv-pm-sts1: Address ; DESCRIPTION This command reports path performance-monitoring data associated with STS-1 signals terminating network element. STS-1 cross-connections non-ring interfaces, data collected active path signals only active path reported.
  • Page 728 RTRV-PM-STS1 Page RTRV-PM-STS1 output report appears follows: output parameters are: This column shows address monitored signal. Address This column indicates time system clock when Start Time data collection started. This column shows number coding violations. This column shows number errored seconds.
  • Page 729 RTRV-PM-STS1 Page RTRV-PM-STS1 NOTE: Rows that zeros printed except current current quarter hour, which always printed. greater-than symbol (>) following count indicates that register overflowed that indicated count register maximum. hyphen indicates that count that parameter available trouble condition. blank indicates that report...

  • Page 730: Rtrv-Pm-T1

    RTRV-PM-T1 Page RTRV-PM-T1 NAME rtrv-pm-t1: Retrieve Performance Monitoring INPUT FORMAT rtrv-pm-t1: Address ; DESCRIPTION This command displays parameter data associated with more signals passing through system available only performance monitoring feature set-feat command. Quarter-hour registers available addition daily registers. input parameter Address address...
  • Page 731 RTRV-PM-T1 Page RTRV-PM-T1 output parameters are: This shows address signal. Address This indicates time system clock when data Start Time collection started. This indicates number errored second line (ES-L) counts ES-L during data collection interval that started time reported second column.
  • Page 732 RTRV-PM-T1 Page RTRV-PM-T1 NOTE Rows that zeros printed except current quarter-hour current day, which always printed. rows containing partial counts will always printed well. greater-than symbol (>) following count indicates that register overflowed that indicated count register maximum. hyphen indicates that count that...
  • Page 733 RTRV-PM-T1 Page RTRV-PM-T1 RELATED COMMANDS init-pm rtrv-feat rtrv-pmthres-vt1 set-feat Issue June 2000 11-173 DDM-2000 FiberReach...

  • Page 734: Rtrv-Pm-T3

    RTRV-PM-T3 Page RTRV-PM-T3 NAME rtrv-pm-t3: Retrieve Performance Monitoring INPUT FORMAT rtrv-pm-t3: Address ; DESCRIPTION This command displays performance-monitoring data associated with more signals passing through system. This report enhanced display performance monitoring data line path incoming from DSX-3, addition previously displayed data path...
  • Page 735 RTRV-PM-T3 Page RTRV-PM-T3 input parameters are: Address signal(s). Address Valid Port Addresses (BBG4/BBG4B): {f,all} Valid Port Addresses (BBG19): all, f-{1-2,all} output report appears follows: output parameters are: This shows address signal incoming from Address DSX-3 fiber. Type Direction This shows type data (line,...
  • Page 736 RTRV-PM-T3 Page RTRV-PM-T3 This indicates number B3ZS coding violations occurring CV-L over accumulation period signal incoming from DSX-3. This indicates number seconds with least B3ZS ES-L coding violation signal incoming from DSX-3. This indicates number seconds with greater than B3ZS SES-L coding violations...

  • Page 737: Rtrv-Pmthres-T3

    RTRV-PM-T3 Page RTRV-PM-T3 NOTE: Rows that zeros printed except current current quarter, which always printed. greater-than symbol (>) following count indicates that register overflowed that indicated count register maximum. hyphen indicates that count that parameter available trouble condition. blank indicates that report field...
  • Page 738 RTRV-PM-TCA Page RTRV-PM-TCA NAME rtrv-pm-tca: Retrieve Performance Monitoring INPUT FORMAT rtrv-pm-tca; DESCRIPTION This command displays number threshold crossing alerts (TCAs) associated with signals terminating passing through system. occurs when performance-monitoring counter exceeds user-selected threshold. NOTE: slots equipped with different pack types (for example,...
  • Page 739 RTRV-PM-TCA Page RTRV-PM-TCA feature enabled (via command), following ds1pm set-feat additional lines will appear report: feature enabled (via command), following vtpm set-feat additional lines will appear report: output report shows address type parameters that generating TCAs. Blanks report indicate that output parameter does...
  • Page 740 RTRV-PM-TCA Page RTRV-PM-TCA This shows total number TCAs associated with section Section performance monitoring parameters (severely errored frame seconds). This shows total number TCAs associated with line Line performance monitoring parameters Type Type SES, UAS, PSC, This shows total number TCAs associated with...
  • Page 741 RTRV-PM-TCA Page RTRV-PM-TCA This column shows address signal. Address This column shows address VT1.5 signal. VT1.5 Address This column indicates total number TCAs associated Count with addressed signal. RELATED COMMANDS init-pm rtrv-pm-line rtrv-pm-sect rtrv-pm-t3 set-pmthres-line set-pmthres-sect set-pmthres-t3 Issue June 2000 11-181 DDM-2000 FiberReach...
  • Page 742 RTRV-PM-VT1 Page RTRV-PM-VT1 NAME rtrv-pm-vt1: Retrieve Performance Monitoring VT1.5 INPUT FORMAT rtrv-pm-vt1: Address ; DESCRIPTION This command displays parameter data associated with more VT1.5 channels terminating DS1, DS1PM, T1EXT circuit pack. This command available only VT1.5 performance monitoring feature set-feat command. NOTE: slots equipped...
  • Page 743 RTRV-PM-VT1 Page RTRV-PM-VT1 output report appears follows: output parameters are: This shows address VT1.5 signal. Address This indicates time system clock when data Start Time collection started. This indicates number VT1.5 errored seconds (ES) during data collection interval that started time reported previous...

  • Page 744: Rtrv-Pmthres-Vt1

    RTRV-PM-VT1 Page RTRV-PM-VT1 asterisk following count parameter indicates that threshold crossing occurred that parameter. This command only used feature enabled vtpm command. this feature enabled, following denial set-feat message will displayed: this command entered DDM-2000 system loaded with release software that does currently...
  • Page 745 RTRV-PMTHRES-LINE Page RTRV-PMTHRES-LINE NAME rtrv-pmthres-line: Retrieve Performance Monitoring Threshold Line INPUT FORMAT rtrv-pmthres-line; DESCRIPTION This command displays system’s current OC-1 (26-type), OC-3 (28-type), OC-12 (29-type) and/or (22-type) OLIUs line performance parameter thresholds, command. 28-type OLIU circuit pack set-pmthres-line available with Release later releases.
  • Page 746 RTRV-PMTHRES-LINE Page RTRV-PMTHRES-LINE This parameter displays Coding Violations threshold values coding violation counts OC-3 lines. This parameter displays Coding Violations threshold values coding violation counts OC-1 lines. This parameter displays Errored Seconds threshold values B2ES count. This parameter displays Errored Seconds Type threshold...
  • Page 747 RTRV-PMTHRES-SECT Page RTRV-PMTHRES-SECT NAME rtrv-pmthres-sect: Retrieve Performance Monitoring Threshold Section INPUT FORMAT rtrv-pmthres-sect; DESCRIPTION This command displays system’s current section performance parameter thresholds, set-pmthres-sect command. output report appears follows: output parameters are: Severely Errored Frame Seconds This parameter displays threshold values SEFS count.
  • Page 748 RTRV-PMTHRES-STS1 Page RTRV-PMTHRES-STS1 NAME rtrv-pmthres-sts1: Retrieve Performance Monitoring Threshold STS-1 INPUT FORMAT rtrv-pmthres-sts1; DESCRIPTION This command retrieves system’s STS-1 path performance monitoring thresholds, set-pmthres-sts1 command. output report appears follows: first column report contains names path performance monitoring parameters. second third columns contain quarter-hour...
  • Page 749 RTRV-PMTHRES-STS1 Page RTRV-PMTHRES-STS1 This parameter shows threshold number severely B3SES errored seconds. This parameter shows threshold unavailable seconds B3UAS service. RELATED COMMANDS init-pm set-pmthres-sts1 rtrv-pm-sts1 rtrv-pm-tca Issue June 2000 11-189 DDM-2000 FiberReach...
  • Page 750 RTRV-PMTHRES-T1 Page RTRV-PMTHRES-T1 NAME rtrv-pmthres-t1: Retrieve Performance Monitoring Threshold INPUT FORMAT rtrv-pmthres-t1; DESCRIPTION This command displays current path line performance parameter thresholds shelf command, available set-pmthres-t1 only performance monitoring feature set-feat command. output report appears follows: 11-190 Issue June 2000 DDM-2000 FiberReach...
  • Page 751 RTRV-PMTHRES-T1 Page RTRV-PMTHRES-T1 output parameters are: This parameter shows daily threshold Errored Seconds-Line line errored seconds. Beginning with FiberReach Release 2.1, this parameter will also show quarter-hour threshold value. Code Violations-Path This parameter shows daily threshold path code violations encoded paths.
  • Page 752 RTRV-PMTHRES-T1 Page RTRV-PMTHRES-T1 Errored Seconds-Path This parameter shows daily threshold path errored seconds end. This parameter will also show quarter-hour threshold value. Severely Errored Seconds-Path This parameter shows daily threshold path severely errored seconds end. This parameter will also show quarter-hour threshold value.
  • Page 753 RTRV-PMTHRES-T1 Page RTRV-PMTHRES-T1 RELATED COMMANDS rtrv-feat set-feat set-pmthres-t1 Issue June 2000 11-193 DDM-2000 FiberReach...
  • Page 754 RTRV-PMTHRES-T3 Page RTRV-PMTHRES-T3 NAME rtrv-pmthres-t3: Retrieve Performance Monitoring Threshold INPUT FORMAT rtrv-pmthres-t3; DESCRIPTION This command displays system’s current performance parameter thresholds, set-pmthres-t3 command. Starting with FiberReach Release 3.1, this command allowed shelf equipped with 28-type OLIUs Main circuit packs Function unit slots.
  • Page 755 RTRV-PMTHRES-T3 Page RTRV-PMTHRES-T3 & threshold zero indicates that thresholding disabled. output parameters are: These parameters display threshold coding violations count line B3ZS data. negative value this parameter indicates that threshold specified terms equivalent error ratio (BER) These parameters display threshold errored seconds count...
  • Page 756 RTRV-PMTHRES-T3 Page RTRV-PMTHRES-T3 These parameters display threshold P-bit coding violation counts. This path parameter that applies incoming signal from both DSX-3 fiber. negative threshold value indicates that coding violation threshold specified terms equivalent These parameters display threshold F&M coding FMCV violation counts.
  • Page 757 RTRV-PMTHRES-T3 Page RTRV-PMTHRES-T3 These parameters display threshold far-end C-bit ESPFE errored seconds counts. This path parameter that applies incoming signal from both DSX-3 fiber. These parameters display threshold far-end C-bit SESPFE severely errored seconds counts. This path parameter that applies incoming signal from...

  • Page 758: Retrieve

    RTRV-PMTHRES-VT1 Page RTRV-PMTHRES-VT1 NAME rtrv-pmthres-vt1: Retrieve Performance Monitoring Threshold VT1.5 INPUT FORMAT rtrv-pmthres-vt1; DESCRIPTION This command displays current VT1.5 path performance parameter thresholds shelf command, set-pmthres-vt1 available only VT1.5 performance monitoring feature enabled set-feat command. output report appears follows: report, threshold zero indicates...
  • Page 759 RTRV-PMTHRES-VT1 Page RTRV-PMTHRES-VT1 This command only used feature enabled vtpm command. this feature enabled, following denial set-feat message will displayed: this command entered DDM-2000 loaded with release software that does currently support this feature, following denial message will displayed: RELATED COMMANDS rtrv-feat set-feat...
  • Page 760 RTRV-SECU Page RTRV-SECU NAME rtrv-secu: Retrieve Security INPUT FORMAT rtrv-secu; DESCRIPTION This command retrieves ports security timeout information. Starting with FiberReach Release 3.0, this command will also report users currently logged into Network Element ports, well users logged X.25 PVCs and/or SVCs only if...
  • Page 761 RTRV-SECU Page RTRV-SECU FiberReach Release later releases, output report appears follows: FiberReach Release later releases, output report appears follows: NOTE: section report (CIT/DCC, over CIT) bottom section (TL1 DCC) separated dotted line. output parameters are: Access link address interface. Access Link Valid Addresses:...
  • Page 762 RTRV-SECU Page RTRV-SECU parameter value reported when Access porttype Link This will designated " " (blank). This parameter available starting with FiberReach baudrate Release 4.0. specifies baudrate which messages received/transmitted. values this parameter are: (Default), 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 This parameter reported, only...
  • Page 763 RTRV-SECU Page RTRV-SECU This section available starting with FiberReach Release 3.0. This section report will list users logged dcc. Starting with FiberReach Release 3.1, this section report will displayed second (bottom) section underneath dotted line (------), will include information addressed information title this...

  • Page 764: Rtrv-State-Eqpt

    RTRV-STATE-EQPT Page RTRV-STATE-EQPT NAME rtrv-state-eqpt: Retrieve State Equipment INPUT FORMAT rtrv-state-eqpt[: Address ]; DESCRIPTION This command displays slot, port, protection switching state information network element (NE). NOTE: slots equipped with different pack types (for example, during upgrade), report will include data what considered...
  • Page 765 RTRV-STATE-EQPT Page RTRV-STATE-EQPT output parameters are: Address address slot. Address Circuit Pack Circuit pack circuit pack name. hyphen means applicable equipped. Port State(s) state signal, from interface DS-1, DS-3 signals (starting with FiberReach Release 3.1, when equipped with circuit packs Function unit slots),...

  • Page 766: Ring Applications

    RTRV-STATE-EQPT Page RTRV-STATE-EQPT channels outgoing fiber also active. This determined using rtrv-state- command remote systems. path main OLIU slot, this means that ring path active-fn protection switching currently being done this pack, this pack choosing each active ring channel from either ring sending...
  • Page 767 RTRV-STATE-EQPT Page RTRV-STATE-EQPT automatic manual switches will done until forced forced switch reset. APS-pack failure Automatic protection switching occurred circuit pack failure. APS-automatic lock Traffic forced held onto protection pack, unable revert service pack until midnight. This occurs following four automatic switches from...

  • Page 768: Rtrv-State-Path

    RTRV-STATE-PATH Page RTRV-STATE-PATH NAME rtrv-state-path: Retrieve State Path INPUT FORMAT rtrv-state-path[: Address ]; DESCRIPTION This command displays signal path state information path-protected signals dropped network element (NE). determine which transmitted ring channels outgoing fiber active, necessary also the rtrv-state-eqpt command remote systems.
  • Page 769 RTRV-STATE-PATH Page RTRV-STATE-PATH output report appears follows: output parameters are: The address VT1.5 STS-1 equipped with Address circuit packs Function unit slots) report always displays both Ring Ring addresses. This column indicates whether associated Ring path (receive into local main-1) [receive into local...
  • Page 770 RTRV-STATE-PATH Page RTRV-STATE-PATH requests, only requests will appear report. conditions will remain active while condition that caused switch still exists. When that failure clears, condition changed blank other requests exist. NOTE: Whenever VT1.5 cross-connection made, STS-1 path actually terminated. When STS-1 address entered,...

  • Page 771: Rtrv-State-Sts1

    RTRV-STATE-STS1 Page RTRV-STATE-STS1 NAME rtrv-state-sts1: Retrieve State STS-1 Channels INPUT FORMAT rtrv-state-sts1[: Address ]; DESCRIPTION This command retrieves STS-1 channel states. NOTE channel state will reported when path channel either switched terminated. NOTE slots equipped with different pack types (for example, during upgrade),...
  • Page 772 RTRV-STATE-STS1 Page RTRV-STATE-STS1 output report appears follows. NOTE: empty report displayed there cross-connections channels monitored (for example, pass-through cross-connections). output parameters are: Address address STS-1 channel. Address Channel State state STS-1 channel identified Channel State address field. have following values: Automatic.
  • Page 773 RTRV-STATE-STS1 Page RTRV-STATE-STS1 RELATED COMMANDS dlt-crs-sts1 ent-crs-sts1 rtrv-crs-sts1 rtrv-state-vt1 set-state-sts1 Issue June 2000 11-213 DDM-2000 FiberReach...

  • Page 774: Rtrv-State-Vt1

    RTRV-STATE-VT1 Page RTRV-STATE-VT1 NAME rtrv-state-vt1: Retrieve State VT1.5 Channels INPUT FORMAT rtrv-state-vt1[: Address ]; DESCRIPTION This command retrieves VT1.5 channel states. NOTE: slots equipped with different pack types (for example, during upgrade), this report will include data what considered time valid system pack...
  • Page 775 RTRV-STATE-VT1 Page RTRV-STATE-VT1 output report appears follows. Only channels that cross-connected will displayed output report. output parameters are: Address address VT1.5 channel. Address Channel State state VT1.5 channel identified Channel State address field. have following values: Automatic. There good signal this auto channel.
  • Page 776 RTRV-STATE-VT1 Page RTRV-STATE-VT1 RELATED COMMANDS dlt-crs-sts1 dlt-crs-vt1 ent-crs-sts1 ent-crs-vt1 rtrv-crs-sts1 rtrv-crs-vt1 rtrv-state-sts1 set-state-vt1 11-216 Issue June 2000 DDM-2000 FiberReach...

  • Page 777: Rtrv-Sts1

    RTRV-STS1 Page RTRV-STS1 NAME rtrv-sts1: Retrieve STS1 INPUT FORMAT rtrv-sts1[: Address ]; DESCRIPTION This command retrieves three types provisioned parameters STS-1 channels. parameter types are: signal degrade alarm threshold signal fail alarm threshold alarm level sa/nsa path condition NOTE: slots equipped with different...
  • Page 778 RTRV-STS1 Page RTRV-STS1 When command entered with default address output report appears follows: address anything then report appears follows: 11-218 Issue June 2000 DDM-2000 FiberReach...
  • Page 779 RTRV-STS1 Page RTRV-STS1 output parameters are: This signal degrade threshold value. SignalDegrade This signal failure threshold value. SignalFailure This address provisioned channel. address more columns information will show alarm Alarm values service affecting (SA) non-service affecting (NSA) alarms. alarms have following values: Critical...

  • Page 780: Rtrv-Sync

    RTRV-SYNC Page RTRV-SYNC NAME rtrv-sync: Retrieve Synchronization INPUT FORMAT rtrv-sync; DESCRIPTION This command displays provisioning operational information synchronization attributes DDM-2000, set-sync command. following pages show output reports this command explain various fields reports. Output reports will vary according provisioned timing mode software release.
  • Page 781 RTRV-SYNC Page RTRV-SYNC following report FiberReach. output parameters reports follows. Some parameters apply reports. output parameters are: sync source optical line provisioned from which shelf Sync Source timing derived. main-1 main-2 choices Sync Source (except dash) followed this message: Sync Source LineTimed shelf.
  • Page 782 RTRV-SYNC Page RTRV-SYNC Main (Release 4.0), timing derived from OC-12 payload carrying signal Main slots. Active Timing Mode Active timing mode active timing synchronization mode system. value values listed previously following: Provisioned Mode Timing generator operating holdover Holdover mode because provisioned references available...
  • Page 783 RTRV-SYNC Page RTRV-SYNC timing reference failure) remain this mode until manually switched back provisioned timing mode switch-sync command. inserted failure exists that prohibits tracing output incoming optical line. also inserted certain incoming synchronization message quality levels active timing source. — Indicates slot auto...
  • Page 784 RTRV-SYNC Page RTRV-SYNC interface suitable Don’t synchronization timing (Quality Level Timing Looped Back network element connected this interface line-timed from (Quality Level interface receiving timing from Stratum Stratum clock source (Quality Level Internal Clock This interface receiving timing from system holdover free running...
  • Page 785 RTRV-SYNC Page RTRV-SYNC Kbyte Sbyte disabled NOTE: OC-1 interfaces, this column will only display Kbyte. OC-3 OC-12 interfaces Main, this column will display either Kbyte, Sbyte or disabled. Sync Autoreconfiguration This capability allows system choose best timing source when provisioned line timing.

  • Page 786: Rtrv-Trace-Sts1

    RTRV-TRACE-STS1 Page RTRV-TRACE-STS1 NAME rtrv-trace-sts1: Retrieve Path Trace Characteristics INPUT FORMAT rtrv-trace-sts1: Address ; DESCRIPTION This command retrieves provisioned transmit receive path traces cross-connected STS-1 channel. command also outputs actual receive path trace, status path trace. NOTE: OC-3 FiberReach (starting with Release 3.1)
  • Page 787 RTRV-TRACE-STS1 Page RTRV-TRACE-STS1 output report appears follows: output parameters are: This channel address SONET path terminating signal Address which path trace assigned. path trace status. This status report incoming trace. Status For rtrv-trace-sts1 messages, status have following values: Good. This indicates that INCTRC and...
  • Page 788 RTRV-TRACE-STS1 Page RTRV-TRACE-STS1 Expected incoming Path trace message. This indicates EXPTRC expected Path Trace (J1) content. Outgoing Path trace message. This identifies path trace message transmitted. STS-1 channel which command issued rtrv-trace-sts1 available, request will denied with following message: RELATED COMMANDS set-pthtrc-sts1 11-228...

  • Page 789: Rtrv-T1

    RTRV-T1 Page RTRV-T1 NAME rtrv-t1: Retrieve INPUT FORMAT rtrv-t1[: Address ]; DESCRIPTION This command displays configuration information attributes more ports, set-t1 command. When this command used FiberReach Release later port that associated with circuit pack, dashes will displayed parameters except Port Address, Alarm...
  • Page 790 RTRV-T1 Page RTRV-T1 output parameters are: Port Address address port. Port Address Line Coding line coding which have Line Coding value ami (alternate mark inversion) b8zs (AMI with bipolar 8-zero substitution). previous set-t1 command this parameter value that overrides circuit pack switch setting,...
  • Page 791 RTRV-T1 Page RTRV-T1 State state port. State following: In-service. valid signal from DSX-1 interface that being monitored. Automatic. system waiting valid auto signal from DSX-1 interface. Monitored nmon This column indicated performance-monitoring (PM) Mode mode interface following values: enabled this port disabled this...

  • Page 792: Rtrv-T3

    RTRV-T3 Page RTRV-T3 NAME rtrv-t3: Retrieve INPUT FORMAT rtrv-t3[: Address ]; DESCRIPTION This command displays port provisioning report ports, set-t3 command. Starting with FiberReach Release 3.1, this command applicable ONLY shelf equipped with 28-type OLIUs Main circuit packs Function unit slots.
  • Page 793 RTRV-T3 Page RTRV-T3 output parameters are: Port Address address port Port Address Mode violation monitor removal mode Mode signal. have following values: Monitor remove P-bit errors (default value). Monitor remove P-bit errors. Clear channel. monitor remove P-bit errors. indicates whether alarm indication signal...
  • Page 794 RTRV-T3 Page RTRV-T3 State state port with values: State In-service. valid signal from DSX-3 being monitored. Automatic. system waiting valid auto signal from DSX-3. Monitored nmon This column shows performance monitoring (PM) Mode mode interface, following values: enabled this port (default value).
  • Page 795 RTRV-T3 Page RTRV-T3 This parameter indicates type path PMON that Format will appear report. This parameter will appear only vmr or vm mode already been selected. This parameter have following values: When this value selected, pbit report will display counts SEFS well P-bit...

  • Page 796: Rtrv-Tl1Msgmap

    RTRV-TL1MSGMAP Page RTRV-TL1MSGMAP NAME rtrv-tl1msgmap: Retrieve Message Operation Systems INPUT FORMAT rtrv-tl1msgmap; DESCRIPTION This command displays table that associates Application Context Identifier (ACID) autonomous message types. This allows DDM-2000 network element direct messages proper destination. output report appears follows: < >...
  • Page 797 RTRV-TL1MSGMAP Page RTRV-TL1MSGMAP output parameters are: ACID Application Context assigned particular ACID SNPA SubNetwork Point Attachment x.25 channel. Each ACID defines type messages sent network element. Default MessageType mappings exist ACIDs supported DDM-2000. Supported ACID values are: tl1Maintenance tl1MemoryAdministration tl1Other1 tl1Test tl1PeerComm tl1Other2 .

  • Page 798: Rtrv-Ulsdcc-L3

    RTRV-ULSDCC-L3 Page RTRV-ULSDCC-L3 NAME rtrv-ulsdcc-l3: Retrieve Upper Layer Section Layer INPUT FORMAT rtrv-ulsdcc-l3; DESCRIPTION NOTE: This command page describes functionality rtrv-ulsdcc-l3 command FiberReach Release later TARP releases. This command currently used retrieve parameters Layers through stack, many which provisioned command. Layer parameters include...
  • Page 799 RTRV-ULSDCC-L3 Page RTRV-ULSDCC-L3 SONET systems, value 39840F to indicate that U.S. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) registration authority responsible assignment NSAP address. Where "xx" indicates 2-digit hexadecimal field value local NE’s NSAP. This part NSAP address specifies format rest NSAP address.
  • Page 800 RTRV-ULSDCC-L3 Page RTRV-ULSDCC-L3 Where "xx" indicates 2-digit hexadecimal Selector field value local NE’s NSAP. This part NSAP address used differentiate multiple NSAP addresses within system. value this field fixed, according usage; "AF" when TARP over CLNP. value "1D" when over CLNP.

  • Page 801: Rtrv-Ulsdcc-L4

    RTRV-ULSDCC-L4 Page RTRV-ULSDCC-L4 NAME rtrv-ulsdcc-l4: Retrieve Upper Layer Section Layer INPUT FORMAT rtrv-ulsdcc-l4[:tdc_rpt= tdc_rpt ]; DESCRIPTION NOTE: This command page describes functionality rtrv-ulsdcc-l4 command FiberReach Release later TARP releases. This command used retrieve parameters Layer stack, many which provisioned ent-ulsdcc-l4 command. Layer parameters include...
  • Page 802 RTRV-ULSDCC-L4 Page RTRV-ULSDCC-L4 After entering this command, output report appears follows: 11-242 Issue June 2000 DDM-2000 FiberReach...
  • Page 803 RTRV-ULSDCC-L4 Page RTRV-ULSDCC-L4 output parameters are: This only string under this string, following L4TM data parameters identified: This parameter reports TARP lifetime L4tlif parameter TARP PDUs originated local TARP lifetime specifies maximum number hops allowed TARP PDU. When this number hops exceeded, TARP...
  • Page 804 RTRV-ULSDCC-L4 Page RTRV-ULSDCC-L4 This header indicates that what follows 20-byte (40- L4AJ NSAP digit hex) NSAP address entry TARP Manually Adjacent list. maximum Manually Adjacent assigned Where "xxxxxx" indicates 6-digit ajidp hexadecimal field value Manually Adjacent Where "xx" indicates 2-digit hexadecimal ajdfi field...
  • Page 805 RTRV-ULSDCC-L4 Page RTRV-ULSDCC-L4 Where "xx" indicates 2-digit hexadecimal tdcdfi field value that manually entered into TDC. Where "xxxxxx" indicates 6-digit tdcorg hexadecimal NSAP’s Organization field value that manually entered into TARP Data Cache. specifies allocated Network Services Provider Code assigned ANSI-administered Registration Authority...
  • Page 806 RTRV-ULSDCC-L4 Page RTRV-ULSDCC-L4 Where "xx" indicates 2-digit hexadecimal tdcsel NSAP’s Selector field value that manually entered into TARP Data Cache. This parameter currently being reported "00". RELATED COMMANDS ent-ulsdcc-l4 ent-ulsdcc-l3 dlt-ulsdcc-l3 dlt-ulsdcc-l4 11-246 Issue June 2000 DDM-2000 FiberReach...

  • Page 807: Rtrv-Vt1

    RTRV-VT1 Page RTRV-VT1 NAME rtrv-vt1: Retrieve VT1.5 INPUT FORMAT rtrv-vt1[: Address ]; DESCRIPTION This command retrieves types provisioned parameters VT1.5 channels. parameter types are: Signal degrade alarm threshold Alarm level sa/nsa VT1.5 path condition (Reported only Release later). input parameter This parameter available...
  • Page 808 RTRV-VT1 Page RTRV-VT1 output report appears follows: Alarm Information reported only Release later. Release later, signal degrade value zero will appear report. output parameters are: This signal degrade threshold value. SignalDegrade This VT1.5 address provisioned channel. address more columns information will show Alarm...

  • Page 809: Set-Attr-Alm

    SET-ATTR-ALM Page SET-ATTR-ALM NAME set-attr-alm: Alarm Attribute INPUT FORMAT set-attr-alm[:almdel= AlarmDelay ][,clrdel= ClearDelay ][,pmn= PMN ]; DESCRIPTION This command sets alarm holdoff clear delays. input parameters are: AlarmDelay delay incoming signal equipment failures. almdel sets interval time that fault condition present before alarm...
  • Page 810 SET-ATTR-ALM Page SET-ATTR-ALM When input, this command will cause following confirmation message displayed: RELATED COMMANDS rtrv-attr-alm 11-250 Issue June 2000 DDM-2000 FiberReach...

  • Page 811: Set-Attr-Cont

    SET-ATTR-CONT Page SET-ATTR-CONT NAME set-attr-cont: Attribute Control INPUT FORMAT set-attr-cont: Address :desc= Description ; DESCRIPTION This command used provision (define) name environmental control points. input parameters are: Address identifies control point provisioned. There Address default this parameter. Valid Addresses: cont-{1-4} Description descriptive name...
  • Page 812 SET-ATTR-CONT Page SET-ATTR-CONT NOTE: This command will denied entered system whose CO/RT parameter (via command). following denial set-ne message will displayed: RELATED COMMANDS rtrv-attr-cont 11-252 Issue June 2000 DDM-2000 FiberReach...

  • Page 813: Set-Attr-Env

    SET-ATTR-ENV Page SET-ATTR-ENV NAME set-attr-env: Attribute Environment INPUT FORMAT set-attr-env: Address [:alm= Alarm ][,almtype= AlarmType ][,desc= Description ]; DESCRIPTION This command used provision (set) alarm level environmental input points. Active inputs appear entries alarm history reports local network element (NE) generate autonomous messages...
  • Page 814 SET-ATTR-ENV Page SET-ATTR-ENV following symbolic characters have special meanings either interface X.25/TL1 interface cannot included description: semicolon question mark sign space back slash exclamation point colon equal sign double quote comma " control characters special keys cannot included description. NOTE: This command will...

  • Page 815: Set-Date

    SET-DATE Page SET-DATE NAME set-date: Date Time INPUT FORMAT set-date:[date= Date ][,time= Time ]; DESCRIPTION This command sets date time. Executing this command will corrupt current quarter hour performance-monitoring (PM) bins. CAUTION: command scheduled execution action =install), apply the set-date command should issued...
  • Page 816 SET-DATE Page SET-DATE When input, this command will cause following confirmation message displayed: RELATED COMMANDS apply 11-256 Issue June 2000 DDM-2000 FiberReach...

  • Page 817: Set-Feat

    SET-FEAT Page SET-FEAT NAME set-feat: Feature INPUT FORMAT set-feat:feat= Feature ,act= Action ; DESCRIPTION This command enables user configure network element feature options that licensed use. NOTE: This command available privileged users only. input parameters are: Feature feature option available user, have feat...
  • Page 818 SET-FEAT Page SET-FEAT user fails remove equipment reprovision parameters associated with feature before disabling that feature, command will denied with following message: < > this command entered main OLIUs equipped, there place store backup copy feature options. Thus, command will denied with following...
  • Page 819 SET-FEAT Page SET-FEAT Disabling feature will cause following confirmation message displayed: < > RELATED COMMANDS rtrv-feat Issue June 2000 11-259 DDM-2000 FiberReach...

  • Page 820: Set-Fecom

    SET-FECOM Page SET-FECOM NAME set-fecom: Far-End Communications INPUT FORMAT set-fecom: Address [:com= Communications ][,nsus= NS/US ]; DESCRIPTION This command enables disables communication over section data communication channels (DCC). embedded overhead communications channel SONET line used end-to-end communications maintenance. carries alarm, control, status information...
  • Page 821 SET-FECOM Page SET-FECOM following chart shows default settings NS/US parameter: Rings Applications dcc-m1 dcc-m2 OC-1 OLIUs OC-3/OC-12 OLIUs FiberReach Release later when main OC-3 OC-12 interface provisioned identical mode using set- oc3 or set-oc12 commands settings both main interfaces same value with default...
  • Page 822 SET-FECOM Page SET-FECOM parameter changed, reset will caused following nsus confirmation message will displayed: RELATED COMMANDS rtrv-fecom rtrv-map-neighbor rtrv-map-network 11-262 Issue June 2000 DDM-2000 FiberReach...

  • Page 823: Set-Lgn

    SET-LGN Page SET-LGN NAME set-lgn: Login INPUT FORMAT set-lgn[:act= Action ]; DESCRIPTION This command enters, edits, deletes logins passwords. Prior first this command, default logins LUC01, LUC02 and LUC03 The default password DDM-2000. NOTE Some situations (for example, software upgrade circuit pack installation)
  • Page 824 SET-LGN Page SET-LGN users command modify their passwords. set-passwd input parameters are: Action following values: Enter login password pair (default value). Login enter case-sensitive alphanumeric string consisting minimum five maximum alphabetic characters and/or numbers. When entering login, type user privileged user general user...
  • Page 825 SET-LGN Page SET-LGN Change existing login and/or password edit passwd_age Password Aging interval: Starting with FiberReach Release 4.0, this parameter specifies period days after which user change his/her password. have value between 7 and 999 or value disables password aging feature (default).
  • Page 826 SET-LGN Page SET-LGN following screen shows dialog enter login: NOTE: Passwords will displayed when they entered. Starting with FiberReach Release 4.0, following screen shows dialog enter login: NOTE: password aging parameter, user entry <CR> initializes value 11-266 Issue June 2000 DDM-2000 FiberReach...
  • Page 827 SET-LGN Page SET-LGN following screen shows dialog edit login: Starting with FiberReach Release 4.0, following screen shows dialog edit login: NOTE: password aging parameter, user entry <CR> initializes value Issue June 2000 11-267 DDM-2000 FiberReach...
  • Page 828 SET-LGN Page SET-LGN following screen shows dialog delete login: login value does match valid login definition (syntactically incorrect), following message will appear: user once again enter login. user enters login that does match valid login definition, following denial message will displayed: 11-268 Issue...
  • Page 829 SET-LGN Page SET-LGN entered password value does match valid password definition (syntactically incorrect), following message will appear: Entry does follow rules passwords. Passwords must characters, with least alphabetic characters additionally, least symbolic characters allowed are: A..Z a..z, 0..9, symbolic characters, EXCEPT following: semicolon...
  • Page 830 SET-LGN Page SET-LGN attempt made privileged user login, following message will keep displaying until valid user type (general, maintenance, reports-only) entered: When user selects edit or delete option login login entered does exist, following message will displayed: < > user invokes this command...
  • Page 831 SET-LGN Page SET-LGN user attempts enter another login when maximum supported logins already exists, following denial message will appear: Starting with FiberReach Release 4.0, Network Element receives invalid value Password parameter, following denial message will displayed: RELATED COMMANDS rtrv-lgn set-passwd set-secu Issue June...

  • Page 832: Set-Link

    SET-LINK Page SET-LINK NAME set-link: Link Configuration INPUT FORMAT set-link:pg= pagelength ; DESCRIPTION This command sets configuration current user’s craft interface terminal (CIT) link. input parameter PageLength vertical size displayed page lines. value integer between with default page length zero, pager used system...

  • Page 833: Set-Ne

    SET-NE Page SET-NE NAME set-ne: Network Element INPUT FORMAT set-ne:tid= TID [,cort= CO/RT ][,idle= IdleChannelSignal ]; (For FiberReach Release earlier) set-ne:tid= TID [,rnestat= RneStat ][,almgrp= AlarmGroup ] [,agne= AGNE ][,cort= CO/RT ][,idle= IdleChannelSignal ]; (For FiberReach Release later) DESCRIPTION NOTE: This command page...
  • Page 834 SET-NE Page SET-NE CAUTION: Changing will cause active logins this dropped. logins this will have activated using value. This parameter valid starting with FiberReach Release 4.0. rnestat Remote Status (feature) have value enabled or this parameter value user will disabled enabled prompted almgrp and agne...
  • Page 835 SET-NE Page SET-NE low-speed slot equipped function unit STS-1 cross-connected. NOTE: recommended that user choose option this parameter, since SONET equipment capable detecting performing path protection switching when receiving VT/STS signal. CO/RT parameter (Central Office) cort (Remote Terminal) identifies system having characteristics values...
  • Page 836 SET-NE Page SET-NE Some command parameters backed main OLIU packs (tid, cort). attempt provision these parameters with main OLIU packs equipped will denied with following message: When this command entered, following confirmation message will displayed: Starting with FiberReach Release 4.0, when this command...
  • Page 837 SET-NE Page SET-NE Changing parameters will cause network element reset. cort Before these parameters changed, following caution message will displayed prior confirmation message: RELATED COMMANDS reset rlgn rtrv-ne rtrv-map-network ent-ulsdcc-l3 ent-ulsdcc-l4 Issue June 2000 11-277 DDM-2000 FiberReach...

  • Page 838: Set-Oc1

    SET-OC1 Page SET-OC1 NAME set-oc1: OC-1 Characteristics INPUT FORMAT set-oc1: Address [:dgr= SignalDegradeThreshold ] [,aisalm= Alarm ]; DESCRIPTION This command sets characteristics (parameters) specified OC-1 line. input parameters are: Address identifies OC-1 line(s). Address Valid OC-1 Addresses: all, main-{1,2,all} SignalDegradeThreshold specifies signal degrade...
  • Page 839 SET-OC1 Page SET-OC1 When input, this command will cause following confirmation request displayed (NonServiceAffecting will displayed Release later): RELATED COMMANDS rtrv-oc1 Issue June 2000 11-279 DDM-2000 FiberReach...

  • Page 840: Set-Oc3

    SET-OC3 Page SET-OC3 NAME set-oc3: OC-3 Characteristics INPUT FORMAT set-oc3:: Address [:dgr= SignalDegradeThreshold ] [,syncmsg= SynchronizationMessaging][, aisalm= Alarm]; (FiberReach Release 3.1) set-oc3: Address [:dgr= SignalDegradeThreshold ] [,syncmsg= SynchronizationMessaging ][,aisalm= Alarm ][,dcc= DccMode ]; (FiberReach Release later) DESCRIPTION This command sets several characteristics (parameters)
  • Page 841 SET-OC3 Page SET-OC3 Synchronization messaging allows timing reconfigured network upon node fiber failure. This parameter following values: This default value. When this option selected, Kbyte both byte sync messages transmitted, only byte received interpreted sync messaging. When this option selected, only byte sent...
  • Page 842 SET-OC3 Page SET-OC3 mode transmit bytes copied bridged both OC-3 lines, K-bytes configured protection mode. receive direction only bytes from active line processed. Assignment this parameter always affects both OC-3 lines. This parameter prompted user enters Function unit Address value. attempt made execute...
  • Page 843 SET-OC3 Page SET-OC3 Beginning with FiberReach Release (when shelf equipped with 28-type OLIUs Main unit slots), this command will cause following confirmation request displayed: When this command input FiberReach Rlease later, following confirmation request displayed: The DccMode parameter appears R4.0 later releases.

  • Page 844: Set-Oc12

    SET-OC12 Page SET-OC12 NAME set-oc12: OC-12 Characteristics INPUT FORMAT set-oc12: Address [:dgr= SignalDegrade ][,syncmsg= SynchronizationMessaging ] [,aisalm= Alarm [, ] dcc= DccMode ]; DESCRIPTION This command sets Signal Degrade (DGR) threshold, line alarm level Synch messaging status specified OC-12 line pair.
  • Page 845 SET-OC12 Page SET-OC12 ring releases, alarm values Main-1 Main-2 aisalm (when using 29-type OLIU circuit packs Main unit slots) must same. change address will also made automatically other software. Alarm provisioned alarm level non-service affecting (NSA) OC-12 line following values: Critical alarm Major...
  • Page 846 SET-OC12 Page SET-OC12 This command will cause following confirmation request displayed: The DccMode parameter appear R4.0 later releases. RELATED COMMANDS rtrv-oc12 rtrv-sync 11-286 Issue June 2000 DDM-2000 FiberReach...

  • Page 847: Set-Passwd

    SET-PASSWD Page SET-PASSWD NAME set-passwd: Password INPUT FORMAT set-passwd; DESCRIPTION This command changes user’s password. users change their passwords. Privileged users change other users’ passwords using set-lgn command. Starting with FiberReach Release 4.0, this command used also change user’s password when his/her password...
  • Page 848 SET-PASSWD Page SET-PASSWD valid password case-sensitive ASCII string containing minimum maximum characters. password must also include least numeric characters symbolic (non-alphabetic non-numeric) character. following symbolic characters have special meanings either User Interface x.25 interface cannot included password: semicolon question mark sign space colon...
  • Page 849 SET-PASSWD Page SET-PASSWD user once again enter password. user tries again enter password that does match valid password definition, following denial message will displayed: user changing password password entered does match present valid password, will rejected user will prompted again. user allowed only...
  • Page 850 SET-PASSWD Page SET-PASSWD RELATED COMMANDS rtrv-lgn set-lgn set-secu 11-290 Issue June 2000 DDM-2000 FiberReach...

  • Page 851: Set-Pmthres-Line

    SET-PMTHRES-LINE Page SET-PMTHRES-LINE NAME set-pmthres-line: Performance Monitoring Threshold Line INPUT FORMAT set-pmthres-line: [QHB2CVOC12= nnnnn ][,DayB2CVOC12= nnnnnn ] [QHB2CVOC3= nnnnn ][,DayB2CVOC3= nnnnn ] [,QHB2CVOC1= nnnnn ][,DayB2CVOC1= nnnnn ] [,QHB2ES= nnn ][,DayB2ES= nnnnn ] [,QHB2ESA= nnn ][,DayB2ESA= nnnnn ] [,QHB2ESB= nnn ][,DayB2ESB= nnnnn ] [,QHB2SES= nnn ][,DayB2SES= nnnnn ] [,QHB2UAS= nnn ][,DayB2UAS= nnnnn ];...
  • Page 852 SET-PMTHRES-LINE Page SET-PMTHRES-LINE positive value this parameter sets threshold DayB2CVOC12 OC-12 coding violation count daily basis. This parameter range through corresponding −10 −7 BERs through integer range through 5315040. default value 531504. negative value this parameter sets parity count threshold terms equivalent expressed...
  • Page 853 SET-PMTHRES-LINE Page SET-PMTHRES-LINE This parameter sets threshold type count DayB2ES daily basis. This parameter integer with range through 65535 default value 900. This parameter sets threshold type count QHB2ESA quarter-hourly basis. This parameter integer with range through default value This parameter sets threshold...
  • Page 854 SET-PMTHRES-LINE Page SET-PMTHRES-LINE Line Errors Threshold Equivalent Min. Threshold Equivalent Threshold (QHB2CVOC3 DayB2CVOC3) 13841 1328736 1384 132874 13287 1329 Line Errors Threshold Equivalent Min. Threshold Equivalent Threshold (QHB2CVOC1 DayB2CVOC1) 4613 442848 44285 4428 RELATED COMMANDS init-pm rtrv-pm-line rtrv-pm-tca rtrv-pmthres-line set-pmthres-sect 11-294 Issue June...

  • Page 855: Set-Pmthres-Sect

    SET-PMTHRES-SECT Page SET-PMTHRES-SECT NAME set-pmthres-sect: Performance Monitoring Threshold Section INPUT FORMAT set-pmthres-sect:[Qhsefs= nn ][,Daysefs= nnnn ]; DESCRIPTION This command sets performance-monitoring thresholds OC-1 (available Release later releases) sections, well activating deactivating processing threshold crossings performance parameters. input parameters are: This parameter sets threshold...

  • Page 856: Set-Pmthres-Sts1

    SET-PMTHRES-STS1 Page SET-PMTHRES-STS1 NAME set-pmthres-sts1: Performance Monitoring Threshold STS-1 INPUT FORMAT set-pmthres-sts1:[QHB3CV= nnnn ][,DayB3CV= nnnnnn ][,QHB3ES= nnn ] [,DayB3ES= nnnnn ][,QHB3ESA= nnn ][,DayB3ESA= nnnnn ][,QHB3ESB= nnn ] [,DayB3ESB= nnnnn ][,QHB3SES= nn ][,DayB3SES= nnnn ][,QHB3UAS= nn ] [,DayB3UAS= nnnn ]; where nnn... numerical value given...
  • Page 857 SET-PMTHRES-STS1 Page SET-PMTHRES-STS1 This parameter sets threshold type errored seconds QHB3ESA quarter-hourly basis. type second with single error. This parameter integer range through default value This parameter sets threshold type errored seconds DayB3ESA daily basis. type second with single error. This parameter integer...
  • Page 858 SET-PMTHRES-STS1 Page SET-PMTHRES-STS1 following table shows error counts equivalent different thresholds. STS-1 Path Errors Threshold Equivalent Min. Threshold Equivalent Threshold (QHB3CV DayB3CV) 4510 432960 43296 4330 RELATED COMMANDS init-pm rtrv-pmthres-sts1 rtrv-pm-sts1 rtrv-pm-tca 11-298 Issue June 2000 DDM-2000 FiberReach...

  • Page 859: Set-Pmthres-T1

    SET-PMTHRES-T1 Page SET-PMTHRES-T1 NAME set-pmthres-t1: Performance Monitoring Threshold INPUT FORMAT set-pmthres-t1:[QHESL= nnn ][DayESL= nnnnn ][,QHCVPSF= nnnnn ][,DayCVPSF= nnnnnnn ] [,QHCVPESF= nnnnn ][,DayCVPESF= nnnnnnn ][,QHESP= nnn ][DayESP= nnnnn ] [,QHSESP= nn ][,DaySESP= nnnn ][,QHUASP= nn ][,DayUASP= nnnn ] [,QHCVPFE= nnnnn ][,DayCVPFE= nnnnnnn ][,QHESPFE= nnn ][,DayESPFE= nnnnn ] [,QHSESPFE= nn ][,DaySESPFE= nnnn ][,QHUASPFE= nn ][,DayUASPFE= nnnn ] where nnn..
  • Page 860 SET-PMTHRES-T1 Page SET-PMTHRES-T1 This parameter sets threshold code violations path DayCVPSF (CVPSF) count daily basis. negative value this parameter indicates that code violation count threshold specified terms equivalent expressed logarithm base This parameter range −8 −5 through corresponding BERs through integer range through...
  • Page 861 SET-PMTHRES-T1 Page SET-PMTHRES-T1 This parameter sets threshold code violations path QHCVPFE far-end (CVPFE) count quarter-hourly basis. negative value this parameter indicates that code violation count threshold specified terms equivalent expressed logarithm base This parameter range −8 −5 through corresponding BERs through integer range...
  • Page 862 SET-PMTHRES-T1 Page SET-PMTHRES-T1 following tables show error counts equivalent different thresholds. Coding Violations-Path (SF) Threshold Equivalent Min. Threshold Equivalent Threshold (QHCVP DayCVP) 6912 Coding Violations-Path (ESF) Threshold Equivalent Min. Threshold Equivalent Threshold (QHCVP DayCVP) 13842 1328832 1384 132883 13288 1329 This command only...
  • Page 863 SET-PMTHRES-T1 Page SET-PMTHRES-T1 this command entered DDM-2000 loaded with release software that does currently support this feature, following denial message will displayed: RELATED COMMANDS rtrv-feat rtrv-pmthres-t1 set-feat Issue June 2000 11-303 DDM-2000 FiberReach...

  • Page 864: Set-Pmthres-T3

    SET-PMTHRES-T3 Page SET-PMTHRES-T3 NAME set-pmthres-t3: Performance Monitoring Threshold INPUT FORMAT set-pmthres-t3:[QHCVL= nnnnn ][,DayCVL= nnnnnnn ][,QHESL= nnn ] [,DayESL= nnnnn ][,QHSESL= nn ][,DaySESL= nnnn ][,QHSEFS= nn ] [,DaySEFS= nnnn ][,QHPCV= nnnnn ][,DayPCV= nnnnnnn ] [,QHFMCV= nnnnn ][,DayFMCV= nnnnnnn ][,QHCP= nnnnn ][,DayCP= nnnnnnn ] [,QHESP= nnn ][,DayESP= nnnnn ][,QHSESP= nn ][,DaySESP= nnnn ] [,QHUASP= nn ][,DayUASP= nnnn ][,QHSEFSFE= nn ][,DaySEFSFE= nnnn ] [,QHCPFE= nnnnn ][,DayCPFE= nnnnnnn ][,QHESPFE= nnn ][,DayESPFE= nnnnn ]...
  • Page 865 SET-PMTHRES-T3 Page SET-PMTHRES-T3 −10 −7 BERs through integer range through 16383. default value This parameter sets threshold coding violations count DayCVL daily basis line B3ZS data. negative value this parameter indicates that threshold specified terms equivalent expressed logarithm base This parameter range through...
  • Page 866 SET-PMTHRES-T3 Page SET-PMTHRES-T3 This parameter sets threshold coding violations count DayPCV daily basis type format. type selected pbit using command. This path parameter that set-t3 applies incoming signal from both DSX-3 fiber. negative value this parameter indicates that parity count threshold specified terms...
  • Page 867 SET-PMTHRES-T3 Page SET-PMTHRES-T3 parameter range through corresponding BERs −10 −7 through integer range through 1048575. default value 3820. This parameter sets threshold errored seconds count QHESP quarter-hourly basis pbit, fmbit and type cpbit formats. type selected using command. This set-t3 path parameter that...
  • Page 868 SET-PMTHRES-T3 Page SET-PMTHRES-T3 This parameter sets threshold severely errored frame QHSEFSFE seconds count quarter-hourly basis far-end cpbit type format. type selected using set-t3 command. This parameter monitored reading received X-bits C-bit parity frame. This path parameter that applies incoming signal from both DSX-3...
  • Page 869 SET-PMTHRES-T3 Page SET-PMTHRES-T3 fiber. This parameter integer range through 65535 with default value 250. This parameter sets threshold severely errored QHSESPFE seconds count quarter-hourly basis far-end cpbit type format. type selected using set-t3 command. This path parameter that applies incoming signal from both...
  • Page 870 SET-PMTHRES-T3 Page SET-PMTHRES-T3 Line Coding Violations Threshold Equivalent Min. Threshold Equivalent Threshold (QHCVL DayCVL) 4026 386519 38651 3865 RELATED COMMANDS init-pm rtrv-pm-t3 rtrv-pm-tca rtrv-pmthres-t3 set-t3 11-310 Issue June 2000 DDM-2000 FiberReach...

  • Page 871: Set-Pmthres-Vt1

    SET-PMTHRES-VT1 Page SET-PMTHRES-VT1 NAME set-pmthres-vt1: Performance Monitoring Threshold VT1.5 INPUT FORMAT set-pmthres-vt1:[QHV5ES= nnnnn ][,DayV5ES= nnnnnnn ][,QHV5SES= nnn ] [,DayV5SES= nnnnn ][,QHV5UAS= nnn ][,DayV5UAS= nnnnn ]; where nnn..numerical value range given following parameter descriptions. NOTE: Parameters shown upper-case letters readability. Parameters entered either...
  • Page 872 SET-PMTHRES-VT1 Page SET-PMTHRES-VT1 This parameter sets threshold unavailable second QHV5UAS (UAS) count quarter-hourly basis. This parameter integer with range through default value This parameter sets threshold unavailable second DayV5UAS (UAS) count daily basis. This parameter integer with range through 4095 default value This...
  • Page 873 SET-SECU Page SET-SECU NAME set-secu: Security INPUT FORMAT set-secu: Address [:[sec= Security ][,to= Timeout ]}; set-secu: Address [:[porttype= Porttype ][,baudrate= Baudrate ] [,echo= echo ][,sec= Security ][,to= Timeout ]]; DESCRIPTION This command configures network element (NE) system security each interface. Starting with FiberReach...
  • Page 874 SET-SECU Page SET-SECU Specifies baudrate which messages baudrate received/transmitted. values this parameter are: 1200, (Default), 2400, 4800, 9600 19200. This parameter prompted for, only parameter porttype value tl1. NOTE: result executing this command, baudrate parameter’s value changes, active login session specified port will...
  • Page 875 SET-SECU Page SET-SECU Timeout specifies time, minutes, before inactive session specified port automatically terminated. This value ranging from minutes default value minutes. Setting this parameter will disable timeout function. Execution this command security reasons affects subsequent attempts establish login sessions does affect currently...
  • Page 876 SET-SECU Page SET-SECU addition commands set-secu init-sys, rtrv-lgn, set-fecom, set-feat, set-lgn, set-sync, rtrv-passwd and rstr-passwd are restricted privileged users only. following commands also become restricted privileged users only when security enabled system: (copy program) cpy-prog (enter upper layer section DCC) ent-ulsdcc (initialize performance-monitoring)

  • Page 877: Set-Secu

    SET-SECU Page SET-SECU Entering this command change value porttype to tl1 will cause following confirmation message displayed: Entering this command change value porttype from tl1 to cit will cause following confirmation message displayed: Issue June 2000 11-317 DDM-2000 FiberReach...
  • Page 878 SET-SECU Page SET-SECU RELATED COMMANDS rtrv-lgn rtrv-secu set-fecom set-lgn 11-318 Issue June 2000 DDM-2000 FiberReach...

  • Page 879: Set-State-Sts1

    SET-STATE-STS1 Page SET-STATE-STS1 NAME set-state-sts1: State STS-1 Channels INPUT FORMAT set-state-sts1: Address :ps= PrimaryState ; DESCRIPTION This command sets states STS-1 channels. used turn monitoring signal failures maintenance signals specified channels. input parameters are: Address identifies STS-1 channel(s). Valid addresses are: Address shelf...
  • Page 880 SET-STATE-STS1 Page SET-STATE-STS1 cross-connection involving this channel deleted. primary state entered, following message will displayed: nmon following confirmation message will displayed after command entry: attempt made execute this command when incompatible OLIU packs exists Main, request will denied with following message: NOTE: STS-1...
  • Page 881 SET-STATE-STS1 Page SET-STATE-STS1 RELATED COMMANDS ent-crs-sts1 ent-crs-vt1 dlt-crs-sts1 dlt-crs-vt1 rtrv-crs-sts1 rtrv-state-sts1 set-state-vt1 Issue June 2000 11-321 DDM-2000 FiberReach...

  • Page 882: Set-State-T1

    SET-STATE-T1 Page SET-STATE-T1 NAME set-state-t1: Port State INPUT FORMAT set-state-t1: Address :ps= PrimaryState ; DESCRIPTION This command sets state ports. This command used turn alarm signal failures from specified port. input parameters are: Address identifies port(s). Address Valid Addresses (1x1 protected configuration): all,...
  • Page 883 SET-STATE-T1 Page SET-STATE-T1 primary state entered, following message will displayed: nmon following confirmation message will displayed after command entry: NOTE: STS-1 address provisioned, this command will skip silent STS-1 channels within those STS-1 channels that cross- connected passthrough, dropped terminated even cross- connected...

  • Page 884: Set-State-T3

    SET-STATE-T3 Page SET-STATE-T3 NAME set-state-t3: Port State INPUT FORMAT set-state-t3: Address :ps= PrimaryState ; DESCRIPTION This command sets state more ports. This command used turn alarm signal failures from specified port. Starting with FiberReach Release 3.1, this command allowed ONLY shelf equipped with...
  • Page 885 SET-STATE-T3 Page SET-STATE-T3 following confirmation message will displayed after command entry: RELATED COMMANDS rtrv-state-eqpt rtrv-t3 Issue June 2000 11-325 DDM-2000 FiberReach...

  • Page 886: Set-State-Vt1

    SET-STATE-VT1 Page SET-STATE-VT1 NAME set-state-vt1: State VT1.5 Channels INPUT FORMAT set-state-vt1: Address :ps= PrimaryState ; DESCRIPTION This command sets states VT1.5 channels within: OC-1 interfaces shelf equipped with 26-type OLIUs Main unit slots) OC-3 interfaces shelf equipped with 28-type OLIUs Main unit slots).
  • Page 887 SET-STATE-VT1 Page SET-STATE-VT1 cross-connection involving this channel deleted. primary state entered, following message will displayed: nmon following confirmation message will displayed after command entry: attempt made execute this command, when incompatible OLIU packs exists Main, request will denied with following message: NOTE: STS-1...
  • Page 888 SET-STATE-VT1 Page SET-STATE-VT1 RELATED COMMANDS dlt-crs-vt1 ent-crs-vt1 rtrv-crs-vt1 rtrv-state-vt1 set-state-sts1 11-328 Issue June 2000 DDM-2000 FiberReach...

  • Page 889: Set-Sts1

    SET-STS1 Page SET-STS1 NAME set-sts1: STS-1 Characteristics INPUT FORMAT set-sts1: Address :dgr= SignalDegrade :sfail= SignalFailure [,nsa= Alarm ] [,sa= Alarm ]; DESCRIPTION This command provisions following three types parameters STS-1 channels: Signal Degrade Alarm Threshold: This parameter only provisioned ring channels (for example,...
  • Page 890 SET-STS1 Page SET-STS1 specifies STS-1 channel terms sfail SignalFailure logarithm base Meeting exceeding this threshold "VT Path_Switched ring" considered signal fail condition, resulting insertion subsequently causing path protection switching. only valid address SignalFailure parameter This parameter have following values: threshold resulting insertion "VT...
  • Page 891 SET-STS1 Page SET-STS1 Provisioning parameters requires that least cross-connection exist specified address range command will execute, following message will displayed. attempt made execute this command, when incompatible OLIU packs exists Main, request will denied with following message: following confirmation message will displayed after...

  • Page 892: Set-Sync

    SET-SYNC Page SET-SYNC NAME set-sync: Synchronization Characteristics DESCRIPTION CAUTION: Execution this command affect service. This command provisions synchronization mode switching, synchronization source, when 26-type, 28-type (Starting with FiberReach Release 3.1) type OLIUs (Starting with FiberReach Release 4.0) timing hardware provisioned line timed.
  • Page 893 SET-SYNC Page SET-SYNC input parameters are: ModeSwitching have following values: mdsw Revertive mode switching (default value). revertive system switches holdover timing mode failure timing references, will automatically switch back provisioned timing mode (LineTimed after references becomes good. Nonrevertive mode switching. nonrevertive system switches...
  • Page 894 SET-SYNC Page SET-SYNC This parameter have following values: SyncAutoreconfiguration active. enabled SyncAutoreconfiguration active (default). disabled FiberReach Release later, when sync messages active the set-oc3 and/or set-oc12 command) user requests timing source LineTime source which sync message that does support timing, command will completed,...
  • Page 895 SET-SYNC Page SET-SYNC SyncAutoreconfiguration, several other parameters must before this feature enabled. these parameters set, SyncAutoreconfiguration request will denied with following message: <message reason> Valid message reasons include following: byte messages disabled Sync messages disabled. attempt made execute this command when incompatible OLIU...
  • Page 896 SET-SYNC Page SET-SYNC Starting with FiberReach Release 3.1, both Main unit slots equipped with either 28-type OLIUs, following confirmation message will displayed after command entry: above confirmation message applies also Main slots equipped with 29-type OLIUs (Release 4.0). When SyncAutoreconfiguration available value being...

  • Page 897: Set-T1

    SET-T1 Page SET-T1 NAME set-t1: Characteristics INPUT FORMAT set-t1: address [:lc= LineCode ][,alm= AlarmLevel ][,fth= FailureThreshold ] [,dlc= DLCBPVtoLOS ][,ais= AlarmIndicationSignal ][,pmmd= PMMode ] [,fmt= Format ]; DESCRIPTION CAUTION: Execution this command affect service. This command sets parameters more ports. These characteristics include...
  • Page 898 SET-T1 Page SET-T1 LineCode line coding which following: Alternate Mark Inversion (overrides linecode switch) Bipolar with Zero Substitution (overrides b8zs linecode switch) override linecode switch (default noOverride value). either ami or b8zs selected, line code will selected value software override will active even...
  • Page 899 SET-T1 Page SET-T1 AlarmIndicationSignal determines whether should inserted towards optical fiber when loss incoming signal detected. values yes and no default value is yes This parameter ignored parameter (described above) yes. This parameter sets mode ports supported pmmd performance-monitoring circuit pack.
  • Page 900 SET-T1 Page SET-T1 following confirmation message will displayed after command entry, when addressing packs without performance-monitoring capability: x */ following confirmation message will displayed after command entry when addressing packs with performance-monitoring capability addressing group packs using address: 11-340 Issue June 2000 DDM-2000...
  • Page 901 SET-T1 Page SET-T1 RELATED COMMANDS rtrv-t1 set-state-t1 Issue June 2000 11-341 DDM-2000 FiberReach...

  • Page 902: Set-T3

    SET-T3 Page SET-T3 NAME set-t3: Characteristics INPUT FORMAT set-t3: Address :[md= Mode ][,ais= AlarmIndicationSignal ][,alm= AlarmLevel ] [,fth= FailureThreshold ][,pmmd= PMMode ][,frame= Frame ][,fmt= Format ]; DESCRIPTION CAUTION: Execution this command affect service. This command sets characteristic parameters more ports. These characteristics include...
  • Page 903 SET-T3 Page SET-T3 value vm or vmr. AlarmIndicationSignal determines whether should inserted. value yes or no When yes: — inserted towards DSX-3 upon detection OC-3 loss signal path incoming from fiber. — inserted towards fiber upon detection incoming from DSX-3. NOTE: always inserted...
  • Page 904 SET-T3 Page SET-T3 Frame only used performance-monitoring (PM) frame BBG4/BBG4B, BBG11/BBG11B, BBG19 circuit packs. Setting this parameter does affect transmitted received signal. This parameter will appear only vmr or vm mode already been selected. This parameter have following values: incoming signal from both...
  • Page 905 SET-T3 Page SET-T3 following confirmation message will displayed after command entry NOTE: above display will only prompt alarm indication signal (AIS) Mode above display will only prompt PMMode, Frame Format Mode parameter vmr or vm. frame format options have both been selected, cpbit...
  • Page 906 SET-T3 Page SET-T3 following confirmation message will displayed after command entry when addressing group packs using address: multiple addresses specified, following caution message will printed immediately before confirmation request message: RELATED COMMANDS rtrv-t3 set-state-t3 11-346 Issue June 2000 DDM-2000 FiberReach...
  • Page 907 SET-TRACE-STS1 Page SET-TRACE-STS1 NAME set-trace-sts1: Path Trace Characteristics INPUT FORMAT set-trace-sts1: Address [:EXPTRC= Expectedincomingpathtrace] [, TRC= OutgoingPathTrace ]; DESCRIPTION This command assigns user-selectable alphanumeric character strings transmit receive path trace fields cross-connected STS-1 signal. allowed ASCII characters include letters "A" through "Z"...
  • Page 908 SET-TRACE-STS1 Page SET-TRACE-STS1 input parameters are: This STS-1 channel address SONET path terminating Address signal which path trace assigned. Valid Addresses (within OC-3 FiberReach Release later): m-{1-3,all} shelf equipped with 29-type (FiberReach Release 4.0) OLIU circuit packs Main unit slots, valid Main unit...
  • Page 909 SET-TRACE-STS1 Page SET-TRACE-STS1 attempt made path trace path other than terminated (BBG4B) circuit pack, request will denied with following message: attempt made execute this command, when incompatible OLIU packs exists Main, request will denied with following message: When input, this command will cause...
  • Page 910 SET-TRACE-STS1 Page SET-TRACE-STS1 RELATED COMMANDS rtrv-trace-sts1 rtrv-crs-sts1 set-sts1 11-350 Issue June 2000 DDM-2000 FiberReach...

  • Page 911: Set-Vt1

    SET-VT1 Page SET-VT1 NAME set-vt1: VT1.5 Characteristics INPUT FORMAT set-vt1: Address :dgr= SignalDegrade [,nsa= Alarm ][,sa= Alarm ]; DESCRIPTION This command provisions type parameters VT1.5 channels. They are: Signal Degrade Alarm Threshold This parameter provisioned only ring channels (that incoming VT1.5 channels optical...
  • Page 912 SET-VT1 Page SET-VT1 This parameter available FiberReach release later. provisioned alarm level non-service affecting path following values: Minor alarm (default) alarmed reported. This parameter available FiberReach Release later. This provisioned alarm level service affecting path following values: Major alarm (default ring channels) alarmed,...
  • Page 913 SET-VT1 Page SET-VT1 following confirmation message will displayed after command entry: < > < > < > attempt made execute this command, when incompatible OLIU packs exists Main, request will denied with following message: NOTE: STS-1 address provisioned, this command will skip silently...
  • Page 914 SWITCH-FN Page SWITCH-FN NAME switch-fn: Protection Switch Function Unit INPUT FORMAT switch-fn: Address :pri= Priority ; DESCRIPTION CAUTION: Execution this command affect service. Starting with FiberReach Release 3.1, this command allowed ONLY shelf equipped with 28-type OLIUs Main (BBG4/BBG4B) circuit packs Function unit...
  • Page 915 SWITCH-FN Page SWITCH-FN After entering this command, following confirmation message displayed: this command executed with priority inhibit or forced then automatic protection switching will disabled until this command executed again with priority reset. RELATED COMMANDS rtrv-state switch-line Issue June 2000 11-355 DDM-2000 FiberReach...

  • Page 916: Switch-Ls

    SWITCH-LS Page SWITCH-LS NAME switch-ls: Protection Switch Speed INPUT FORMAT switch-ls: Address :pri= Priority ; DESCRIPTION CAUTION: Execution this command affect service. This command controls operation low-speed circuit pack protection switching. input parameters are: address low-speed slot(s). Addresses either Address single low-speed slot...
  • Page 917 SWITCH-LS Page SWITCH-LS switched back service line further traffic switched from that specific service line protection line. lockout request either condition will remain effect until low-speed protection switch reset entered. Force switch protection low-speed slot unless forced there outstanding lockout forced switch request.
  • Page 918 SWITCH-LS Page SWITCH-LS address used with priority request will forced denied with following denial message: protection slot address used with priority request will manual denied with following denial message: protection slot address used with priority request will forced denied with following denial message:...
  • Page 919 SWITCH-LS Page SWITCH-LS switch request would place service onto protection circuit pack type that cannot protect service circuit pack, request will denied with following denial message: entry, following confirmation message displayed: this command executed with priority lockout or forced then automatic protection switching...

  • Page 920: Switch-Path-Sts1

    SWITCH-PATH-STS1 Page SWITCH-PATH-STS1 NAME switch-path-sts1: Switch Path STS-1 INPUT FORMAT switch-path-sts1: Address :pri= Priority ; DESCRIPTION This command controls STS-1 path switching path protected ring configurations. Path switching always unidirectional (one-way). This command allowed shelf equipped with 28-type (Release 3.1), type 29-type (Release...
  • Page 921 SWITCH-PATH-STS1 Page SWITCH-PATH-STS1 path address specified command equipped STS-1 channel drop, add/drop cross-connected, command will denied with following message: following message applies only Main unit slots shelf equipped with 29G-U OLIU circuit packs. path address specified command STS-1 channel that part STS-3c cross-connected...
  • Page 922 SWITCH-PATH-STS1 Page SWITCH-PATH-STS1 equal higher priority switch already exists addressed path, command will denied with following message: If -all appears address equal higher priority switch already exists some addressed paths, path part STS-3c cross- connected channel (only Main unit slots equipped with 29-type...
  • Page 923 SWITCH-PATH-STS1 Page SWITCH-PATH-STS1 After entering this command, following confirmation message displayed: RELATED COMMANDS rtrv-crs-sts1 rtrv-crs-vt1 rtrv-state-eqpt rtrv-state-path Issue June 2000 11-363 DDM-2000 FiberReach...

  • Page 924: Switch-Path-Vt1

    SWITCH-PATH-VT1 Page SWITCH-PATH-VT1 NAME switch-path-vt1: Switch Path VT1.5 INPUT FORMAT switch-path-vt1: Address :pri= Priority ; DESCRIPTION This command controls VT1.5 path switching path protected ring configurations. Path switching always unidirectional (one-way). input parameters are: Address address VT1.5 path currently carrying drop Address drop...
  • Page 925 SWITCH-PATH-VT1 Page SWITCH-PATH-VT1 path address specified command equipped VT1.5 cross- connected, command will denied with following message: path address specified command pass-through path, command will denied with following message: NOTE: pass-through path passes directly from OC-N receiver OC-N transmitter. service carried with this...
  • Page 926 SWITCH-PATH-VT1 Page SWITCH-PATH-VT1 Since DDM-2000 path switching unidirectional, user will receive following notification message confirmation request: RELATED COMMANDS rtrv-state-eqpt rtrv-state-path 11-366 Issue June 2000 DDM-2000 FiberReach...

  • Page 927: Switch-Sync

    SWITCH-SYNC Page SWITCH-SYNC NAME switch-sync: Protection Switch Synchronization INPUT FORMAT switch-sync:s= SyncFunction ,pri= Priority ; DESCRIPTION CAUTION: Execution this command affect service. This command controls operation synchronization protection switching. This command lets user control which synchronization reference used enables user switch synchronization reference...
  • Page 928 SWITCH-SYNC Page SWITCH-SYNC SyncFunction value priority value Switch from active SynchronizationSource manual standby source. synchronization source switch completed equippage alternate sources, command will denied with following message: this command executed with then automatic SyncFunction=mode protection switching will disabled until this command executed again...
  • Page 929 SWITCH-SYNC Page SWITCH-SYNC SyncFunction priority reset or inhibit entered, request will denied with following denial messages: this command entered both timing slots empty, command will denied following denial message will displayed: After entering this command, following confirmation message displayed: Issue June 2000 11-369...
  • Page 930 SWITCH-SYNC Page SWITCH-SYNC RELATED COMMANDS rtrv-state-eqpt rtrv-sync set-sync 11-370 Issue June 2000 DDM-2000 FiberReach...
  • Page 931 TEST-ALM Page TEST-ALM NAME test-alm: Test Office Alarms INPUT FORMAT test-alm:[md= Mode ][,r= Repeat ]; DESCRIPTION This command tests audible visible office alarms associated user panel LEDs. specific office alarm test turns specific alarm seconds turns seconds, after which office alarm reverts normal...

  • Page 932: Test-Alm

    TEST-ALM Page TEST-ALM following denial message will output test cannot performed other activity system: 11-372 Issue June 2000 DDM-2000 FiberReach...

  • Page 933: Test-Led

    TEST-LED Page TEST-LED NAME test-led: Test Indicators INPUT FORMAT test-led:[ Address ]:[r= Repeat ]; DESCRIPTION This command activates circuit pack user panel LEDs seconds then seconds off, after which reverts normal operation. This command does affect office alarms. This test also done pressing...

  • Page 934: Test-Sysctl

    TEST-SYSCTL Page TEST-SYSCTL NAME test-sysctl: Test System Controllers INPUT FORMAT test-sysctl; DESCRIPTION This command causes entire control system (system controller perform self-test. this command entered while transmission test test-trmsn- progress, following denial message will displayed: test, following messages will displayed. test passes, following...
  • Page 935 TEST-SYSCTL Page TEST-SYSCTL test fails, following message displayed, indicating that controller circuit pack failed: addition failure message, Fault failed circuit pack Major alarm user panel will illuminated, office alarm will activated. Issue June 2000 11-375 DDM-2000 FiberReach...

  • Page 936: Test-Trmsn-T1

    TEST-TRMSN-T1 Page TEST-TRMSN-T1 NAME test-trmsn-t1: Test Transmission INPUT FORMAT test-trmsn-t1: Address :[dirn= Direction ][,dur= Duration ]; DESCRIPTION CAUTION: Execution this command will affect service. This command causes insertion test signal selected channel DEMUX direction will affect service selected channel. This command sets automated...

  • Page 937: Automated Transmission Test Of Ds1

    TEST-TRMSN-T1 Page TEST-TRMSN-T1 Duration test minutes. This value range through with default value This command aborted pressing "CANcel" "DELete" while command progress. NOTE: Loopbacks fiber when testing direction will cause "inconsistent switches" alarm condition. alarm should ignored during loopback testing. avoid this alarm,...

  • Page 938: Automated Transmission Test Of Ds1 Signal In Demux Direction

    TEST-TRMSN-T1 Page TEST-TRMSN-T1 NEAR END FAR END OLIU OLIU Multiplexing Direction Demultiplexing Direction External Fiber External Internal Loopback Loopback Loopback Loopback Internal test signal Monitor Demultiplexing Direction Multiplexing Direction Loopback can be fiber loopback, internal loopback, or DSX external loopback Figure 11-5.
  • Page 939 TEST-TRMSN-T1 Page TEST-TRMSN-T1 output parameters are: address port Port direction transmission test Direction duration test minutes Duration Elapsed time test seconds Elapsed Time Total number errored seconds. Errored Seconds question mark rightmost character indicates Errored Seconds uncertain data because protection switch during test.
  • Page 940 TEST-TRMSN-T1 Page TEST-TRMSN-T1 When this command entered, following confirmation message displayed: RELATED COMMANDS opr-lpbk-t1 rls-lpbk-t1 11-380 Issue June 2000 DDM-2000 FiberReach...

  • Page 941: Test-Trmsn-T3

    TEST-TRMSN-T3 Page TEST-TRMSN-T3 NAME test-trmsn-t3: Test Transmission INPUT FORMAT test-trmsn-t3: Address :[dirn= Direction ][,dur= Duration ]; DESCRIPTION CAUTION: Execution this command will affect service. This command causes insertion test signal selected channel DEMUX direction will affect service selected channel. Starting with FiberReach Release...
  • Page 942 TEST-TRMSN-T3 Page TEST-TRMSN-T3 NOTE Loopbacks fiber when testing direction will cause "inconsistent switches" alarm condition. alarm should ignored during loopback testing. avoid this alarm, user disable prior performing this test. NOTE When addressed port BBG19 circuit pack, cross- connection between port OC-N ring...
  • Page 943 TEST-TRMSN-T3 Page TEST-TRMSN-T3 NEAR-END FAR-END OLIU OLIU DSX/T1 Internal Test Signal Multiplexing Direction Demultiplexing Direction Fiber Internal Loopback External Loopback Loopback Monitor Demultiplexing Direction Multiplexing Direction Loopback can be fiber loopback, internal loopback, DSX, or T1 carrier external loopback Figure 11-6.
  • Page 944 TEST-TRMSN-T3 Page TEST-TRMSN-T3 This command displays following output report: output parameters are: address port Port direction transmission test Direction duration test minutes Duration Elapsed time test seconds Elapsed Time Total number errored seconds. Errored Seconds question mark rightmost character column Errored Seconds indicates...
  • Page 945 TEST-TRMSN-T3 Page TEST-TRMSN-T3 test interrupted aborted, following message displayed: following denial message will output test cannot performed other activity system: When this command entered, following confirmation message displayed: RELATED COMMANDS opr-lpbk-t3 rls-lpbk-t3 rtrv-pm-t3 Issue June 2000 11-385 DDM-2000 FiberReach...

  • Page 946: Toggle (Ctl-T)

    TOGGLE (Ctl-T) Page TOGGLE (Ctl-T) NAME toggle: Toggle Between Local Remote Sessions INPUT FORMAT (Press t " " while holding key) CTRL DESCRIPTION This command toggles user between local remote sessions. provides quick easy switch from local session remote session, while terminating either...
  • Page 947 TOGGLE (Ctl-T) Page TOGGLE (Ctl-T) RELATED COMMANDS logout rlgn Issue June 2000 11-387 DDM-2000 FiberReach...

  • Page 948: Upd

    Page NAME upd: Update Equipment List INPUT FORMAT upd; DESCRIPTION CAUTION: Execution this command affect service. This command updates system data base recorded nonvolatile memory) reflect existing hardware configuration incoming signals. This command executed either pushing Update/Initialize button, located SYSCTL circuit pack entering...
  • Page 949 Page This command should executed after following: Removing circuit pack — Activating command following circuit pack removal deletes circuit pack from equipment list clears associated alarm. This command also changes slot state Failure update after removing circuit pack will continue auto "CP removed"...
  • Page 950 Page ALARM RESTRICTIONS Pressing button issuing command will not change update provisioning following alarms exist. user will have correct alarmed condition before executing this command. These alarms are: illegal type allowed reason) invalid switches. SYSTEM RESTRICTIONS CORRECTIVE ACTIONS Pressing button issuing command will...
  • Page 951 Page slot pairs, circuit pack pair removed long other remains support cross-connection. rings systems, MAIN circuit packs special cross-connections system must deleted before addressed circuit pack removed. Upgrades from Slot Upgrades from Slot pair permitted when Slot equipped. documented upgrade procedures change Corrective...
  • Page 952 Page protection switch request forced, inhibit or specified lockout slot that empty, entering command cause protection switch occur possibly affecting service. When this occurs, following confirmation message will displayed: RELATED COMMANDS dlt-crs-vt1 rtrv-crs-sts1 rtrv-crs-vt1 rtrv-state-eqpt rtrv-state-path set-state-t1 11-392 Issue June 2000 DDM-2000 FiberReach...
  • Page 953 DETAILED REPORTS DETAILED REPORTS Detailed Alarm History Reports This section provides details Retrieve Alarm Retrieve History commands with explanations specific output messages. Each command includes INPUT FORMAT part, providing syntax command, DESCRIPTION part, providing details command input output parameters. Following DESCRIPTION part table...
  • Page 954 RTRV-ALM Page RTRV-ALM Report Description Report Description NAME rtrv-alm: Retrieve Alarm Status INPUT FORMAT rtrv-alm[:alm= AlarmLevel ]; DESCRIPTION This command displays report active alarm status conditions local network element. report includes source address alarm, well date time alarm, whether condition service affecting, short...
  • Page 955 RTRV-ALM Page RTRV-ALM Report Description Report Description Example Alarm Report: output parameters are: Alarm level alarm status condition being reported. Alarm Level status condition named status there user panel illuminated that condition. alarm condition name topmost user panel that illuminated following conditions: CRITICAL...
  • Page 956 RTRV-ALM Page RTRV-ALM Report Description Report Description Refer Table 11-1 other source addresses. Month (MM) (DD) event. Date Detected Time (Hours, Minute, Seconds) event occurrence. Time Detected indicates whether condition service affecting not, have following values: Service affecting service affecting applicable this condition...
  • Page 957 RTRV-ALM Page RTRV-ALM Report Description Report Description Table 11-3. RTRV-ALM Descriptions Description Meaning BBF6 (T1EXT) circuit packs require both function reqd BBF6 unit slots group equipped. second circuit pack same type should inserted empty function unit slot. − A − volt power feeder...
  • Page 958 RTRV-ALM Page RTRV-ALM Report Description Report Description Table 11-3. RTRV-ALM Descriptions (Contd) Description Meaning specified environmental control point controln (miscellaneous discrete output) active. Note: actual message that appears alarm status report this condition provisioned; this default message. rtrv-attr-cont and set-attr-cont commands. Cause: system instructed...
  • Page 959 RTRV-ALM Page RTRV-ALM Report Description Report Description Table 11-3. RTRV-ALM Descriptions (Contd) Description Meaning loopback (toward optical fiber) active loopback Fiber) specified port. Starting with FiberReach Release 3.1, this alarm applicable Main unit slots equipped with 28-type OLIUs Function unit slots equipped with...
  • Page 960 RTRV-ALM Page RTRV-ALM Report Description Report Description Table 11-3. RTRV-ALM Descriptions (Contd) Description Meaning This alarm condition raised when network element dormant/exec code mismatch detects that contains dormant software with release number that does match release number executing software. specified environmental alarm point...
  • Page 961 RTRV-ALM Page RTRV-ALM Report Description Report Description Table 11-3. RTRV-ALM Descriptions (Contd) Description Meaning When associated with line, this message means that forced switch identified line selected active receiving line, automatic manual protection switch make this active receiving line will done.

  • Page 962: Rtrv-Alm Descriptions

    RTRV-ALM Page RTRV-ALM Report Description Report Description Table 11-3. RTRV-ALM Descriptions (Contd) Description Meaning system holdover synchronization mode. holdover mode active Likely causes: system manually switched holdover mode (with command) switch-sync switch been reset system automatically switched holdover mode failure timing references, follows:...
  • Page 963 RTRV-ALM Page RTRV-ALM Report Description Report Description Table 11-3. RTRV-ALM Descriptions (Contd) Description Meaning error ratio (BER) signal incoming from inc. (from DSX) fail DSX-1 exceeds provisioned failure threshold, −3 −6 −7 −8 Likely causes: Mismatch line code (AMI/B8ZS); failure upstream equipment facility...
  • Page 964 RTRV-ALM Page RTRV-ALM Report Description Report Description Table 11-3. RTRV-ALM Descriptions (Contd) Description Meaning system detected out-of-frame (OOF) inc. (from fiber) condition DEMUX direction (that coming from fiber) specified signal. This condition reported only interface provisioned mode. Starting with FiberReach Release 3.1, this...
  • Page 965 RTRV-ALM Page RTRV-ALM Report Description Report Description Table 11-3. RTRV-ALM Descriptions (Contd) Description Meaning system detected loss-of-frame (LOF) inc. OC12 condition incoming OC-12 signal. defined out-of-frame (OOF) condition (four consecutive errored STS-1 framing patterns) that lasts least milliseconds. Likely causes: Failure OLIU near...
  • Page 966 RTRV-ALM Page RTRV-ALM Report Description Report Description Table 11-3. RTRV-ALM Descriptions (Contd) Description Meaning system detected OC-3 receive inc. FERF failure (FERF) signal incoming OC-3 signal. Likely causes: detected incoming signal failure specified OC-3 line. This caused failure OLIU near end, OLIU end,...
  • Page 967 RTRV-ALM Page RTRV-ALM Report Description Report Description Table 11-3. RTRV-ALM Descriptions (Contd) Description Meaning system detected OC-3 line alarm indication inc. line signal (AIS) incoming OC-3 line. Likely cause: Failure OLIU end. Starting with FiberReach Release 3.1, this message associated with 28-type OLIU...
  • Page 968 RTRV-ALM Page RTRV-ALM Report Description Report Description Table 11-3. RTRV-ALM Descriptions (Contd) Description Meaning system detected loss-of-signal (LOS) condition inc. OC-1 line. Likely causes: Failure OLIU near end, failure OLIU end, failure receive fiber. system detected OC-1 line alarm indication inc.
  • Page 969 RTRV-ALM Page RTRV-ALM Report Description Report Description Table 11-3. RTRV-ALM Descriptions (Contd) Description Meaning system detected loss-of-pointer (LOP) inc. STS1 OC12 condition. valid STS-1 pointer could found eight consecutive frames identified STS-1 signal. Likely causes: this condition occurs only line, likely cause failure...
  • Page 970 RTRV-ALM Page RTRV-ALM Report Description Report Description Table 11-3. RTRV-ALM Descriptions (Contd) Description Meaning STS-1 path switched ring applications, error inc. STS1 sig. degrade (BER) ratio (BER) specified STS-1 signal exceeds user-provisioned signal degrade threshold. Likely causes: Failure fiber failure OLIU circuit pack...
  • Page 971 RTRV-ALM Page RTRV-ALM Report Description Report Description Table 11-3. RTRV-ALM Descriptions (Contd) Description Meaning system detected path alarm indication inc. signal (AIS) incoming from active OC-n line. system responds transmitting toward DSX-1 interface yellow back toward fiber from which being received.
  • Page 972 RTRV-ALM Page RTRV-ALM Report Description Report Description Table 11-3. RTRV-ALM Descriptions (Contd) Description Meaning system detected unequipped code (SONET inc. unequipped path overhead signal code label byte=0) service VT1.5 channel. Likely cause: upstream VT1.5 cross-connect been deleted. detecting inserting inc. yellow yellow transmit...
  • Page 973 RTRV-ALM Page RTRV-ALM Report Description Report Description Table 11-3. RTRV-ALM Descriptions (Contd) Description Meaning system been reset with low-speed protection prot assembly removed assembly installed. This valid system configuration. user should install speed protection assembly execute reset function. attempt change low-speed protection mode...
  • Page 974 RTRV-ALM Page RTRV-ALM Report Description Report Description Table 11-3. RTRV-ALM Descriptions (Contd) Description Meaning system cannot communicate with far-end section channel failed system through SONET section data communications channel (DCC) Likely causes: SYSCTL OHCTL failure, reset, initialization end; failed program installation end;...
  • Page 975 RTRV-HSTY Page RTRV-HSTY NAME rtrv-hsty:Retrieve History INPUT FORMAT rtrv-hsty; DESCRIPTION This command displays event-history report. This report contains list most recent system events. This report contains events. events listed last-in, first-out order date- time-stamped. output report appears follows: output parameters are: Month (MM)
  • Page 976 RTRV-HSTY Page RTRV-HSTY Critical Alarm CRITICAL Major Alarm MAJOR Minor Alarm MINOR Power Minor Alarm MINOR Abnormal condition abnormal Near-End Activity ne-acty Far-End Activity This alarm level fe-acty reported TARP releases. Status condition status — active alarm status condition system. source event.
  • Page 977 RTRV-HSTY Page RTRV-HSTY Table 11-4. RTRV-HSTY Descriptions Description Meaning failed volt power feeder failed fuse -48V power/fuse good user panel been repaired. circuit pack been removed from specified slot. removed power supply remote terminal cabinet power failed-FE clrd been restored. power supply shelf...
  • Page 978 RTRV-HSTY Page RTRV-HSTY Table 11-4. RTRV-HSTY Descriptions (Contd) Description Meaning automatic protection switch synchronization auto sync. mode switch mode active. When failure that caused switch done clears, switch will reset automatically automatic mode switching enabled. (See set-sync and rtrv-sync commands.) craft interface terminal...
  • Page 979 RTRV-HSTY Page RTRV-HSTY Table 11-4. RTRV-HSTY Descriptions (Contd) Description Meaning DS1PM circuit pack inserted into shelf. DS1PM inserted failure been cleared. This good applicable starting with FiberReach Release circuit pack inserted into shelf. This inserted applicable starting with FiberReach Release port in-service state.
  • Page 980 RTRV-HSTY Page RTRV-HSTY Table 11-4. RTRV-HSTY Descriptions (Contd) Description Meaning system longer holdover timing mode. holdover mode clrd switched from holdover mode provisioned timing mode LoopTimed). failure signal coming from inc. good interface cleared. LAN, failure signal coming from (high speed) fiber cleared.
  • Page 981 RTRV-HSTY Page RTRV-HSTY Table 11-4. RTRV-HSTY Descriptions (Contd) Description Meaning system longer detecting OC-3 inc. FERF clrd receive failure (FERF) signal. This event applicable starting with FiberReach 3.1, when shelf equipped with 28-type OLIUs Main unit slots. failure OC-3 line been cleared.
  • Page 982 RTRV-HSTY Page RTRV-HSTY Table 11-4. RTRV-HSTY Descriptions (Contd) Description Meaning STS-1 alarm indication signal (AIS) longer inc. STS1 clrd being received. upstream failure direction) cleared. system longer detecting loss-of-pointer inc. STS1 OC12 slot clrd (LOP) condition specified STS-1 signal. system longer detecting loss-of-pointer...
  • Page 983 RTRV-HSTY Page RTRV-HSTY Table 11-4. RTRV-ALM Descriptions (Contd) Description Meaning login session with user’s login identification been login: login_id started specified port. Starting with FiberReach Release 4.0, this applicable X.25 port also. login session attempted denied because login: login_id DENY invalid login password...
  • Page 984 RTRV-HSTY Page RTRV-HSTY Table 11-4. RTRV-ALM Descriptions (Contd) Description Meaning Equipment switching ring application occurred main-{1,2} protection switch equipment failure. failure specified circuit pack cleared. OLIU good circuit pack inserted into shelf. OLIU inserted alarm indicating that low-speed protection slot protection different clrd...

  • Page 985: Rtrv-Hsty Descriptions

    RTRV-HSTY Page RTRV-HSTY Table 11-4. RTRV-HSTY Descriptions (Contd) Description Meaning failure SONET section data communications channel section channel good cleared. STS1 channel in-service state. This happens STS1 channel service automatically when "good" signal detected channel (neither AIS, unequipped signal, "loss pointer"...
  • Page 986 RTRV-HSTY Page RTRV-HSTY 11-426 Issue June 2000 DDM-2000 FiberReach...

  • Page 987: A Sonet Overview

    A SONET Overview Contents Overview History Basic Purpose Technical Overview SONET Signal Hierarchy SONET Layers SONET Frame Structure Section Overhead Line Overhead Path Overhead STS-1 Path Overhead VT Path Overhead SONET Multiplexing Procedure A-10 A-10 SONET Demultiplexing Procedure A-12 A-12 SONET Digital Multiplexing Schemes A-14 A-14...
  • Page 988 Contents A-ii Issue 3 June 2000...

  • Page 989: A Sonet Overview

    A SONET Overview Overview This section briefly describes the Synchronous Optical Network (SONET). History In the early 1980s, the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) recognized the need for an optical signal standard for future broadband transmission. The ANSI T1X1 subcommittee began working on optical signal and interface standards in 1984.

  • Page 990: Basic Purpose

    363-206-305 A SONET Overview Basic Purpose The basic purpose of SONET is to provide a standard synchronous optical hierarchy with sufficient flexibility to accommodate digital signals that currently exist in today's network as well as those planned for the future. SONET currently defines standard rates and formats and optical interfaces.
  • Page 991 A SONET Overview Since each STS-1 frame consists of 810 bytes and each byte has 8 bits, the frame contains 6480 bits a frame. There are 8000 STS-1 frames per second, at the STS-1 signal rate of 51,840,000 (6480 X 8000) bits a second. The first three columns in each of the nine rows carry the SECTION and LINE overhead bytes.

  • Page 992: Sonet Layers

    363-206-305 A SONET Overview SONET Layers SONET divides its processing functions into three layers. These three layers are associated with equipment that reflects the natural divisions in network spans. Figure A-2 shows these defined layers in a signal path. They include: SECTION and Section Terminating Equipment - the transmission spans between lightwave terminating equipment and the regenerators.
  • Page 993 A SONET Overview Each SONET layer has a set of overhead bytes as shown in Figure A-3. These bytes carry information used by various network elements. Section Overhead contains information that is used by all SONET equipment including repeaters. Line Overhead is used by all SONET equipment except repeaters. Path Overhead is carried within the payload envelope.

  • Page 994: Sonet Frame Structure

    363-206-305 A SONET Overview SONET Frame Structure The following pages provide more detailed information on the function of various overhead bytes for each SONET layer. Section Overhead Framing (A1, A2) — Provides framing for each STS-1. STS-1 ID (J0) — Provides the order of appearance in a byte-interleaved STS- N frame;...

  • Page 995: Line Overhead

    A SONET Overview Line Overhead Line Pointer (H1, H2) — Two bytes indicate the offset in bytes between the pointer action byte (H3) and the first byte (J1) of the STS-1 synchronous payload envelope (SPE). Pointer Action (H3) — One byte is allocated for frequency justification. Line Bit-Interleaved Parity (BIP-8) (B2) —...

  • Page 996: Path Overhead

    363-206-305 A SONET Overview Path Overhead There are two types of path overheads: — STS-1 path overhead — VT path overhead. STS-1 Path Overhead The STS-1 path overhead is assigned to and remains with the STS-1 SPE until the payload is extracted and is used for functions that are necessary to transport all synchronous payload envelopes.

  • Page 997: Vt Path Overhead Byte

    A SONET Overview VT Path Overhead There is one byte of VT path overhead called V5. It occurs on every fourth frame; that is, 2000 times a second. This byte provides for VT paths the same functions that B3, C2, and G1 provide for STS paths, namely: Error checking Signal label...

  • Page 998: Sonet Multiplexing Procedure

    363-206-305 A SONET Overview SONET Multiplexing Procedure SONET has provisions for multiplexing asynchronous DS1s, synchronous DS1s, and asynchronous DS3s. Refer to Figures A-5 and A-6. The first stage in multiplexing is mapping the input DS1 or DS3 tributary. In the case of DS1 inputs, three time slots (DS0s) are added to the incoming signal thus becoming a VT1.5.

  • Page 999: Sonet Multiplexing Procedure

    A SONET Overview DS3 to STS-1 Multiplexer Maps 1 DS3 into STS-1 SPE Adds STS-1 Path OH (Nine Time Slots) Builds STS-1 STS-1 to OC-3 Frame Multiplexer STS-1 #3 DS1 to VTG Multiplexer Byte-Interleaves VTG to STS-1 3 STS-1s into Multiplexer STS-1 #2 a STS-3...

  • Page 1000: Sonet Demultiplexing Procedure

    363-206-305 A SONET Overview SONET Demultiplexing Procedure As shown in Figure A-6, demultiplexing is the inverse of multiplexing. The unscrambled STS-1 signal from the optical conversion stages is processed to extract the section and line overhead and accurately locate the SPE. The next stage processes the path overhead and demultiplexes the VTs.

Table of Contents